CMC AC Variable Speed Drive
Series S
1 - 30 HP (230/460V)
Installation, Operation and
Maintenance Instruction
Read this manual carefully before installing, wiring,
operating, servicing or inspecting the drive.
Keep this manual within easy reach for quick reference.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢀ Operate the switches with dry hands.
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.
ꢀ Do not use the cable when its insulating tube is damaged.
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.
ꢀ Do not subject the cables to scratches, excessive stress, heavy loads or pinching.
Otherwise, you may get an electric shock.
CAUTION
ꢀ Install the inverter on a non-flammable surface. Do not place flammable material nearby.
Otherwise, fire could occur.
ꢀ Disconnect the input power if the inverter gets damaged.
Otherwise, it could result in a secondary accident and fire.
ꢀ After the input power is applied or removed, the inverter will remain hot for a couple of
minutes.
Otherwise, you may get bodily injuries such as skin-burn or damage.
ꢀ Do not apply power to a damaged inverter or to an inverter with parts missing even if the
installation is complete.
Otherwise, electric shock could occur.
ꢀ Do not allow lint, paper, wood chips, dust, metallic chips or other foreign matter into the
drive.
Otherwise, fire or accident could occur.
OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
(1) Handling and installation
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
Handle according to the weight of the product.
Do not stack the inverter boxes higher than the number recommended.
Install according to instructions specified in this manual.
Do not open the cover during delivery.
Do not place heavy items on the inverter.
Check the inverter mounting orientation is correct.
Do not drop the inverter, or subject it to impact.
Verify that the inverter is solidly grounded. Use ground impedance of 100ohm or less for 200 V Class and
10ohm or less for 400V class.
ꢁ
Take protective measures against ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) before touching the pcb for inspection or
installation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢁ
Use the inverter under the following environmental conditions:
Ambient
temperature
- 10 ~ 40 ℃ (non-freezing)
Relative
90% RH or less (non-condensing)
humidity
Storage
- 20 ~ 65 ℃
temperature
Location
Altitude,
Vibration
Atmospheric
pressure
Protected from corrosive gas, combustible gas, oil mist or dust
Max. 1,000m above sea level, Max. 5.9m/sec2 (0.6G)
or less
70 ~ 106 kPa
(2) Wiring
ꢁ
ꢁ
Do not connect a power factor correction capacitor, surge suppressor, or RFI filter to the output of the inverter.
The connection orientation of the output cables U, V, W to the motor will affect the direction of rotation of the
motor.
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
Incorrect terminal wiring could result in the equipment damage.
Reversing the polarity (+/-) of the terminals could damage the inverter.
Only authorized personnel familiar with CMC inverter should perform wiring and inspections.
Always install the inverter before wiring. Otherwise, you may get an electric shock or have bodily injury.
(3) Trial run
ꢁ
ꢁ
Check all parameters during operation. Changing parameter values might be required depending on the load.
Always apply permissible range of voltage to the each terminal as indicated in this manual. Otherwise, it could
lead to inverter damage.
(4) Operation precautions
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
When the Auto restart function is selected, stay away from the equipment as a motor will restart suddenly after
an alarm stop.
The Stop key on the keypad is valid only when the appropriate function setting has been made. Prepare an
emergency stop switch separately.
If an alarm reset is made with the reference signal present, a sudden start will occur. Check that the reference
signal is turned off in advance. Otherwise an accident could occur.
Do not modify or alter anything inside the inverter.
Motor might not be protected by electronic thermal function of inverter.
Do not use a magnetic contactor on the inverter input for frequent starting/stopping of the inverter.
Use a noise filter to reduce the effect of electromagnetic interference. Otherwise nearby electronic equipment
may be affected.
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
In case of input voltage unbalance, install AC reactor. Power Factor capacitors and generators may become
overheated and damaged due to potential high frequency noise transmitted from inverter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ꢁ
Use an insulation-rectified motor or take measures to suppress the micro surge voltage when driving 400V
class motor with inverter. A micro surge voltage attributable to wiring constant is generated at motor terminals,
and may deteriorate insulation and damage motor.
ꢁ
ꢁ
Before operating unit and prior to user programming, reset user parameters to default settings.
Inverter can easily be set to high-speed operations, Verify capability of motor or machinery prior to operating
unit.
ꢁ
Stopping torque is not produced when using the DC-Break function. Install separate equipment when stopping
torque is needed.
(5) Fault prevention precautions
ꢁ
Provide a safety backup such as an emergency brake which will prevent the machine and equipment from
hazardous conditions if the inverter fails.
(6) Maintenance, inspection and parts replacement
ꢁ
ꢁ
Do not conduct a megger (insulation resistance) test on the control circuit of the inverter.
Refer to Chapter 8 for periodic inspection (parts replacement).
(7) Disposal
ꢁ
Handle the inverter as an industrial waste when disposing of it.
(8) General instructions
ꢁ
Many of the diagrams and drawings in this instruction manual show the inverter without a circuit breaker, a
cover or partially open. Never run the inverter like this. Always place the cover with circuit breakers and follow
this instruction manual when operating the inverter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTENTS
USER SELECTION GUIDE (ACTIONMASTER SPECIFICATIONS) .....................................................................II
CHAPTER 1 - INSTALLATION...................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
Inspection..........................................................................................................................................................1-2
Environmental Conditions ...............................................................................................................................1-2
Mounting............................................................................................................................................................1-2
Other Precautions.............................................................................................................................................1-2
Dimensions........................................................................................................................................................1-2
Basic Wiring ......................................................................................................................................................1-2
Power Terminals ...............................................................................................................................................1-2
Control Terminals .............................................................................................................................................1-2
CHAPTER 2 - OPERATION........................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Parameter Groups.............................................................................................................................................2-2
LCD Keypad.......................................................................................................................................................2-2
7-Segment Keypad............................................................................................................................................2-2
Operation Method .............................................................................................................................................2-2
CHAPTER 3 - QUICK-START PROCEDURES ............................................................................................. 3-2
3.1
3.2
3.3
Operation using Keypad...................................................................................................................................3-2
Operation using Control Terminals.................................................................................................................3-2
Operation using Keypad and Control Terminals............................................................................................3-2
CHAPTER 4 - VARIOUS FUNCTION SETTING & DESCRIPTION............................................................... 4-2
4.1
4.2
Function Setting................................................................................................................................................4-2
Operation Example ...........................................................................................................................................4-2
CHAPTER 5 - PARAMETER LIST................................................................................................................. 5-2
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
Drive Group [DRV] ............................................................................................................................................5-2
Function 1 Group [FU1]....................................................................................................................................5-2
Function 2 Group [FU2]....................................................................................................................................5-2
Input/Output Group [I/O]...................................................................................................................................5-2
External Group [EXT]........................................................................................................................................5-2
Communication Group [COM] .........................................................................................................................5-2
Application Group [APP]..................................................................................................................................5-2
Sub-Board Selection Guide According To Function .....................................................................................5-2
CHAPTER 6 - PARAMETER DESCRIPTION................................................................................................ 6-2
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
Drive group [DRV].............................................................................................................................................6-2
Function 1 Group [FU1]....................................................................................................................................6-2
Function 2 Group [FU2]....................................................................................................................................6-2
Input/Output Group [I/O]...................................................................................................................................6-2
External Group [EXT]........................................................................................................................................6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.6
Application Group [APP]..................................................................................................................................6-2
CHAPTER 7 - OPTIONS................................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
Sub-A board ......................................................................................................................................................7-2
Sub-B Board......................................................................................................................................................7-2
Sub-C Board (Isolated).....................................................................................................................................7-2
Sub-D Board......................................................................................................................................................7-2
Communication option boards........................................................................................................................7-2
External options................................................................................................................................................7-2
CHAPTER 8 - TROUBLESHOOTING & MAINTENANCE............................................................................. 8-2
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
Fault Display......................................................................................................................................................8-2
Fault Remedy ....................................................................................................................................................8-2
Troubleshooting................................................................................................................................................8-2
How to Check Power Components..................................................................................................................8-2
Maintenance ......................................................................................................................................................8-2
Daily and Periodic Inspection Items................................................................................................................8-2
APPENDIX A - FUNCTIONS BASED ON USE..................................................................................................... II
APPENDIX B - PARAMETERS BASED ON APPLICATION ................................................................................ II
APPENDIX C - PERIPHERAL DEVICES .............................................................................................................. II
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY ...................................................................................................................... II
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USER SELECTION GUIDE (ACtionMaster SPECIFICATIONS)
230V Class (1 ~ 30HP)
Model Number
008
015
022
037
055
075
110
150
185
220
SV xxx ACtionMaster - 2
Motor
Rating1
HP
1
0.75
1.9
5
2
1.5
3.0
8
3
5
7.5
5.5
9.1
24
10
7.5
12.2
32
15
11
20
15
25
18.5
28.2
74
30
22
kW
2.2
4.5
12
3.7
6.1
16
Capacity2 [kVA]
FLA [A]
Frequency
Voltage
Voltage
Frequency
17.5
46
22.9
60
33.5
88
Output
Ratings
0 ~ 400 Hz (0-120Hz for Vector control)
200 ~ 230 V 3
Input
3 Phase, 200 ~ 230 V ( 10 %)
50 ~ 60 Hz ( 5 %)
Ratings
On the Board
Braking Circuit
On the Board
100%
On the Board
100%
Optional (Braking Unit, Resistor) 4
150%
(Optional Resistor)
Average Braking
Torque
Dynamic
Braking4
150%
Max. Continuous
Baking Time
Max. Duty
5 seconds
3 % ED
5 seconds
2 % ED
15 seconds
5 % ED
Controlled by Braking Unit 5
5 % ED
Weight [lbs]
10.1
10.1
10.6
10.8
16.5
17.0
30.4
31.5
42.8
44.1
460V Class (1 ~ 30HP)
Model Number
008
015
022
037
055
075
110
150
185
220
SV xxx ACtionMaster - 4
Motor
Rating1
HP
1
2
3
5
7.5
5.5
9.1
12
10
7.5
12.2
16
15
11
20
15
25
18.5
29.7
39
30
22
kW
0.75
1.9
2.5
1.5
3.0
4
2.2
4.5
6
3.7
6.1
8
Capacity2 [kVA]
18.3
24
22.9
30
34.3
45
Output
FLA [A]
Ratings
Frequency
Voltage
0 ~ 400 Hz (0-120Hz for Vector control)
380 ~ 460 V 3
Input
Voltage
3 Phase, 380 ~ 460 V ( 10 %)
50 ~ 60 Hz ( 5 %)
Ratings
Dynamic
Braking4
Frequency
Braking Circuit
On the Board
(Optional Resistor)
150%
On the Board
100%
On the Board
100%
Optional (Braking Unit, Resistor) 4
150%
Max. Braking Torque
1 Indicates the maximum applicable capacity when using a 4 Pole motor.
2 Rated capacity (√ 3*V*I) is based on 220V for 200V class and 440V for 400V class.
3 Maximum output voltage will not be greater than the input voltage. Output voltage less than the input voltage may be programmed.
4 1~5 HP inverters have internal braking resistors as standard. 7.5~10 HP inverters utilize optional braking resistors.
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Max. Continuous
Baking Time
Max. Duty
5 seconds
3 % ED
5 seconds
2 % ED
15 seconds
5 % ED
Controlled by Braking Unit 5
5 % ED
Weight [lbs]
10.4
10.4
10.6
10.8
17.0
17.0
30.6
31.7
44.1
44.1
460V Class (40 ~ 100HP)
Model Number
300
370
450
550
750
SV xxx ACtionMaster - 4
40
30
45
61
50
37
56
75
60
45
68
91
75
55
100
75
Motor
Rating1
HP
kW
Capacity2 [kVA]
82
100
152
110
Output
FLA [A]
Ratings
Frequency
Voltage
0 ~ 400 Hz (0-120Hz for Vector control)
380 ~ 460 V 3
Input
Voltage
3 Phase, 380 ~ 460 V ( 10 %)
Ratings
Frequency
Braking Circuit
50 ~ 60 Hz ( 5 %)
Optional (Braking Unit, Resistor) 4
Max. Braking Torque 150%
Max. Continuous
Dynamic
Braking4
Controlled by Braking Unit 5
Baking Time
Max. Duty
5 % ED
Weight [lbs]
45
45
63
63
68
Common Features Specification
Control Method
V/F Control,
Sensorless Vector Control (Speed/Torque), Sensored Vector Control (Speed/Torque) Selectable
Digital Reference: 0.01 Hz (Below 100 Hz), 0.1 Hz (Over 100 Hz)
Analog Reference: 0.03 Hz / 60 Hz
Frequency Setting
Resolution
Frequency Accuracy
Digital: 0.01 % of Max. Output Frequency
Analog: 0.1 % of Max. Output Frequency
V/F Ratio
Linear, Square Pattern, User V/F
Overload Capacity
150 % of Rated Current for 1 Min., 200% of Rated Current for 0.5 sec. (Characteristic is Inversely
Proportional to Time)
Torque Boost
Manual Torque Boost (0 ~ 20 %), Auto Torque Boost
Key / Terminal / Communication Operation
Operation Method
Frequency Setting
Analog: 0 ~ 10V / 4 ~ 20mA / Additional ports (VR: +12V, 10mA, V2: 0-10V) for Sub-Boards
Digital: Keypad
Start Signal
Multi-Step
Forward, Reverse
Up to 8 Speeds can be Set (Use Multi-Function Terminal)
0 ~ 6,000 sec, Up to 4 Types can be Set and Selectable for Each Setting (Use Multi- Function
Terminal)
Multi Step
Accel/Decel Time
Accel/Decel Pattern: Linear, U-Curve, S-Curve Selectable
Instantly Interrupts the Inverter Output
Emergency Stop
5
Refer to Chapter 7 Options for DBU and DB Resistors
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Jog
Jog Operation
Auto Operation
Fault Reset
Operating Status
Operates via Internal Sequence by Setting Multi-Function Terminal (5 Way * 8 Step)
Trip Status is Removed when Protection Function is Activated
Frequency Detection Level, Overload Alarm, Stalling, Over Voltage, Under Voltage, Inverter
Overheating, Running, Stop, Constant Speed, Inverter By-Pass, Speed Searching, Auto-Operation
Step, Auto-Operation Sequence
Fault Output
Contact Output (30A, 30C, 30B) – AC 250V 1A, DC 30V 1A
Indicator(FM,LM)
Choose 1 from Output Frequency, Output Current, Output Voltage, DC Voltage, Output Torque
Output Voltage: 0 ~ 10V (for FM: Linear output, 15V Max., LM), Pulse output: 500Hz (for LM).
DC Braking, Frequency Limit, Frequency Jump, Second Function, Slip Compensation, Reverse
Rotation Prevention, Auto Restart, Inverter By-Pass, Auto-Tuning, PID Control
Over Voltage, Under Voltage, Over Current, Fuse Open, Ground Fault, Inverter Overheating, Motor
Overheating, Output Phase Open,
Operation Function
Inverter Trip
Overload Protection, External Fault 1, 2, Communication Error, Loss of Speed Command, Hardware
Fault, Option Fault etc.
Inverter Alarm
Stall Prevention, Overload Alarm, Temperature Sensor Fault
Momentary Power Loss
Less than 15msec: Continuous Operation,
More than 15msec: Auto Restart Possible
Operation
Output Frequency, Output Current, Output Voltage, Frequency Value Setting, Operating Speed, DC
Voltage, Output Torque
Information
Keypad
Trip
Indicates a Fault when the Protection Function activates, Retains Up to 5 Faults
Information
Ambient Temperature
Storage Temperature
Ambient Humidity
Altitude - Vibration
Air Pressure
-10 °C ~ 40 °C (14 °F ~ 104 °F), CE Certification: 41 °F ~ 104 °F (5 °C ~ 40 °C)
-20 °C ~ 65 °C (-4 °F ~ 149 °F)
Less Than 90 % RH Max. (Non-Condensing), CE Certification: 5 ~85% (Non-Condensing)
Below 1,000m or 3,300ft above sea level · Below 5.9m/sec2 (=0.6g)
86 ~ 106kPa
Application Site
No Corrosive Gas, Combustible Gas, Oil Mist, or Dust
Forced Air Cooling
Cooling Method
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 1 -
INSTALLATION
1.1 Inspection
ꢂ
Inspect the inverter for any damage that may have occurred during shipping.
ꢂ
Check the nameplate on the inverter. Verify the inverter unit is the correct one for the application. The numbering
system for the inverter is as shown below.
SV 008 AC
2
N
U
CMC Inverter
Motor Capacity
008: 1 HP 185: 25 HP
015: 2 HP 220: 30 HP
022: 3 HP 300: 40 HP
037: 5 HP 370: 50 HP
055: 7.5 HP 450: 60 HP
075: 10 HP 550: 75 HP
110: 15 HP 750: 100 HP
150: 20 HP
Series Name
Input Voltage
2 : 200 ~ 230V (±10%) 50/60Hz
4 : 380 ~ 460V (±10%) 50/60Hz
UL Listed
(UL508C)
Without
Keypad
1.2 Environmental Conditions
ꢂ
Verify ambient condition for the mounting location.
- Ambient temperature should not be below 14ºF (-10ºC) or exceed 104ºF (40ºC).
- Relative humidity should be less than 90% (non-condensing).
- Altitude should be below 3,300ft (1,000m).
ꢂ
ꢂ
Do not mount the inverter in direct sunlight and isolate it from excessive vibration.
If the inverter is going to be installed in an environment with high probability of penetration of dust, it must be located
inside watertight electrical boxes, in order to get the suitable IP degree.
1.3 Mounting
The inverter must be mounted vertically with sufficient horizontal and vertical space between adjacent equipment
ꢂ
(A= Over 6" (150mm), B= Over 2" (50mm)).
A
B
B
A
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 - Installation
1.4 Other Precautions
ꢂ
ꢂ
Do not carry the inverter by the front cover.
Do not install the inverter in a location where excessive vibration is present. Be cautious when installing on presses or
moving equipment.
ꢂ
The life span of the inverter is greatly affected by the ambient temperature. Install in a location where temperature are
within permissible limits (- 10 ~ 40 ℃).
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
The inverter operates at high-temperatures - install on a non-combustible surface.
Do not install the inverter in high-temperature or high-humidity locations.
Do not install the inverter in a location where oil mist, combustible gas, or dust is present. Install the inverter in a clean
location or in an enclosed panel, free of foreign substance.
ꢂ
When installing the inverter inside a panel with multiple inverters or a ventilation fan, use caution.
If installed incorrectly, the ambient temperature may exceed specified limits.
Panel
Panel
Ventilating fan
Inverter
Inverter Inverter
Inverter
Cooling fan
GOOD (O)
BAD (X)
GOOD (O)
[When installing a ventilating fan in a panel]
BAD (X)
[When installing several inverters in a panel]
ꢂ
Install the inverter using screws or bolts to insure the inverter is firmly fastened.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 - Installation
1.5 Dimensions
ꢀ
ꢀ
Frame # 1: 1 ~ 5 HP
Frame # 2: 7.5 ~ 10 HP
Frame
HP
1
Model Number
SV008ACtionMa
ster-2/4
W1
W2
H1
H2
D1
2
3
SV015ACtionMa
ster-2/4
SV022ACtionMa
ster-2/4
150
(5.91)
130
(5.12)
284
(11.18)
269
(10.69)
156.5
(6.16)
Frame # 1
5
SV037ACtionMa
ster-2/4
7.5
10
SV055ACtionMa
ster-2/4
SV075ACtionMa
ster-2/4
200
(7.87)
180
(7.09)
355
(13.98)
340
(13.39)
182.5
(7.19)
Frame # 2
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 - Installation
BLANK
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 - Installation
ꢀ
ꢀ
Frame # 3: 15 ~ 20 HP
Frame # 4: 25 ~ 30 HP
mm (inches)
Frame
HP
15
Model Number
SV110ACtionMa
ster-2/4
SV150ACtionMa
ster-2/4
SV185ACtionMa
ster-2/4
SV220ACtionMa
ster-2/4
W1
W2
H1
H2
D1
250
(9.84)
230
(9.06)
385
(15.16)
370
(14.57)
201
(7.91)
Frame # 3
20
25
30
304
(11.97)
284
(11.18)
460
(18.11)
445
(17.52)
234
(9.21)
Frame # 4
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 - Installation
BLANK
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 - Installation
1.6 Basic Wiring
Dynamic
Braking Unit
(Optional)
DB Unit(Optional)4
DB Resitor
DC Bus Choke (Optional)3
P
N
B1 B2
DC Bus Choke
DB Resistor
MCCB(OPTION)
P11 P21 N1
3 φ
U
V
W
R
S
T
MOTOR
230/460 V
50/60 Hz
G ( )
+
FM
5G
FM
Output Frequency Meter
(0~10V Linear)
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
Inverter Disable
Fault Reset
FX
RX
BX
RST
JOG
Jog
Multi-function Input 1
Multi-function Input 2
Multi-function Input 3
P1
Factory Setting:
‘Speed-L’
‘Speed-M’
‘Speed-H’
P2
P3
(N.O.) A
C
Fault output relay
lless than AC250V, 1A
lless than DC30V, 1A
Common Terminal
CM
(N.C.) B
Potentiometer
(1 kohm, 1/2W)
Shield
Multi-function output relay1
lless than AC250V, 1A
lless than DC30V, 1A
Factory setting: ‘Run’
Power supply for
speed signal:
+ 11V, 10mA
AXA
AXB
VR
V1
I
Speed signal input:
0 ~ 10V
Speed signal input:
4 ~20mA (250ohm)
Common for
VR, V1, I
5G
Speed signal Input2
Note)
Main Circuit Terminals
Control Circuit Terminals.
1. The terminal configuration varies depend on the model number. Please refer to the ‘1.7 Power terminals’.
2. Analog speed command may be set by Voltage, Current or both.
3. When installing the DC Reactor, the Common Busbar between P1 and P2 must be removed.
4. 1 ~ 10 HP inverters have on-board braking circuit. Braking resistors are only included for 1 ~ 5 inverters.
15 ~ 30 HP inverters need optional braking unit and resistor for dynamic braking.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 - Installation
1.7 Power Terminals
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
Type A Configuration: 1 ~ 5 HP (SV008ACtionMaster-2, SV015ACtionMaster-2, SV022ACtionMaster-2,
SV037ACtionMaster-2, SV008ACtionMaster-4, SV015ACtionMaster-4, SV022ACtionMaster-4, SV037ACtionMaster-4)
R
S
T
G
N
B1
B2
U
V
W
Type B Configuration: 7.5 ~ 10 HP (SV055ACtionMaster-2, SV075ACtionMaster-2, SV055ACtionMaster-4,
SV075ACtionMaster-4)
R
S
T
G
P
N
B1
B2
U
V
W
Type C Configuration: 15 ~ 30 HP (SV110ACtionMaster-2, SV150ACtionMaster-2, SV185ACtionMaster-2,
SV220ACtionMaster-2, SV110ACtionMaster-4, SV150ACtionMaster-4, SV185ACtionMaster-4, SV220ACtionMaster-4)
R
S
T
G
P1
P2
N
U
V
W
Symbols
Functions
R
S
T
AC Line Voltage Input
(3 Phase, 200 ~ 230VAC or 380 ~ 460VAC)
G
Earth Ground
Positive DC Bus Terminal
DB Unit (P-P5) Connection Terminals
P
(DB Unit may be added when more braking duty (More than 30%ED) is required)
P1
P2
External DC Reactor (P1-P2) and DB Unit (P2-P6) Connection Terminals
Negative DC Bus Terminal
DB Unit (N-N7) Connection Terminal
N
B1
B2
U
V
W
Dynamic Braking Resistor (B1-B2) Terminals
3 Phase Power Output Terminals to Motor
(3 Phase, 200 ~ 230VAC or 380 ~ 460VAC)
“Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes,
240 volts maximum for 230V class models and 480 volts maximum for 460V class models.”
6
This P terminal is provided on optional Dynamic Braking Unit.
7 This N terminal is provided on optional Dynamic Braking Unit.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 - Installation
1.7.1 Type A Configuration
As standard on the ACtionMaster inverter, this type of configuration has internal dynamic braking resistor of 3% ED. When
an application requires more braking duty, an external dynamic braking resistor may be connected instead of the internal
resistor.
R
S
T
G
N
B1 B2
U
V
W
3 Phase
Power Input
Motor
Dynamic Braking Resistor
Figure 1 – Type A Dynamic Braking Resistor Installation
1.7.2 Type B Configuration
A Dynamic Braking Resistor or a Dynamic Braking Unit may be added to ACtionMaster series inverters that have a Type B
configuration power terminal strip. As standard, this type of configuration has in
R
S
T
G
P
N
B1 B2
U
V
W
3 Phase
Power Input
Motor
Dynamic Braking Resistor
Figure 2 – Type B Dynamic Braking Resistor Installation
R
S
T
G
P
N
B1 B2
U
V
W
3 Phase
Power Input
Motor
Dynamic
Braking Unit
Dynamic Braking Resistor
Figure 3 – Type B Additional Dynamic Braking Unit and Resistor Installation
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 - Installation
1.7.3 Type C Configuration
A Dynamic Braking Unit or a DC Bus Choke or both of them may be added to ACtionMaster series inverters that have a
Type A Configuration power terminal strip.
Jumper Between P1 and P2 Must Be Removed in Order
to Install a DC Bus Choke.
R
S
T
G
P1 P2
N
U
V
W
3 Phase
Power Input
Motor
Dynamic
Braking
Unit
Dynamic Braking Resistor
DC Bus Choke
Figure 4 – Type C Dynamic Braking Unit, DC Bus Choke Installation
WARNING
Normal stray capacitance between the inverter chassis and the power devices inside the inverter and AC line
can provide a high impedance shock hazard. Refrain from applying power to the inverter if the inverter frame
(Power terminal G) is not grounded.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 - Installation
1.7.4 Wiring Power Terminals
ꢀ
Wiring Precautions
ꢂ
The internal circuits of the inverter will be damaged if the incoming power is connected and applied to output terminals
(U, V, W).
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
Use ring terminals with insulated caps when wiring the input power and motor wiring.
Do not leave wire fragments inside the inverter. Wire fragments can cause faults, breakdowns, and malfunctions.
For input and output, use wires with sufficient size to ensure voltage drop of less than 2%.
Motor torque may drop of operating at low frequencies and a long wire run between inverter and motor.
When more than one motor is connected to one inverter, total wire length should be less than 500m (1,640ft). Do not
use a 3-wire cable for long distances. Due to increased leakage capacitance between wires, over-current protective
feature may operate or equipment connected to the output side may malfunction.
Connect only recommended braking resistor between the B1 and B2 terminals. Never short B1 and B2 terminals.
Shorting terminals may cause internal damage to inverter.
The main circuit of the inverter contains high frequency noise, and can hinder communication equipment near the
inverter. To reduce noise, install line noise filters on the input side of the inverter.
Do not use power factor capacitor, surge killers, or RFI filters on the output side of the inverter. Doing so may damage
these components.
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
Always check whether the LCD and the charge lamp for the power terminal are OFF before wiring terminals. The
charge capacitor may hold high-voltage even after the power is disconnected. Use caution to prevent the possibility of
personal injury.
ꢀ
Grounding
ꢂ
The inverter is a high switching device, and leakage current may flow. Ground the inverter to avoid electrical shock.
Use caution to prevent the possibility of personal injury.
ꢂ
Connect only to the dedicated ground terminal of the inverter. Do not use the case or the chassis screw for grounding.
The protective earth conductor must be the first one in being connected and the last one in being disconnected.
As a minimum, grounding wire should meet the specifications listed below. Grounding wire should be as short as
possible and should be connected to the ground point as near as possible to the inverter.
ꢂ
ꢂ
Grounding wire Sizes, AWG (mm²)
Inverter Capacity
200V Class
12 ((3.5)
10 (5.5)
6 (14)
400VClass
14 (2)
Below 5 HP
7.5 ~ 10 HP
15 ~ 20 HP
25 ~ 30 HP
12 (3.5)
8 (8)
4 (22)
6 (14)
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 - Installation
Wires and Terminal Lugs
ꢀ
Refer to the following table for wires, terminal lugs, and screws used to connect the inverter power input
(R, S, T) and output (U, V, W).
Wire9
Screw
Ring Terminals
Terminal
Screw Size
Inverter Capacity
Torque8
AWG
mm²
(Kgf·cm)/lb-in
R,S,T
U,V,W
2-4
R,S,T
2
U,V,W
2
R,S,T
14
12
10
6
U,V,W
14
12
10
8
1 ~ 3 HP
5 HP
M3.5
M3.5
M4
15 / 10
15 / 10
15 / 10
15 / 10
26 / 18
26 / 18
45 / 31
45 / 31
15 / 10
15 / 10
15 / 10
26 / 18
26 / 18
45 / 31
45 / 31
2-4
2-4
2-4
3.5
5.5
14
14
22
30
38
2
3.5
5.5
8
7.5 HP
5.5-5
14-5
14-5
22-6
38-8
38-8
2-4
5.5-5
8-5
200V
10 HP
15 HP
20 HP
25 HP
30 HP
1 ~ 5 HP
7.5 HP
10 HP
15 HP
20 HP
25 HP
30 HP
M4
Class
M5
14-5
22-6
38-8
38-8
2-4
14
22
30
30
2
6
6
M5
4
4
M6
2
2
M6
2
2
M3.5
M4
14
12
12
10
6
14
14
12
10
8
5.5-5
14-5
14-5
22-6
38-8
38-8
5.5-5
8-5
3.5
3.5
5.5
14
14
22
2
M4
3.5
5.5
8
400V
Class
M5
14-5
22-6
38-8
38-8
M5
M6
8
6
8
M6
14
4
6
ꢀ
Power and Motor Connection
R
S
T
G
N
B1 B2
U
V
W
3 Phase
Power Input
Motor
Motor should be connected to the
U, V, and W terminals.
Power supply must be connected
to the R, S, and T terminals.
Connecting it to the U, V, and W
terminals causes internal damages
to the inverter. Arranging the phase
sequence is not necessary.
If the forward command (FX) is on,
the motor should rotate counter
clockwise when viewed from the load
side of the motor. If the motor rotates
in the reverse, switch the U and V
terminals.
8
Apply the rated torque to terminal screws. Loose screws can cause of short circuit or malfunction. Tightening the screws too much can
damage the terminals and cause a short circuit or malfunction.
9 Use copper wires only with 600V, 75℃ ratings.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 - Installation
1.8 Control Terminals
P1 P2 P3 FX RX NC VR V1
30A 30C 30B AXA AXC
JOG CM CM BX RST
I
FM 5G
Type
Symbol
Name
Description
Multi-Function Input
1, 2, 3
Used for Multi-Function Input Terminal.
P1, P2, P3
(Factory default is set to “Step Frequency 1, 2, 3”.)
FX
RX
Forward Run Command Forward Run When Closed and Stopped When Open.
Reverse Run Command Reverse Run When Closed and Stopped When Open.
Jog Frequency
Reference
Runs at Jog Frequency when the Jog Signal is ON. The Direction is set by
JOG
the FX (or RX) Signal.
When the BX Signal is ON the Output of the Inverter is Turned Off. When
Motor uses an Electrical Brake to Stop, BX is used to Turn Off the Output
Signal. When BX Signal is OFF (Not Turned Off by Latching) and FX Signal
(or RX Signal) is ON, Motor continues to Run.
Used for Fault Reset.
BX
Emergency Stop
Fault Reset
!
RST
CM
NC
Sequence Common
-
Common Terminal for Contact Inputs.
Not Used.
Frequency Setting Power Used as Power for Analog Frequency Setting.
VR
V1
I
(+12V)
Maximum Output is +12V, 100mA.
Used for 0-10V Input Frequency Reference. Input Resistance is 20 KΩ
Frequency Reference
(Voltage)
Used for 4-20mA Input Frequency Reference. Input Resistance is 250 Ω
Frequency Reference
(Current)
Frequency Setting
Common Terminal
Common Terminal for Analog Frequency Reference Signal and FM
(Frequency Meter).
5G
Outputs One of the Following: Output Frequency, Output Current, Output
Voltage, DC Link Voltage and Torque. Default is set to Output Frequency.
Maximum Output Voltage and Output Current are 0-12V and 1mA.
Activates when Protective Function is Operating. AC250V, 1A or less;
DC30V, 1A or less.
Analog Output (0~10V)
(For External Monitoring)
FM
30A
30C
30B
Fault Contact Output
Fault: 30A-30C Closed (30B-30C Open)
Normal: 30B-30C Closed (30A-30C Open)
Multi-Function Output
Relay
Use After Defining Multi-Function Output Terminal. AC250V, 1A or less;
DC30V, 1A or less.
AXA, AXC
CN3
Comm.
Communication Port
Keypad Connection Port.
Tightening Torque: 5.2 lb-in maximum.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 - Installation
1.8.1 Wiring Control Terminals
ꢀ
Wiring Precautions
ꢂ
CM and 5G terminals are insulated to each other. Do not connect these terminals with each other and do not connect
these terminals to the power ground.
ꢂ
Use shielded wires or twisted wires for control circuit wiring, and separate these wires from the main power circuits
and other high voltage circuits.
ꢀ
Control Circuit Terminal
ꢂ
The control input terminal of the control circuit is ON when the circuit is configured to the current flows out of the
terminal, as shown in the following illustration. CM terminal is the common terminal for the contact input signals.
Resistor
24 VDC
Current
FX
Resistor
RX
CM
External Sequence
Inverter Circuitry
CAUTION
Do not apply voltage to any control input terminals (FX, RX, P1, P2, P3, JOG, BX, RST, CM).
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 - Installation
1.8.2 Keypad Connection
Connect keypad to the keypad connector as illustrated below. The LCD output will not be displayed on the keypad if the
keypad is not connected properly.
Keypad Connector
(CN3)
Power Supply Input,
Gate Drive Signal Output
CN5
Connector Socket
Sub-Board Connector
Sub-Board
Control Board
Option Board Connector
(CN2)
Option Board
Relay Output
Terminal Block
Control Terminal Block
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 - Installation
Notes:
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 2 -
OPERATION
The ACtionMaster series inverter has seven parameter groups separated according to their applications as indicated in the
following table.
The ACtionMaster series inverter provides two kinds of keypad. One is of 32-character alphanumeric LCD keypad and the
other is of 7-Segment LED keypad.
2.1 Parameter Groups
Parameter
Group
LCD Keypad
(Upper left Corner)
7-segment Keypad
(LED is lit)
Description
Command Frequency, Accel/Decel Time etc.
Basic Parameters
Drive Group
DRV
FU1
FU2
‘DRV’ LED
‘FU1’ LED
‘FU2’ LED
Max. Frequency, Amount of Torque Boost etc.
Basic Related Parameters
Function 1 Group
Function 2 Group
Frequency Jumps, Max./Min. Frequency Limit etc.
Basic Application Related Parameters
Multi-Function Terminal Setting, Auto Operation etc.
Parameters needed for Sequence Operation
Input / Output
Group
I/O
‘I/O’ LED
‘EXT’ LED
Sub-Board Group
Option Group
EXT
COM
Displayed when Sub-Board is Installed.
Displayed when Option Board is Installed.
‘I/O’ + ‘EXT’ LED
‘FU2’ + ‘I/O’ + ‘EXT’ Traverse, MMC (Multi-Motor Control), Draw etc.
LED Application Related Parameters
Application Group
APP
Refer to the function descriptions in Chapter 6 for detailed description of each group.
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 - Operation
2.2 LCD Keypad
LCD keypad can display up to 32 alphanumeric characters, and various settings can be checked directly from the display.
The following is an illustration of the keypad.
The Program Button is
used to go into
programming mode to
change data.
32 character, back light,
LCD display. The back
light is adjustable.
The Enter Button is
used to enter changed
data within a parameter.
The Mode Button moves
you through the seven
program groups: DRV,
FUN1, FUN2, I/O, (EXT),
COM, and APP
[SHIFT] This button is
used to move cursor
across display in
programming mode.
[ESC] This button is used
to move the program
code to DRV 00 form any
program code.
The Up and Down
Arrows are used to
move through and
change data.
Forward Run Button.
The Forward Run LED
blinks when the drive
Accels or Decels.
Reverse Run Button.
The Reverse Run LED
blinks when the drive
Accels or Decels.
Stop Button is used to
stop the drive from
running.
The Reset Button is
used to reset Faults.
The LED blinks when
there is a fault.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 - Operation
2.2.1 LCD Keypad Display
3) Frequency Setting Source
4) Output Current
2) Run/Stop Source
1) Parameter group
DRV¢ºT/K 0.0 A
00 STP 0.00 Hz
5) Parameter Code
7) Drive Output Frequency During Run,
Command Frequency During Stop
6) Operating Status
Displays
Description
1) Parameter Group
2) Run/Stop Source
Displays the parameter group. There are DRV, FU1, FU2, I/O, EXT, COM, APP groups.
Displays the source of motor Run and Stop
K: Run/Stop using FWD, REV buttons on keypad
T: Run/Stop using control terminal input FX, RX
O: Run/Stop via option board
3) Frequency Setting
Source
Displays the source of command frequency setting
K: Frequency setting using keypad
V: Frequency setting using V1 (0 ~10V) or V1 + I terminal
I: Frequency setting using I (4 ~ 20mA) terminal
U: Up terminal input when Up/Down operation is selected
D: Down terminal input when Up/Down operation is selected
S: Stop status when Up/Down operation is selected
O: Frequency setting via Option board
X: Frequency setting via Sub board
J: Jog terminal input
1 ~ 8: Step frequency operation
* During Auto operation, 2) and 3) display the ‘sequence number/step’.
Displays the Output Current during operation.
Displays the code of a group. Use the ▲(Up), ▼(Down) key to move through 0~99 codes.
Displays the operation information.
4) Output Current
5) Parameter Code
6) Operating Status
STP: Stop Status
FWD: During Forward operation
REV: During Reverse operation
DCB: During DC Braking
LOP: Loss of Reference from Option Board (DPRAM fault)
LOR: Loss of Reference from Option Board (Communication network fault)
LOV: Loss of Analog Frequency Reference (V1: 0~10V)
LOI: Loss of Analog Frequency Reference (I: 4~20mA)
LOS: Loss of Reference from Sub-Board
7) Drive Output Frequency
Command Frequency
Displays the Output Frequency during run.
Displays the Command Frequency during stop.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 - Operation
2.2.2 Procedure for Setting Data (LCD Keypad)
1. Press [MODE] key until the desired parameter group is displayed.
2. Press [▲] or [▼] keys to move to the desired parameter code. If you know the desired parameter code, you can set
the code number of each parameter group in “Jump code”, except DRV group.
3. Press [PROG] key to go into the programming mode, the cursor starts blinking.
4. Press [SHIFT/ESC] key to move the cursor to the desired digit.
5. Press [▲] or [▼] keys to change the data.
6. Press [ENT] key to enter the data. The cursor stops blinking.
ꢀ
Note: Data cannot be changed when:
1) The parameter is not adjustable during the inverter is running. (Refer to the function table in Chapter 5), or,
2) Parameter Lock function is activated in FU2-94 [Parameter Lock].
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 - Operation
2.2.3 Parameter Navigation (LCD Keypad)
The parameter group moves directly to DRV group by pressing [SHIFT/ESC] key in any parameter code.
Drive Group
FU1 Group
FU2 Group
I/O Group
MODE
MODE
DRV▶ T/K 0.0 A
FU1▶ Jump code
FU2▶ Jump code
I/O▶ Jump code
MODE
MODE
00 STP 0.00 Hz
00
1
00
30
00
1
MODE
MODE
MODE
MODE
DRV▶ Acc. time
FU1▶ Run prohibit
FU2▶ Last trip-1
I/O▶ V1 filter
01
10.0 sec
03
None
01
-------
01
10 ms
MODE
MODE
MODE
MODE
MODE
MODE
MODE
DRV▶ Dec. time
02 20.0 sec
FU1▶ Acc. pattern
05 Linear
FU2▶ Last trip-2
02 -------
I/O▶ V1 volt x1
02
0.00 V
MODE
MODE
MODE
MODE
MODE
FU1▶ Dec. pattern
06 Linear
FU2▶ Last trip-3
03 -------
I/O▶ V1 freq y1
DRV▶ Drive mode
03 Fx/Rx-1
03
0.00 Hz
MODE
MODE
DRV▶ Freq mode
04 KeyPad-1
FU1▶ Stop mode
07 Decel
FU2▶ Last trip-4
04 -------
I/O▶ V1 volt x2
04
10.00 V
MODE
MODE
DRV▶ Step freq-1
FU1▶ DcSt value
08 50 %
FU2▶ Last trip-5
05 -------
I/O▶ V1 freq y2
05 60.00 Hz
05
10.00 Hz
MODE
MODE
MODE
MODE
FU1▶ Stall Level
60 150 %
FU2▶ Para. lock
I/O▶ Way1 / 2D
60 Forward
DRV▶ Fault
94
0
12
-------
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 - Operation
2.3 7-Segment Keypad
* Parameter Group
Display LEDs.
7-segment display
[SHIFT] This button is
used to move cursor
across display in
programming mode.
[ESC] This button is used
to move the program
code to DRV 00 from any
program code.
Encoder knob
Used to move you
through parameter
groups and parameter
code. Also, used to
change data by rotating
knob.
Run Button is used to
run the drive. The motor
direction is set in DRV
13.
The Run LED blinks
when the drive Accels or
Decels.
Program Button is used
to go into programming
mode to change data.
Enter Button is used to
enter the changed data.
The LED blinks during
programming mode.
Stop Button is used to
stop the drive from
running.
Reset Button is used to
reset Faults.
The LED blinks when
there is a fault.
* Parameter Group Display LEDs – When parameter code is located on DRV 20, DRV 21, DRV 22 and DRV 23, respectively,
by rotating the encoder knob, the parameter group display LEDs of DRV, FUN1, FUN2, I/O, EXT blink.
LED
Parameter Group
Description
DRV
Drive Group
Lit in Drive group.
Blinks when the parameter code is located on DRV 20 [FUN1].
Lit when FUNCTION 1 group is selected.
FU1
FU2
I/O
FUNCTION 1 Group
FUNCTION 2 Group
Input/Output Group
Blinks when the parameter code is located on DRV 21 [FUN2].
Lit when FUNCTION 2 group is selected.
Blinks when the parameter code is located on DRV 22 [I/O].
Lit when Input/Output group is selected
Blinks when the parameter code is located on DRV 23 [EXT].
Lit when Sub-Board group is selected.
EXT
Sub-Board Group
Option Group
This group appears only when a Sub-Board is installed.
Blinks when the parameter code is located on DRV 24 [EXT].
Lit when Option group is selected.
I/O + EXT
This group appears only when an Option Board is installed.
Blinks when the parameter code is located on DRV 25 [FUN2].
FU2 + I/O + EXT Application Group
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 - Operation
2.3.1 7-Segment Keypad Display
1) Parameter Group
FU1
DRV
FU2
I/O EXT
2) Parameter Code and
Operating Status
3) Output Frequency during run,
Command Frequency during stop
Display
Description
1) Parameter Group
Displays the parameter groups of DRV, FU1, FU2, I/O, EXT, COM, APP groups.
Each LED is lit when its parameter group is selected and blinks when the parameter code is located on
DRV 20, DRV 21, DRV 22, DRV 23, DRV 24, and DRV 25.
Displays the code of a group. Rotate the encoder knob to move through 0 ~ 99 codes.
Displays the operation information.
2) Parameter Code and
Operating Status
[First digit]
F: Forward operation
r: Reverse operation
[Second digit]
d: DC Braking
J: Jog Terminal Input
1~8: Step Frequency Input (Displays the Step of the Auto operation)
[Two digits] - when the reference is lost.
LP: Loss of Reference from the Option Board (DPRAM fault)
Lr: Loss of Reference from the Option Board (Communication network fault)
Lv: Loss of Analog Frequency Reference (V1: 0~10V)
LI: Loss of Analog Frequency Reference (I: 4~20mA)
LX: Loss of Reference from the Sub-Board
3) Output Frequency,
Command Frequency
Displays the Output Frequency during run.
Displays the Command Frequency during stop.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 - Operation
2.3.2 Procedure for Setting Data (7-Segment Keypad)
ꢀ
In DRV Group:
1. Rotate the encoder knob until the desired parameter code is displayed.
2. Press [PROG/ENT] key to go into the programming mode, then the display blinks.
3. Press [SHIFT/ESC] key to move the cursor to the desired digit.
4. Rotate the encoder knob to change the data.
5. Press [PROG/ENT] key to enter the changed data.
ꢀ
In FUN1 Group:
1. Rotate the encoder knob until parameter code ‘20’ is displayed in drive group.
2. Press [PROG/ENT] key to go into the FUN1 group.
3. Rotate the encoder knob until the desired parameter code is displayed.
4. Press [PROG/ENT] key to go into the programming mode, then the display blinks.
5. Press [SHIFT/ESC] key to move the cursor to the desired digit.
6. Rotate the encoder knob to change the data.
7. Press [PROG/ENT] key to enter the changed data.
ꢀ
In FUN2 Group:
1. Rotate the encoder knob until parameter code ‘21’ is displayed in drive group.
2. Go to step 2 of ‘In FUN1 Group’ above, and follow the rest procedure.
ꢀ
In I/O Group:
1. Rotate the encoder knob until parameter code ‘22’ is displayed in drive group.
2. Go to step 2 of ‘In FUN1 Group’ above, and follow the rest procedure.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 - Operation
2.3.3 Parameter Navigation (7-Segment Keypad)
The parameter group moves directly to DRV group by pressing [SHIFT/ESC] key in any parameter code.
DRV Group
FU1
FU1
FU1
DRV
DRV
DRV
FU2
FU2
FU2
I /O EXT
I/O EXT
I /O EXT
SHIFT
ESC
Encoder Knob
PROG
ENT
FU1
FU1
FU1
FU1
DRV
FU2
DRV
DRV
DRV
FU2
FU2
FU2
I/O EXT
DRV
DRV
DRV
FU1
FU1
FU1
FU2
FU2
FU2
I /O EXT
I /O EXT
I /O EXT
I /O EXT
PROG
ENT
FU1 Group
FU2 Group
FU1
FU1
DRV
DRV
FU2
FU2
I /O EXT
I /O EXT
I/O EXT
PROG
ENT
I/O EXT
PROG
ENT
I/O Group
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 - Operation
2.4 Operation Method
The ACtionMaster has several operation methods as shown below.
Operation Method
Function
Function Setting
Operation using Keypad
Run/Stop command and frequency are set only through the DRV 03: Keypad
keypad.
DRV 04: Keypad-1 or -2
DRV 03: Fx/Rx-1 or -2
Operation using
Closing FX or RX terminal performs Run/Stop.
Control Terminals
Operation using both
Keypad and Control
Terminals
Frequency reference is set through V1 or I or V1+I terminal. DRV 04: V1 or I or V1+I
Run/Stop is performed by the keypad.
Frequency reference is set through the V1 or I or V1+I
terminal.
DRV 03: Keypad-1 or -2
DRV 04: V1 or I or V1+I
Closing FX or RX terminal performs Run/Stop.
Frequency reference is set through the keypad.
Operation using option board.
The ACtionMaster has five option boards and three sub-
boards.
DRV 03: Fx/Rx-1 or -2
DRV 04: Keypad-1 or -2
Please refer to ‘Chapter 7 -
Options’ for more
Operation using
Option Boards
information.
Option Boards: RS485, Device-Net, F-Net, ProfiBus and
ModBus
Sub-Boards: Sub-A Board, Sub-B Board, Sub-C Board and
Sub-D Board.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 - Operation
Notes:
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 3 -
QUICK-START PROCEDURES
These Quick-Start Up instructions are for those applications where:
ꢂ
ꢂ
The user wants to get the ACtionMaster inverter started quickly
The factory-preset values are suitable for the user application
The factory-preset values are shown on the ‘Chapter 4 - Parameter List’. The ACtionMaster inverter is configured to
operate a motor at 60Hz (base frequency). If the application requires coordinated control with other controllers, it is
recommended the user become familiar with all parameters and features of the inverter before applying AC power.
1. Mounting the inverter (mount the inverter as described in ‘1.3 Mounting’)
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
Install in a clean, dry location
Allow a sufficient clearance around top and sides of inverter
The ambient temperature should not exceed 40°C (104°F)
If two or more inverters are installed in an enclosure, add additional cooling
2. Wiring the inverter (connect wiring as described in ‘1.7 Power Terminals’)
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
AC power should be turned OFF
Verify the AC power matches the nameplate voltage
Remove the screw on the bottom front cover of the inverter for terminal board access (For terminal board access
on 15~ 30HP inverters you must disconnect the keypad cable from the inverter and fully removed the cover)
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - Quick-Start Procedures
3.1 Operation using Keypad
LCD Display
7-Segment Display
DRV
►
T/K
0.0 A
1. Apply AC power.
00 STP 0.00Hz
The DRV LED is ON.
2. LCD: Press [▲] key three times.
7-Seg: Rotate the encoder knob until ‘03’ is
displayed.
DRV
03
►
►
Drive mode
Fx/Rx-1
The DRV LED is turned ON.
DRV
03
Drive mode
Fx/Rx-1
3. LCD: Press [PROG] key.
7-Seg: Press[PROG/ENT] key.
The PROG/ENT LED turned ON.
The PROG/ENT LED is turned ON.
4. LCD: Press [▼] key one time.
7-Seg: Rotate the encoder knob left.
DRV
03
►
►
►
Drive mode
Keypad
5. LCD: Press [PROG] key.
7-Seg: Press [PROG/ENT] key.
DRV
03
Drive mode
Keypad
DRV
K/K
0.0 A
6. Press [PROG/ENT] key.
00 STP 0.00Hz
7. LCD: Press [PROG] key.
7-Seg: Press [PROG/ENT] key.
DRV► Cmd. freq
00
0.00Hz
The PROG/ENT LED is turned ON.
The PROG/ENT LED is turned ON.
8. LCD: Press [SHIFT/ESC] key and press [▲]
key to increase the command frequency.
7-Seg: Rotate the encoder knob right to change
the command frequency. The changing digit moves
by pressing the [SHIFT/ESC] key.
DRV► Cmd. freq
00
60.00Hz
9. LCD: Press [ENT] key to save the data.
7-Seg: Press [PROG/ENT] key to save the data.
DRV
►
K/K
0.0 A
00 STP 60.00Hz
The STOP/RESET LED starts blinking.
10. LCD: Press [FWD] or [REV] key to start motor.
7-Seg: Press [RUN] key to start motor.
The RUN LED starts blinking.
To change the motor running
direction, change DRV 13 to ‘1’.
The FWD or REV LED starts blinking.
The STOP/RESET LED starts blinking.
11. Press [STOP/RESET] key to stop motor.
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - Quick-Start Procedures
7-Segment Display
3.2 Operation using Control Terminals
LCD Display
1. Install a potentiometer on terminals V1, VR, 5G
and connect wiring as shown below.
1 ㏀, 1/2 W
P1 P2 P3 FX RX NC VR VI
CM BX
I
FM 5G
JOG CM
RST
DRV►
T/K
0.0 A
2. Apply AC power.
00 STP 0.00Hz
The DRV LED is ON.
DRV
03
►
►
Drive mode
Fx/Rx-1
3. Confirm that the DRV 03 is set at ‘Fx/Rx-1’.
4. LCD: Press [▲] key to move DRV 04.
7-Seg: Rotate encoder knob until ‘04’ is
displayed.
DRV
04
Freq mode
Keypad-1
DRV
04
►
Freq mode
Keypad-1
5. LCD: Press [PROG] key.
7-Seg: Press [PROG/ENT] key.
The PROG/ENT LED is turned ON.
DRV
04
►
►
►
Freq mode
V1
6. LCD: Press [▲] key and set at ‘V1’.
7-Seg: Rotate encoder knob and set at ‘2’.
The PROG/ENT LED is turned ON.
The PROG/ENT LED is turned OFF.
DRV
04
Freq mode
V1
7. LCD: Press [ENT] key.
7-Seg: Press [PROG/ENT] key.
8. Press [SHIFT/ESC] key.
DRV
T/V
0.0 A
00 STP 0.00Hz
9. Set the frequency by rotating the potentiometer. DRV
►
T/V
0.0 A
00 STP 60.00Hz
The FWD or REV LED starts blinking. The RUN LED starts blinking.
10. Close the FX or RX contact to run the motor.
11. Open the FX or RX contact to stop the motor.
The STOP/RESET LED starts blinking. The STOP/RESET LED starts blinking.
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - Quick-Start Procedures
3.3 Operation using Keypad and Control Terminals
3.3.1 Frequency set by External Source and Run/Stop by Keypad
1. Install a potentiometer on terminals V1, VR, 5G and connect wiring as shown below left.
When a ‘4 to 20mA’ current source is used as the frequency reference, use terminals I and 5G as shown below right.
DRV 04 must be set at I.
DRV 04 must be set at V1.
1 ㏀, 1/2 W
P1 P2 P3 FX RX NC VR VI
CM BX
I
FM 5G
JOG CM
RST
P1 P2 P3 FX RX NC VR VI
CM BX
I
FM 5G
JOG CM
RST
4 to 20mA signal
DRV
►
T/K
0.0 A
2. Apply AC power.
00 STP 0.00Hz
The DRV LED is ON.
3. LCD: Press [▲] key to move DRV 03.
7-Seg: Rotate encoder knob until ‘03’ is
displayed.
DRV
03
►
►
Drive mode
Fx/Rx-1
DRV
03
Drive mode
Fx/Rx-1
4. LCD: Press [PROG] key.
7-Seg: Press [PROG/ENT] key.
The PROG/ENT LED is turned ON.
DRV
03
►
►
►
Drive mode
Keypad
5. LCD: Press [▲] key one time.
7-Seg: Rotate encoder knob and set at ‘0’.
The PROG/ENT LED is turned ON.
The PROG/ENT LED is turned OFF.
The PROG/ENT LED is turned ON.
DRV
03
Drive mode
Keypad
6. LCD: Press [ENT] key.
7-Seg: Press [PROG/ENT] key.
DRV
04
Freq mode
V1
7. Confirm that the DRV 04 is set at ‘V1’.
8. Press [SHIFT/ESC] key.
DRV
►
T/V
0.0 A
Set the frequency by rotating the potentiometer.
00 STP 60.00Hz
9. LCD: Press [FWD] or [REV] key.
7-Seg: Press [RUN] key.
The FWD or REV LED starts blinking.
The RUN LED starts blinking.
To change the motor running
direction, change DRV 13 to ‘1’.
3-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 - Quick-Start Procedures
3.3.2 Frequency set by Keypad and Run/Stop by External Source.
1. Connect wiring as shown below. LCD Display
7-Segment Display
P1 P2 P3 FX RX NC VR VI
CM BX
I
FM 5G
JOG CM
RST
DRV
►
T/K
0.0 A
2. Apply AC power.
00 STP 0.00Hz
The DRV LED is ON.
DRV
03
►
►
Drive mode
Fx/Rx-1
3. Confirm that the DRV 03 is set at ‘Fx/Rx-1’.
DRV
04
Freq mode
Keypad-1
4. Confirm that the DRV 04 is set at
‘Keypad-1’.
DRV
►
T/K
0.0 A
5. Press [SHIFT/ESC] key.
00 STP 0.00Hz
DRV► Cmd. freq
6. LCD: Press [PROG] key.
7-Seg: Press [PROG/ENT] key.
00
0.00Hz
The PROG/ENT LED is turned ON.
The PROG/ENT LED is turned ON.
7. LCD: Set the frequency using [SHIFT/ESC] and
DRV► Cmd. freq
[▲] key.
00
60.00Hz
7-Seg: Set the frequency by rotating the encoder
knob.
DRV
►
T/V
0.0 A
8. LCD: Press [ENT] key to save the data.
7-Seg: Press [PROG/ENT] key to save the data.
00 STP 60.00Hz
The FWD or REV LED starts blinking. The RUN LED starts blinking.
9. Close the FX or RX contact to run the motor.
10. Open the FX or RX contact to stop the motor.
The STOP/RESET LED starts blinking. The STOP/RESET LED starts blinking.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 4 -
VARIOUS FUNCTION SETTING & DESCRIPTION
4.1 Function Setting
4.1.1 Basic function parameter setting
It is the basic function setting. All settings are factory defaults unless users make change. It is recommended to use factory
setting value unless the parameter change is necessary.
1) Common parameter setting
The following table shows common parameter setting that should be checked before use but making change does not
affect inverter control type.
Parameter Name
Code
Description
Rated Motor
Selection
Select motor and voltage rating suitable to the desired
inverter
FU2-30
Basic parameter value setting when selecting the motor
rating.
Parameters related to
motor
Note) If there is any discrepancy between parameter
preset value and the actual motor parameter value,
change the parameter value according to the actual
motor.
FU2-31 ~ 36
Drive Mode
Frequency
or
DRV-3
DRV-4
Operation via Keypad, Fx/Rx-1, Fx/Rx-2 setting enable
Frequency/Torque setting parameter
It automatically changes to torque mode when FU2 39-
[Control mode] is set to Sensorless_T, Vector_TRQ
Torque Mode
Accel/Decel time
setting
DRV-1, DRV-2
Setting Accel/Decel time enable
2) V/f control
FU2-39 [Control mode] is set to 0 (V/F) as factory setting. Operation via V/F control can be performed after
common parameter settings are done and the followings are set.
Parameter Name
Starting freq.
Code
FU1-22
FU1-26
Description
Setting frequency to start the motor
Manual or Auto torque boost settable in this parameter
Torque boost
Torque boost value in
FWD/REV
If FU1-26 [torque boost] is set to manual, user sets the
desired value and the direction in code FU1-27 and 28.
FU1-27, FU1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 – Function Settings
3) V/F + PG control
If FU2-39 [control mode] is set to V/F with PG (encoder) feedback using SUB-B or SUB-D boards, the control type is
automatically changed to V/F + PG. The following parameters should be set accordingly to enable PG feedback using SUB-
B or SUB-D boards.
Parameter Name
Code
Description
Defines the use of pulse input signal with SUB-B or SUB-
D mounted. This parameter should be set to 1 {Feed-
back}.
Usage of Pulse Input
Signal
EXT-12
Pulse Input Signal
Selection
Three types of input signal settable;
(A+B), A, -(A+B)
EXT-15
EXT-16
Encoder Pulse
Number
Defines the number of encoders of the motor.
PI gains for PI controller during PG operation
P-Gain for ‘Sub-B’
I-Gain for ‘Sub-B’
EXT-22, EXT-23
EXT-24
Slip Frequency for
‘Sub-B’ Board
Setting as a percent of FU2-32 [Rated Motor Slip]
4) Slip compensation
operation is done via Slip compensation if FU2-39 is set to 1 {Slip compen}. This control keeps motor speed constant
regardless of load change.
5) Auto-tuning of motor constant
This parameter enables auto-tuning of the motor constants. If set to 1 {All mode}, tuning type varies according to what
control mode is set in [FU2-39]. Auto-tuning can be done in two ways – one is motor non-rotation mode, the other is motor
rotation mode.
① Auto-tuning by non-rotation mode: Rs+Lsigma
② Auto-tuning by rotation mode : All, Enc Test, Tr
Before performing Auto-tuning, set motor rating, motor parameter in common setting and select the desired
control mode in FU2-39 [control mode selection]. However, when auto-tuning parameters related to encoder, detail
functions settings of vector control should be pre-defined. If Enc Test, Tr and control mode are set to vector control,
Sub-B or Sub-D board should be mounted.
Parameter Name
Code
Description
No, All, Rs+Lsigma, Enc Test, Tr
Auto-tuning
FU2-40
Tuned value monitoring
(no-load current, stator/rotor resistance, leakage
inductance, rotor filter time constant)
Parameter value
display
FU2-34,
FU2-41 ~ 44
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 – Function Settings
FU2-40
Description
Motor constants calculation disabled
No
All constants can be measured in this code but different constants are tuned
according to control mode type;
For V/F, Slip compen , Sensorless_S, Sensorless_T:
(No-load current, stator resistance, leakage inductance, stator inductance
available)
All
Note) Only no-load current can be calculated during V/F and Slip compensation.
For Vector_SPD, Vector_T:
No-load current, stator resistance, leakage inductance, stator inductance,
encoder test, rotor filter time constant
Rs+Lsigma
Enc Test
Tr
Calculate stator resistance, leakage inductance
Calculate the encoder status
Calculate Rotor filter time constant
6) Sensorless vector control
Set FU2-39 to 2 {Sensorless_S} or 3 {Sensorless_T} to enable Sensorless vector control. It is strongly recommended to
perform Auto-tuning for Sensorless before starting Sensorless control in order to maximize performance. Two types of
Sensorless vector control are available; Sensorless_S or Sensorless_T.
Parameter Name
Code
Description
Control mode selection
FU2-39
Select Sensorless_S or Sensorless_T
P, I gain for sensorless
control
FU2-45, FU2-46 Setting gain for Sensorless_S control
FU1-22 Starting freq of the motor
Starting freq
7) Vector control
Set FU2-39 to 4 {Vector_SPD} or 5{Vector_TRQ} to enable Vector control. Encoder should be installed to the motor with
Sub-B or Sub-D boards in the inverter to start this control.
Parameter Name
Code
Description
Defines the method of pulse input with SUB-B or SUB-D
boards mounted. Vector control setting is valid only after
this parameter is set to 1 {Feed-back}.
Usage of Pulse Input
Signal
EXT-12
Pulse Input Signal
Selection
3 types of pulse input : (A+B), A, -(A+B)
EXT-15
EXT-16
Encoder Pulse Number
Enter the pulse number of encoder in the motor.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 – Function Settings
Before selecting Vector control mode, encoder setting should be done as indicated above. If the parameter value of actual
motor is set in common setting, execute Auto-tuning before selecting vector control mode.
Parameter Name
Code
FU2-39
Description
Control Mode Selection
Select Vector_SPD or Vector_TRQ
Forward/ Reverse
Torque Limit
Setting the FWD/REV limit to the torque current
EXT-27, EXT-28
P-Gain/ I-Gain for
(Sensored) Vector_SPD
EXT-25, EXT-26 Setting P/I Gain for Vector_SPD control
EXT-50, EXT-51
Speed Limit setting
Setting speed limit for Vector_TRQ
EXT-52, EXT-53
Zero Speed Detection
Level/ Bandwidth
Setting on/off of Multi-function output terminal relay when
the motor speed reaches to 0.
EXT-54, EXT-55
Torque Detection
Level/Bandwidth
EXT-56, EXT-57 Detect certain level/bandwidth of Torque
4.1.2 Advanced function 1 setting
SV-ACtionMaster inverter features advanced function parameters to maximize efficiency and performance of the motor. It is
recommended to use as factory setting unless parameter value change is necessary.
1) V/F control
Parameter Name
Code
Description
Use it according to load characteristics. If User V/F is
selected, User can select the optimum output V/F
characteristic for the aplication and load characteristics in
[FU1-30]~[FU1-37]
V/F Pattern
FU1-29
Used to output torque in an intended direction. Inverter
stops acceleration for the preset [FU2-08] Dwell time
while running at Dwell frequency [FU2-07] and starts
acceleration at commanded frequency. Setting [FU2-08]
Dwell time to 0 disable the Dwell operation.
When it is desired to avoid resonance attributable to the
natural frequency of a mechanical system, these
parameters allow resonant frequencis to be jumped. Up to
three areas can be set, with the jump frequencies set to
either the top or bottom point of each area. To enable the
function, set [FU2-10] to ‘Yes’ and set the value in [FU2-
11]~[ FU2-16].
FU2-07
FU2-08
Dwell operation
Frequency jump
FU2-10
FU2-11~16
This pattern has an effect on the prevention of cargo
FU2-17/ FU2-18 collapse on conveyor etc and reduction in an acceleration/
deceleration shock.
S-shaped curve
Accel/Decel pattern
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 – Function Settings
2) Sensorless vector control
Related parameters for starting during Sensorless vector control when FU2-39 [Control Mode Selection] is set to 2
{Sensorless_S}.
Status
Code
Description
Setting pre-excitation time
Multi-function input terminal P1- P6 define
FU1-14
When starting
I/O12~14
EXT2~4
3) Vector control [Vector_SPD, Vector_TRQ]
Related parameters for starting/ running/ stopping during Vector control when FU2-39 [Control Mode Selection] is set to 4
{Vector_SPD}.
Status
Code
Description
Setting pre-excitation time
FU1-14
When starting
I/O12~14
EXT2~4
Multi-function input terminal P1- P6 define
Pre-excitation current
When stopping
FU1-16
FU1-15
Setting the Pre-excitation current
Setting hold time at a stop
FU1-7
Stopping method selection
This parameter can limit the over-speeding (motor running above limit level) of the motor when FU2-39[Control mode] is set
to 5 {Vector_TRQ}.
Parameter Name
Code
Description
EXT-50
~
EXT-53
Speed limit level
/ bias / gain
Function to limit the speed and change reference torque
value according to speed
4) Parameters to view motor and inverter status
Parameter Name
Code
DRV 8 ~ 9
DRV 10
Description
Display output current and motor rpm
Display DC link voltage
Output current/
motor speed
DC link voltage
User display selection
(Voltage and watt)
Reference/ Feedback
frequency display
DRV11
FU2-73
Either output voltage or power selected in FU2-73 is
displayed in DRV11.
DRV15
DRV12
Display Reference/ Feedback frequency display
Display the current inverter fault
Fault display
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 – Function Settings
5) Parameter initialize
Parameter Name
Code
Description
Software version
FU2-79
Display the inverter software version
FU2-91
FU2-92
FU2-93
FU2-94
[FU2-91], [FU2-92]: Copying parameters from other
inverter enabled
[FU2-93]: Initializing parameters to factory setting values
[FU2-94] : Parameter write disabled
Parameter
Read/Write/Initialize/Write
protection
6) Protection & fault detection level setting
Parameter Name
Code
Description
FU1-50
FU1-51
FU1-52
Protection of the motor from overheating without the use of
external thermal relay. Refer to parameter descriptions for
more detail.
Electronic thermal
FU1-53
FU1-54, FU1-55
Overload alarm and trip FU1-56, FU1-57
FU1-58
Warning alarm outputs and displays the trip message when
overcurrent above the threshold value keeps on.
Set the output current level at which the output freq will be
adjusted to prevent the motor from stoping due to over-
current etc. it activates during accel/ constant speed/ decel
to prevent the motor stall.
Stall prevention
FU1-59, FU1-60
7) Starting / Accel/ Decel / Stopping pattern setting
Parameter Name
Code
Description
5 types of Accel/ Decel pattern: ‘Linear’, ‘S-curve’, ’U-
curve’, ’Minimum’, ‘Optimum’ settable according to
appplication and load characteristic. If ‘S-curve’ is selected,
the desired value of [FU2-17], [FU2-18] is settable.
3 types of stopping method ‘Decel’, ‘DC-brake’, ‘Free-run’
selectable. If ‘DC-brake’ is selected, the desired value of
[FU1-8]~ [FU1-11] is settable.
FU1-05
FU1-06
Accel/Decel pattern
Stopping method
FU1-07
The motor accelerates after the preset [FU1-12] for the
preset [FU1-13] is applied. Starting DC injection braking is
inactive when the value is set to 0 in control mode other
than V/F and Slip compensation.
Starting DC Injection
Braking Voltage/ Time
FU1-12
FU1-13
Limits the active frequency. Inverter operates at the freq
range between upper freq limit [FU1-25] and bottom freq
limit [FU1-24] and higher/ lower freq value is entered, it is
automatically replaced by limit value. Setting range: [FU1-
20] Maximum freq to [FU1-21] Base freq.
FU1-23
Fu1-24
FU1-25
Frequency Limit selection
Dynamic braking
FU2-75
FU2-76
Select the DB resistor mode when the regenerative load. Is
connected. Refer to DBU manual for more details.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 – Function Settings
8) Operation-starting method
Parameter Name
Code
Description
Motor starting method:
FU2-20
FU2-21
FU2-26
FU2-27
[FU2-20] : Power-on run,
[FU2-21] Restart after Fault Reset,
[FU2-26] Number of Auto Restart Attempt
[FU2-27] Delay Time Before Auto Restart
See parameter description for more.
Starting method
FU2-22
FU2-23
FU2-24
FU2-25
Speed search function is available during Accel, trip,
instant power failure, restart after fault reset and auto
restart. See parameter description for more.
Speed Search Selection
4.1.3 Advanced function 2 setting
1) PID operation
The inverter can be used to exercise process control, e.g. flow rate, air volume or pressure via PID feedback control.
Parameter Name
Code
Description
PID control setting
FU2-41~ FU2-60
Setting parameters for PID control
2) Jog and Multi-speed operation
Parameter Name
Code
Description
Multi function input
terminal setting
I/O-12 ~14
EXT2 ~ 4
If I/O-12 ~14 are set to Speed-H, Speed-M, Speed-L,
multi- speed operation up to speed 7 enable..
Filter time constant for
input terminal
I/O-17
Effective for eliminating noise in the freq. setting circuit
Setting speed reference value for each step
Setting Accel/Decel time for each step
DRV-05 ~ 7
I/O-21 ~ I/O-24
Speed reference value
Accel/Decel time
setting for each step
I/O-25 ~ 38
I/O-20
Jog freq.
Setting jog freq for jog operation
Speed-H
Speed-M
Speed-L
JOG
Speed Signal
Applied speed value
0
X
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
x
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
X
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Speed 0
Jog freq.
Speed –1
Speed –2
Speed –3
Speed –4
Speed –5
Speed –6
Speed –7
DRV-00
I/O-20
DRV-05
DRV-06
DRV-07
I/O-21
I/O-22
I/O-23
I/O-24
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 – Function Settings
3) Auto sequence operation
If I/O-50 [Auto (Sequence) Operation selection] is set to 1 {Auto-A} or 2 {Auto-B}, up to 5 sequences can be set with max of
8 steps (speed) in each sequence. Therefore, max 40 operating steps can be made. Two different types of auto sequence
(A, B) operation are available.
Parameter Name
Code
Description
Auto operation setting
I/O-50 ~ 84
Set 8 steps and 5 sequences (Max)
-
4) 2nd motor operation
2nd function setting is required to run the two motors by one inverter by exchange. If the terminal defined for 2nd function
signal input is turned ON, 2nd motor operation is valid.
Parameter Name
Code
Description
Multi-function input
terminals setting
Parameter setting for
2nd motor operation
I/O-12 ~14
EXT2 ~ 4
2nd motor operation is available with Multi-function input
terminals P1 ~ P3 or P4 ~ 6 set to 7 {2nd Func}.
Setting parameters necessary to operate 2nd motor such
as base freq., Accel/Decl time, Stall.
FU2-81 ~ FU2-90
5) Energy-saving operation
FU1-39 [Energy Save Level] tunes the inverter output voltage to minimize the inverter output voltage during during constant
speed operation. Appropriate for energy-saving applications such as fan, pump and HVAC.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 – Operation Examples
4.2 Operation Example
Operation
V/F Control + Analog Voltage Input (V1) + Operation via Terminal (FX/RX)
Example (1)
[Operation condition]
-. Control mode : V/F control
-. Frequency command : 50[Hz] analog input via V1 terminal
-. Accel/Decel time : Accel – 15 [Sec], Decel – 25 [Sec]
-. Drive mode: Run/Stop via FX/RX terminal
[Wiring]
B1
B2
R
U
V
3P
AC
S
IM
input
T
W
G
S/W
FX
RX
BX
FM
5G
RST
JOG
P1
P2
P3
30A
30C
30B
CM
AXA
AXC
Potentiometer
1[kohm],1/2W
VR
V1
5G
Step
Parameter setting
Code
Description
1
2
3
Control Mode Selection
Drive Mode
FU2-39
DRV-3
DRV-4
Set it to 0 {V/F}
Set it to Fx/Rx-1.
Frequency Mode
set V1 Analog input value in frequency mode
50[Hz] freq command
setting
4
5
DRV-0
set freq command 50[Hz] via V1(potentiometer)
DRV-2
DRV-3
Set Accel time to 15 [Sec] in DRV-2
Set Decel time to 25 [Sec] in DRV-3
Accel/Decel time
Motor starts to rotate in Forward direction at 50Hz with Accel time 15 [sec]
when FX terminal is turned ON.
Motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 25[sec] when FX terminal is
turned OFF.
When RX terminal is turned ON motor starts to rotate in Reverse direction
at 50[Hz] with Accel time 15 [Hz]. When it is OFF, motor decelerates to
stop with Decel time 25 [Sec].
6
7
Terminal FX
Terminal RX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Operation Examples
Operation
example (2)
(V/F + PG) Control + operation (Run/Stop) via Keypad
[Operation condition]
-. Control mode: V/F + PG control
-. Frequency command: 50[Hz] Digital input via Keypad
-. Accel time : 15[sec], Decel time : 25 [sec]
-. Drive mode : Run/Stop via Keypad
-. Wiring block diagram when an Open Collector- type encoder is used.
[Wiring]
B1
B2
R
S
T
U
V
3P
AC
Input
IM
W
Keypad
connector
G
E
Encoder
AOC
BOC
A+
A-
B+
Sub-B
FX
RX
BX
RST
JOG
P1
P2
P3
CM
LC-200
MODE
PROG
ENT
SHIFT
ESC
STOP
RESET
REV
FWD
B-
FBA
FBB
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
VR
V1
5G
VCC
VCC
Power
Supply
12V-15V DC
Step
Parameter setting
Code
Description
1
2
3
4
Control Mode Selection
Drive mode
FU2-39
DRV-3
DRV-4
DRV-0
Set it to 0 {V/F}.
Set it to 0 {KeyPad}.
Set it to 0 {KeyPad-1}.
Frequency Mode
Digital Command
Frequency setting
Press PROG key on the keypad to set 50 Hz
DRV-2 DRV- Accel time: set DRV-2 to 15[sec]
5
6
Accel/Decel time setting
3
Decel time: set DRV-3 to 25[sec]
EXT-12
EXT-15
EXT-16
Set EXT-12 [Usage of Pulse Input Signal] to 1 {Feed-back} and set EXT-
15 and EXT-16 after checking encoder rating on the nameplate.
Sub-B board setting
Motor runs at 50[Hz] in forward direction with Accel time 15[sec] by PG
control when pressing FWD key on the keypad. Motor decelerates to
stop with Decel time 25[sec] when pressing Stop key.
Motor runs at 50[Hz] in reverse direction with Accel time 15[sec] by PG
control when pressing REV key on the keypad. Motor decelerates to
stop with Decel time 25[sec] when pressing Stop key.
7
8
FWD Operation
REV Operation
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Operation Examples
Operation
Example (3)
2nd motor operation
[Operation condition]
-. Control mode: V/F control
-. 1st motor + 2nd motor Operation by exchange using [2nd Func] (Values can be set differently)
-. Frequency command : Using Multi-speed
ꢂ
ꢂ
1st motor --- Apply 50[Hz] as main speed
2nd motor --- Apply 20[Hz] with P1 terminal set as multi-speed operation
-. Accel/Decel time : 1st motor --- Accel time: 15[Sec], Decel time: 25 [Sec]
2nd motor --- Accel time: 30[Sec], Decel time: 40 [Sec]
-. Drive mode : Run/Stop via FX/RX
[Wiring]
B1
B2
3P
AC
input
R
S
T
U
V
IM 1st motor
W
G
2nd
IM
motor
FX
FM
5G
FX
RX
BX
1st / 2nd
motor
RX
BX
RST
JOG
P1
1st /2nd motor
Switch-over
30A
30C
30B
P2
select
P3
CM
CM
AXA
AXC
VR
V1
5G
Step
Parameter setting
Code
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
Control Mode Selection
Drive mode
FU2-39 Set it to 0 {V/F}.
DRV-3
DRV-4
I/O-13
I/O-12
DRV-0
Set it to Fx/Rx-1.
Set it to 0 {keypad-1}.
(setting 1st motor freq)
Frequency Mode setting
Multi-function input terminal P2
Multi-function input terminal P1
Freq setting for 1st motor
Set P2 to 2nd Func.
Set P1 to Speed-L).
(setting 2nd motor freq)
Set it to 50[Hz].
DRV-1,
DRV-2
7
Accel/Decel time setting for 1st motor
Freq setting for 2nd motor
Set Accel/Decel time to 15[sec]/25[sec].
Set it to 10[Hz].
8
9
DRV-5
Accel/Decel time setting for 2nd motor FU2-81/82 Set Accel/Decel time to 30[sec]/50[sec].
- Set it as main motor by turning P1, P2, output relay OFF.
- Run the motor in FWD/REV direction using FX/RX terminal.
- Set 2nd motor parameters by turning terminal P2 ON.
- Change the freq setting to 20[Hz] by turning terminal P1 ON.
- Change 2nd motor terminal by turning output relay ON.
-Run the motor in FWD/REV direction by terminal FX/RX.
10
11
1st motor operation
2nd motor operation
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Operation Examples
Operation
Example (4)
Sensorless_S Control + Multi-speed operation + Analog output (FM)
[Operation condition]
-. Control mode : Sensorless Speed control
-. Frequency command : Multi-function input from SUB-A and 8 step speed operation
(Multi-speed 7 + jog freq 1)
-. Accel time : 5 [Sec], Decel time: 5 [Sec]
-. Drive mode : Run/Stop and speed output via terminal FX/RX
[Wiring]
Output freq [Hz]
B1
B2
R
S
T
U
V
IM
SPD 0 SPD 1 SPD 2 SPD
3
SPD 4 SPD
5
SPD
6
SPD 7
ON
JOG
W
Output
freq meter
0 -10 V,
Pulse
G
FM
FM
5G
P4
P5
ON
ON
ON
S/W
FX
30A
30C
30B
AXA
AXC
ON
ON
RX
BX
RST
JOG
P1
P6
ON
JOG
FX
ON
Sub - A
S/W
P4
P5
P6
ON
P2
P3
CM
CN5
RX
ON
CM
Multi-speed freq setting range
DRV-00 Speed 0
DRV-05 Speed 1
DRV-06 Speed 2
DRV-07 Speed 3
I/O-20 Speed 4
I/O-21 Speed 5
I/O-22 Speed 6
I/O-23 Speed 7
Step
Parameter setting
Code
Description
1
2
3
Control Mode Selection
Drive mode
FU2-39
DRV-3
Set it to Sensorless_S.
Set it to FX/RX-1.
Multi-function input
EXT-2 ~ 4
Set P3, P4, P5 to Speed-L, Speed-M, Speed-H.
Set it to Frequency output
FM
4
5
6
(Frequency Meter) Output
Selection
I/O-40
I/O-41
Output V = 10V x output freq x output gain (ex100%) /
( Max freq x 100 )
FM Output Adjustment
Motor runs in forward direction at the set freq via P3, 4, 5 if Fx terminal is
ON.
Terminal FX
Motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 5 [sec] if FX terminal is OFF.
Motor runs in reverse direction at the set freq via P3, 4, 5 if RX terminal is
ON.
7
Terminal RX
Motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 5 [sec] if RX terminal is OFF.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Operation Examples
Operation
Example (5)
Vector_SPD Control
[Operation condition]
-. Control Mode : Vector_SPD Control, -. Encoder specification : Pulse number (1024), Line Drive type
-. Freq command : set it 55[Hz] via KPD-1
-. Accel/Decel time : Accel – 15 [sec], Decel – 25 [sec], -. Drive mode : Run/Stop via terminal FX/RX
[Wiring]
B1
B2
R
S
T
U
V
3P
AC
Input
IM
W
Keypad
connector
G
Encoder
E
AOC
BOC
A+
A-
B+
Sub-B
FX
RX
BX
RST
JOG
P1
P2
P3
CM
LC-200
MODE
PROG
ENT
SHIFT
ESC
STOP
RESET
REV
FWD
B-
FBA
FBB
GND
GND
+5V
+5V
VR
V1
5G
VCC
VCC
Step
Parameter setting
Code
Description
FU2-30 ~ FU2- Set motor capacity, pole number, rated voltage/ current/slip and
1
2
Motor related setting
36
efficiency.
EXT-12
EXT-15
EXT-16
Set EXT-12 to Feed-back, EXT-1 to A+B
Set EXT-16 to 1024
Encoder related setting
Encoder related setting should be done before setting control mode to
Vector_SPD.
Auto-tuning starts when set to ALL. Read the encode rmanual carefully
to clear the error if the messages ” Enc Err”, “Enc Rev” are displayed.
3
4
5
Control Mode Selection
Auto-tuning
Fu2-39
FU2-40
DRV-4
DRV-0
Keypad input setting
Set DRV-4 to KPD-1 and press the Prog key to set 55 [Hz] in Drv-0.
DRV-1
DRV-2
Accel time: set 15[Sec]
Decel time: set 25[Sec]
6
7
Accel/Decel time setting
Drive mode
DRV-3
Set it to FX/RX-1.
Motor runs with Accel time 15 [Sec] at 55 [Hz] if FX/RX terminal is
turned ON.
8
FX/RX terminal
Motor decelerates to stop with Decel time 25 [Sec] if FX/RX terminal is
turned OFF.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 - Operation Examples
Notes:
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 5 -
PARAMETER LIST
5.1 Drive Group [DRV]
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
LCD 7-Segment
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
Command Frequency or
Command Torque
(Output Frequency/
Torque during motor run,
Reference Frequency/
Torque during motor
stop)
Cmd. freq
or
F or r
DRV-0010
0 to FU1-20 (Max. freq)
0.01 0.00 [Hz]
Yes
6-2
(DRV-13)
Cmd. Trq
Output Current (LCD)
Acc. time
Dec. time
DRV-01 Acceleration Time
DRV-02 Deceleration Time
01
02
0 to 6000
0 to 6000
0.1
0.1
10.0 [sec] Yes
20.0 [sec] Yes
6-2
6-2
Keypad
Fx/Rx-1
Fx/Rx-2
Keypad-1
Keypad-2
V1
0
1
2
0
1
2
3
4
Drive Mode
DRV-03
Drive mode
03
-
Fx/Rx-1
No
6-2
6-2
6-2
(Run/Stop Method)
Frequency Mode or
Freq mode
or
Torque Mode
DRV-04
04
-
Keypad-1
No
(Frequency/Torque
Torque mode
I
setting Method)
V1+I
Step freq-1
Step freq-2
Step freq-3
Current
DRV-05 Step Frequency 1
DRV-06 Step Frequency 2
DRV-07 Step Frequency 3
DRV-08 Output Current
DRV-09 Motor Speed
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
10.00 [Hz]
20.00 [Hz]
30.00 [Hz]
[A]
FU1-22 to FU1-20
0.01
Yes
(Starting freq to Max. freq)
The Load Current in RMS
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-2
Speed
The Motor Speed in rpm
[rpm]
DC link Vtg
User disp
DRV-10 DC link Voltage
DRV-11 User Display Selection
The DC Link Voltage inside inverter
Selected in FU2-73 (User Disp)
[V]
-
None
nOn
Fault
DRV-12 Fault Display
12
13
14
-
-
-
-
-
-
6-2
6-2
6-2
Not
displayed in
LCD keypad
TAR
0 [Forward]
1 [reverse]
DRV-13 Motor Direction Set
Not available
-
0
Yes
Yes
Target/Output Frequency
DRV-14
-
0.00 [Hz]
OUT
Display
REF
Reference/Feedback
DRV-1511
15
16
-
-
-
-
0.00 [Hz]
-
Yes
Yes
6-2
6-2
FBK
Frequency Display
Hz/Rpm Disp
DRV-16 Speed Unit Selection
Hz disp
0
10 The speed unit is changed to [%] when FU2-39 is set to ‘Sensorless_T’ or ‘Vector_TRQ’.
11 Code DRV-15 appears only when FU2-47 is set to ‘Yes’.
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
LCD
7-Segment
Rpm disp
1
DRV-20 FU1 Group Selection
DRV-21 FU2 Group Selection
DRV-22 I/O Group Selection
DRV-2312 EXT Group Selection
DRV-24 COM Group Selection
DRV-25 APP Group Selection
20
21
22
23
24
25
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-2
Not
-
1
Yes
Press
[PROG/ENT]
key
displayed in
LCD keypad
Not available
-
-
1
1
Yes
Yes
12 Code DRV-23 through DRV-24 appears only when a Sub-Board or an Option Board is installed.
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
5.2 Function 1 Group [FU1]
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
LCD
7-Segment
Jump code
FU1-00 Jump to Desired Code #
FU1-03 Run Prevention
Not displayed
1 to 60
None
Not available
1
1
Yes
6-2
0
1
2
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
Run Prev.
03
05
-
-
None
No
6-2
6-2
Forward Prev
Reverse Prev
Linear
S-curve
Acc. pattern
FU1-05 Acceleration Pattern
Linear
No
U-curve
Minimum
Optimum
Linear
S-curve
Dec. pattern
Stop mode
FU1-06 Deceleration Pattern
FU1-07 Stop Mode
06
07
-
-
Linear
Decel
No
No
6-2
6-2
U-curve
Minimum
Optimum
Decel
DC-brake
Free-run
DC Injection Braking
FU1-0813
DcBr freq
DcBlk time
DcBr value
DcBr time
DcSt value
DcSt time
08
09
10
11
12
13
FU1-22 to 60 [Hz]
0.01 5.00 [Hz]
No
No
No
No
No
No
Frequency
DC Injection Braking
FU1-09
0 to 60 [sec]
0 to 200 [%]
0 to 60 [sec]
0 to 200 [%]
0 to 60 [sec]
0.01
1
0.1 [sec]
50 [%]
On-delay Time
6-2
DC Injection Braking
FU1-10
Voltage
DC Injection Braking
FU1-11
0.1
1
1.0 [sec]
50 [%]
Time
Starting DC Injection
FU1-12
Braking Voltage
6-2
Starting DC Injection
FU1-13
0.1
0.0 [sec]
Braking Time
PreExTime
Hold Time
Flux Force
Max freq
FU1-14 Pre-excitation Time
FU1-15 Hold Time
14
15
16
20
21
22
0 to 60 [sec]
0 to 1000 [ms]
100 to 500 [%]
40 to 400 [Hz]
30 to FU1-20
0.01 to 60 [Hz]
0.1
1
1.0 [sec]
1000 [ms]
100.0 [%]
No
No
No
No
No
No
6-2
6-2
6-2
FU1-16 Pre-excitation Current
FU1-20 Maximum Frequency
FU1-21 Base Frequency
FU1-22 Starting Frequency
0.1
0.01 60.00 [Hz]
0.01 60.00 [Hz]
0.01 0.50 [Hz]
Base freq
Start freq
6-2
6-2
No
0
1
Freq limit
F-limit Lo
FU1-23 Frequency Limit selection
FU1-2414 Low Limit Frequency
23
24
-
No
No
No
Yes
FU1-22 to FU1-25
0.01 0.50 [Hz]
13 Code FU1-08 through FU1-11 appears only when FU1-07 is set to ‘DC-Brake’.
14 Code FU1-24 through FU1-25 appears only when FU1-23 is set to ‘Yes’.
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
LCD 7-Segment
FU1-24 to FU1-20
Manual
Auto
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
F-limit Hi
FU1-25 High Limit Frequency
25
0.01 60.00 [Hz]
No
Manual/Auto Torque
FU1-26
0
1
Torque boost
26
27
28
-
Manual
2.0 [%]
2.0 [%]
No
6-2
6-2
Boost Selection
Torque Boost in Forward
Fwd boost
Rev boost
FU1-27
0 to 15 [%]
0 to 15 [%]
0.1
0.1
No
No
Direction
Torque Boost in Reverse
FU1-28
Direction
Linear
Square
User V/F
0
1
2
V/F pattern
FU1-29 Volts/Hz Pattern
29
-
Linear
No
6-2
6-2
FU1-3015 User V/F – Frequency 1
FU1-31 User V/F – Voltage 1
FU1-32 User V/F – Frequency 2
FU1-33 User V/F – Voltage 2
FU1-34 User V/F – Frequency 3
FU1-35 User V/F – Voltage 3
FU1-36 User V/F – Frequency 4
FU1-37 User V/F – Voltage 4
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
0 to FU1-20
0.01 15.00 [Hz]
25 [%]
0.01 30.00 [Hz]
50 [%]
0.01 45.00 [Hz]
75 [%]
0.01 60.00 [Hz]
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
User freq 1
User volt 1
User freq 2
User volt 2
User freq 3
User volt 3
User freq 4
User volt 4
0 to 100 [%]
0 to FU1-20
0 to 100 [%]
0 to FU1-20
0 to 100 [%]
0 to FU1-20
0 to 100 [%]
1
1
1
1
0.1
1
100 [%]
100.0 [%]
0 [%]
Output Voltage
FU1-38
Volt control
Energy save
ETH select
38
39
50
40 to 110 [%]
No
Yes
Yes
6-2
6-2
Adjustment
FU1-39 Energy Save Level
0 to 30 [%]
Electronic Thermal
FU1-50
No
0
1
-
No
Selection
Yes
Electronic Thermal Level
FU1-5116
ETH 1 min
ETH cont
51
52
FU1-52 to 200 [%]
1
1
150 [%]
100 [%]
Yes
Yes
for 1 Minute
6-2
Electronic Thermal Level
FU1-52
50 to FU1-51
for Continuous
Electronic Thermal
FU1-53 Characteristic Selection
(Motor Type)
Self-cool
0
1
Motor type
53
-
Self-cool
150 [%]
Yes
Yes
Forced-cool
30 to 150 [%]
OL level
OL time
FU1-54 Overload Warning Level
54
55
1
6-2
6-2
6-2
Overload Warning Hold
FU1-55
0 to 30 [sec]
0.1
10.0 [sec] Yes
Time
No
0
1
OLT select
FU1-56 Overload Trip Selection
56
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
OLT level
OLT time
FU1-57 Overload Trip Level
57
58
30 to 150 [%]
0 to 60 [sec]
000 to 111
(Bit Set)
1
1
180 [%]
FU1-58 Overload Trip Delay Time
60.0 [sec] Yes
Stall Prevention Mode
Stall prev.
Stall level
FU1-59
59
60
bit
1
000
No
No
Selection
FU1-60 Stall Prevention Level
30 to 250 [%]
180 [%]
15 Code FU1-30 through FU1-37 appears only when FU1-29 is set to ‘User V/F’.
16 Code FU1-51 through FU1-53 appears only when FU1-50 is set to ‘Yes’.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
LCD
7-Segment
[PROG/ENT]
or
Not
FU1-99 Return Code
99
Not available
-
-
-
6-2
displayed
[SHIFT/ESC]
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
5.3 Function 2 Group [FU2]
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
LCD
7-Segment
Jump code
FU2-00 Jump to desired code #
FU2-01 Previous Fault History 1
FU2-02 Previous Fault History 2
FU2-03 Previous Fault History 3
FU2-04 Previous Fault History 4
FU2-05 Previous Fault History 5
Not displayed
1 to 94
Not available
1
1
Yes
6-2
Last trip-1
Last trip-2
Last trip-3
Last trip-4
Last trip-5
01
02
03
04
05
By pressing [PROG] and [▲] key,
the frequency, current, and
operational status at the time of fault
can be seen.
-
None
-
6-2
6-2
No
0
1
Erase trips
FU2-06 Erase Fault History
06
-
No
Yes
Yes
Dwell freq
Dwell time
FU2-07 Dwell Frequency
FU2-08 Dwell Time
07
08
FU1-22 to FU1-20
0 to 10 [sec]
No
0.01 5.00 [Hz]
No
No
0.1
0.0 [sec]
Frequency Jump
FU2-10
0
1
Jump freq
10
-
No
No
Selection
Yes
FU2-1117 Jump Frequency 1 Low
FU2-12 Jump Frequency 1 High
FU2-13 Jump Frequency 2 Low
FU2-14 Jump Frequency 2 High
FU2-15 Jump Frequency 3 Low
FU2-16 Jump Frequency 3 High
11
12
13
14
15
16
FU1-22 to FU2-12
FU2-11 to FU1-20
FU1-22 to FU2-14
FU2-13 to FU1-20
FU1-22 to FU2-16
FU2-15 to FU1-20
0.01 10.00 [Hz]
0.01 15.00 [Hz]
0.01 20.00 [Hz]
0.01 25.00 [Hz]
0.01 30.00 [Hz]
0.01 35.00 [Hz]
No
No
No
No
No
No
Jump lo 1
Jump Hi 1
Jump lo 2
Jump Hi 2
Jump lo 3
Jump Hi 3
6-2
Start Curve for S-Curve
FU2-17
Start Curve
End Curve
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
1 to 100 [%]
1 to 100 [%]
1
1
-
40%
40%
00
No
No
Accel/Dedel Pattern
6-2
End Curve for S-Curve
FU2-18
Accel/Dedel Pattern
Input/Output Phase Loss
00 to 11
(Bit Set)
No
Trip select
Power-on run
RST restart
Speed Search
SS Sup-Curr
SS P-gain
FU2-19
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
6-2
6-2
6-2
Protection
0
1
0
1
FU2-20 Power ON Start Selection
FU2-21 Restart after Fault Reset
FU2-22 Speed Search Selection
-
No
Yes
No
-
No
Yes
0000 to 1111
(Bit Set)
-
0000
100 [%]
100
Current Limit Level
FU2-23
80 to 200 [%]
0 to 30000
0 to 30000
0 to 10
1
1
1
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
During Speed Search
6-2
6-2
P Gain
FU2-24
During Speed Search
I Gain
FU2-25
SS I-gain
1000
0
During speed search
Number of Auto Restart
Retry number
FU2-26
Attempt
17 Code FU2-11 through FU2-16 appears only when FU2-10 is set to ‘Yes’.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
LCD 7-Segment
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
Delay Time
Retry Delay
SS blk time
FU2-27
27
28
0 to 60 [sec]
0.1
0.1
1.0 [sec]
1.0 [sec]
Yes
No
6-2
6-2
Before Auto Restart
FU2-28 Speed Search Hold Time
0 to 60 [sec]
0.75kW
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1.5kW
2.2kW
3.7kW
5.5kW
7.5kW
11.0kW
15.0kW
18.5kW
22.0kW
18
Motor select
FU2-30 Rated Motor Selection
30
-
No
6-2
Pole number
Rated-Slip
FU2-31 Number of Motor Poles
FU2-32 Rated Motor Slip
31
32
2 to 12
1
4
No
No
0 t o10 [Hz]
0.01
Rated Motor Current
Rated-Curr
FU2-33
33
34
1 to 200 [A]
1
1
No
No
(RMS)
19
No Load Motor Current
Noload-Curr
FU2-34
0.5 to 200 [A]
(RMS)
Efficiency
Inertia rate
Carrier freq
FU2-36 Motor Efficiency
FU2-37 Load Inertia
36
37
38
70 to 100 [%]
0 to 1
1
1
1
No
No
0
FU2-38 Carrier Frequency
1 to 15 [kHz]
5 [kHz]
Yes
6-2
6-2
V/F
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
Slip comp
Sensorless_S
Sensorless_T
Vector_SPD
Vector_TRQ
No
Control mode
FU2-39 Control Mode Selection
40
41
-
-
V/F
No
No
All
Auto tuning
FU2-40 Auto Tuning
No
Rs + Lsigma
Enc Test
Tr
6-2
Stator Resistance of
21
FU2-4120
42
44
0 to (depending on FU2-30) [ohm] 0.001
0 to (depending on FU2-30) [mH] 0.001
No
No
Rs
Motor
Leakage Inductance of
Lsigma
FU2-42
Motor
18 The rated motor is automatically set according to the inverter model name. If different, set the motor capacity connected.
19 This value is automatically entered according to the rated motor set in FU2-30. If different, set the correct value of the motor.
20 Code FU2-41 through FU2-46 appears only when FU2-39 is set to ‘Sensorless_X’ or ‘Vector_XXX’.
21 This value is automatically entered according to the rated motor set in FU2-30. If different, set the correct value of the motor.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
LCD 7-Segment
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
Stator Inductance of
Motor
Ls
FU2-43
43
44
45
0 to (depending on FU2-30) [mH]
0 to (depending on FU2-30) [mH]
0 to 32767
No
No
Tr
FU2-44 Rotor Time Constant
P Gain for Sensorless
SL P-gain
FU2-45
1
1
-
1000
100
No
Yes
Control
6-2
I Gain for Sensorless
SL I-gain
proc PI mode
PID Ref
FU2-46
46
47
0 to 32767
Yes
No
Control
No
Yes
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
0
1
2
FU2-47 PID Operation Selection
6-2
6-2
PID Reference
FU2-4822
Ramp freq.
Target freq.
Freq mode
Keypad-1
Keypad-2
V1
-
Ramp freq. No
Freq mode No
Ramp freq. No
Frequency Selection
48
49
PID Reference Mode
PID Ref Mode
-
6-2
6-2
FU2-49 Selection
I
V2
PID Output Direction
Ramp freq.
Target freq.
I
PID Out Dir
PID F/B
FU2-50
-
-
Selection
50
51
PID Feedback Signal
FU2-51
I
No
V1
Selection
V2
PID P-gain
PID I-time
PID D-time
FU2-52 P Gain for PID Control
FU2-53 I Gain for PID Control
FU2-54 D Gain for PID Control
52
53
54
0 to 999.9 [%]
0.1
0.1
100.0 [%] Yes
30.0 [sec] Yes
0 to 32.0 [sec]
6-2
0 to 999.9 [msec]
0.1 0.0 [msec] Yes
High Limit Frequency for
PID +limit
PID -limit
PID Out Inv.
FU2-55
55
56
0 to 99.99 [Hz]
0 to 99.99 [Hz]
0.01 60.00 [Hz] Yes
PID Control
Low Limit Frequency for
FU2-56
0.01 60.00 [Hz] Yes
PID Control
No
0
1
FU2-57 PID Output Inversion
-
No
No
57
58
59
60
Yes
PID OutScale
PID P2-gain
P-gain Scale
6-2
FU2-58 PID Output Scale
FU2-59 PID P2 Gain
FU2-60 P Gain Scale
0 to 999.9 [%]
0 to 100 [%]
0 to 100 [%]
0.1
0.1
0.1
100 [%]
100 [%]
100 [%]
No
No
No
Accel/Decel Change
FU2-69
Acc/Dec ch F
Acc/Dec freq
69
70
0 to FU1-20
No
No
6-2
6-2
Frequency
Reference Frequency for
FU2-70
Max freq
0
1
0
1
2
-
Max freq
0.1 [sec]
Accel and Decel
Delta freq
0.01 [sec]
0.1 [sec]
1 [sec]
Time scale
FU2-71 Accel/Decel Time Scale
71
0.01
Yes
6-2
22 Code FU2-48 through FU2-60 appears only when FU2-47 is set to ‘Yes’.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
LCD 7-Segment
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
PowerOn disp
FU2-72 Power On Display
72
73
0 to 12
1
-
0
Yes
Yes
6-2
6-2
Voltage
Watt
0
1
User disp
FU2-73 User Display Selection
Voltage
100 [%]
Gain for Motor Speed
RPM factor
FU2-74
74
75
76
1 to 1000 [%]
1
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-2
6-2
Display
None
0
1
2
DB (Dynamic Braking)
FU2-75
DB mode
Int. DB-R
10 [%]
Int. DB-R
Ext. DB-R
Resistor Mode Selection
Duty of Dynamic Braking
FU2-7623
0 to 30 [%]
1
6-2
6-2
DB %ED
Resistor
S/W version
2nd Acc time
2nd Dec time
2nd BaseFreq
FU2-79 Software Version
FU2-8124 2nd Acceleration Time
FU2-82 2nd Deceleration Time
FU2-83 2nd Base Frequency
79
81
82
83
Ver 2.0
-
-
-
0 to 6000 [sec]
0 to 6000 [sec]
30 to FU1-20
0.1
0.1
5.0 [sec]
Yes
10.0 [sec] Yes
0.01 60.00 [Hz]
No
Linear
0
1
2
FU2-84 2nd V/F Pattern
84
-
Linear
No
2nd V/F
Square
User V/F
FU2-85 2nd Forward Torque Boost
85
86
87
88
0 to 15 [%]
0.1
0.1
1
2.0 [%]
2.0 [%]
150[ %]
150 [%]
No
No
2nd F-boost
2nd R-boost
2nd Stall
2nd Reverse Torque
6-2
FU2-86
0 to 15 [%]
30 to 150 [%]
Boost
FU2-87 2nd Stall Prevention Level
No
2nd Electronic Thermal
FU2-88
2nd ETH 1min
FU2-89 to 200 [%]
1
Yes
Level for 1 minute
2nd Electronic Thermal
FU2-89
50 to FU2-88
2nd ETH cont
2nd R-Curr
89
90
91
1
0.1
-
100 [%]
3.6 [A]
No
Yes
No
Level for continuous
(Maximum 150%)
FU2-90 2nd Rated Motor Current
1 to 200 [A]
Read Parameters into
FU2-91
No
Yes
No
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Para. Read
No
Keypad from Inverter
6-2
Write Parameters to
FU2-92
Para. Write
92
-
No
No
Inverter from Keypad
Yes
No
All Groups
DRV
FU1
FU2
I/O
Para. Init
FU2-93 Initialize Parameters
93
-
No
No
6-2
EXT
COM
APP
23 Code FU2-76 appears only when FU2-75 is set to ‘Ext. DB-R’.
24 Code FU2-81 through FU2-90 appear only when one of I/O-12 ~ I/O-14 is set to ‘2nd function’.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
LCD 7-Segment
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
Parameter Write
Para. Lock
FU2-94
94
0 to 255
1
0
1
Yes
6-2
Protection
[PROG/ENT]
or
Not
FU2-99 Return Code
99
Not available
-
Yes
6-2
displayed
[SHIFT/ESC]
5.4 Input/Output Group [I/O]
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
LCD
7-Segment
Jump code
I/O-00 Jump to Desired Code #
Not displayed
1 to 84
Not available
1
1
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-2
Filtering Time Constant for
I/O-01
V1 filter
01
02
0 to 10000 [ms]
10 [ms]
0.00 [V]
V1 Signal Input
V1 volt x1
I/O-02 V1 Input Minimum Voltage
Frequency Corresponding
I/O-03 to V1 Input Minimum
Voltage
0 to 10 [V]
0 to FU1-20
0 to 10 [V]
0.01
V1 freq y1
V1 volt x2
V1 freq y2
03
04
05
0.01 0.00 {Hz}
0.01 10.00 [V]
Yes
Yes
6-2
I/O-04 V1 Input Maximum Voltage
Frequency Corresponding
I/O-05 to V1 Input Maximum
Voltage
0 to FU1-20
0.01 60.00 [Hz] Yes
Filtering Time Constant for
I filter
I curr x1
I freq y1
I curr x2
I/O-06
06
07
08
09
0 to 10000 [ms]
0 to 20 [mA]
0 to FU1-20
0 to 20 [mA]
1
10 [ms]
0.01 4.00 [mA] Yes
0.01 0.00 [Hz] Yes
Yes
I Signal Input
6-2
6-2
I/O-07 I Input Minimum Current
Frequency Corresponding
I/O-08
to I Input Minimum Current
I/O-09 I Input Maximum Current
Frequency Corresponding
I/O-10 to I Input Maximum
Current
0.01 20.00 [mA] Yes
0.01 60.00 [Hz] Yes
I freq y2
10
0 to FU1-20
None
0
1
2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Criteria for Analog Input
Wire broken
P1 define
I/O-11
11
12
-
-
None
Yes
Yes
6-2
6-2
half x1
below x1
Speed-L
Speed-M
Speed-H
XCEL-L
Signal Loss
I/O-12 Multi-Function Input
Speed-L
Terminal ‘P1’ Define
XCEL-M
XCEL-H
Dc-brake
2nd Func
Exchange
- Reserved -
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
LCD
7-Segment
Up
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
Down
3-Wire
Ext Trip-A
Ext Trip-B
iTerm Clear
Open-loop
Main-drive
Analog hold
XCEL stop
P Gain2
SEQ-L
SEQ-M
SEQ-H
Manual
Go step
Hold step
Trv Off.Lo
Trv Off.Hi
Interlock1
Interlock2
Interlock3
Interlock4
Pre excite
Spd/Trq
ASR P/PI
Multi-function Input
Terminal ‘P2’ Define
Multi-function Input
Terminal ‘P3’ Define
P2 define
P3 define
I/O-13
I/O-14
13
14
-
-
Speed-M
Speed-H
Yes
Yes
Same as Above
6-2
6-2
In status
I/O-15 Terminal Input Status
I/O-16 Terminal Output Status
Filtering Time Constant for
I/O-17 Multi-Function Input
Terminals
15
16
000000000 to 111111111
0000 to 1111
-
-
-
-
-
-
Out status
Ti Filt Num
17
2 to 50
1
2
Yes
6-2
6-2
Jog freq
I/O-20 Jog Frequency Setting
I/O-21 Step Frequency 4
I/O-22 Step Frequency 5
I/O-23 Step Frequency 6
I/O-24 Step Frequency 7
20
21
22
23
24
10.00 [Hz] Yes
40.00 [Hz] Yes
50.00 [Hz] Yes
40.00 [Hz] Yes
30.00 [Hz] Yes
Step freq-4
Step freq-5
Step freq-6
Step freq-7
FU1-22 to FU1-20
0 to 6000 [sec]
0.01
0.1
6-2
6-2
Acceleration Time 1
I/O-25
Acc time-1
25
20.0 [sec] Yes
for Step Frequency
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
LCD 7-Segment
Factory
Default
Code
I/O-26
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
Deceleration Time 1
for Step Frequency
Dec time-1
26
0 to 6000 [sec]
0.1
20.0 [sec] Yes
Acc time-2
Dec time-2
Acc time-3
Dec time-3
Acc time-4
Dec time-4
Acc time-5
Dec time-5
Acc time-6
Dec time-6
Acc time-7
Dec time-7
I/O-27 Acceleration Time 2
I/O-28 Deceleration Time 2
I/O-29 Acceleration Time 3
I/O-30 Deceleration Time 3
I/O-31 Acceleration Time 4
I/O-32 Deceleration Time 4
I/O-33 Acceleration Time 5
I/O-34 Deceleration Time 5
I/O-35 Acceleration Time 6
I/O-36 Deceleration Time 6
I/O-37 Acceleration Time 7
I/O-38 Deceleration Time 7
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
0 to 6000 [sec]
0 to 6000 [sec]
0 to 6000 [sec]
0 to 6000 [sec]
0 to 6000 [sec]
0 to 6000 [sec]
0 to 6000 [sec]
0 to 6000 [sec]
0 to 6000 [sec]
0 to 6000 [sec]
0 to 6000 [sec]
0 to 6000 [sec]
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
30.0 [sec] Yes
30.0 [sec] Yes
40.0 [sec] Yes
40.0 [sec] Yes
50.0 [sec] Yes
50.0 [sec] Yes
40.0 [sec] Yes
40.0 [sec] Yes
30.0 [sec] Yes
30.0 [sec] Yes
20.0 [sec] Yes
20.0 [sec] Yes
Frequency
0
1
2
3
4
Current
Voltage
FM (Frequency Meter)
I/O-40
FM mode
40
-
Frequency Yes
Output Selection
6-2
DC link Vtg
Torque
FM adjust
FDT freq
I/O-41 FM Output Adjustment
41
42
10 to 200 [%]
1
100 [%]
Yes
I/O-42 Frequency Detection Level
0 to FU1-20
0.01 30.00 [Hz] Yes
6-2
6-2
Frequency Detection
FDT band
Aux mode
I/O-43
43
44
0 to FU1-20
0.01 10.00 [Hz] Yes
Bandwidth
I/O-44 Multi-Function Auxiliary
Contact Output Define
(AXA, AXC)
FDT-1
0
1
-
Run
Yes
FDT-2
FDT-3
FDT-4
FDT-5
OL
2
3
4
5
IOL
6
Stall
7
OV
8
LV
9
OH
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Lost Command
Run
Stop
Steady
INV line
COMM line
Ssearch
Step pulse
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
LCD
7-Segment
Seq pulse
Ready
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Trv. ACC
Trv. DEC
MMC
Zspd Dect
Torq Dect
Fault Output Relay Setting
(30A, 30B, 30C)
I/O-4625 Inverter Number
000 to 111
Relay mode
Inv No.
I/O-45
45
46
-
010
1
Yes
Yes
6-2
6-2
(Bit Set)
1 to 31
1
1200 bps
0
1
2
3
4
2400 bps
4800 bps
9600 bps
19200 bps
Baud rate
I/O-47 Baud Rate
47
48
-
-
9600 bps
None
Yes
Yes
6-2
None
FreeRun
Stop
0
1
2
Operating selection at
Lost command
I/O-48
Loss of Freq. Reference
6-2
Waiting Time after Loss of
Freq. Reference
Time out
I/O-49
I/O-50
49
50
0.1 to 120 [sec]
0.1
-
1.0 [sec]
None
Yes
No
None
Auto-A
Auto-B
0
1
2
Auto (Sequence)
Auto mode
Operation selection
6-2
Sequence Number
Selection
Seq select
Step number
Seq1 / 1F
Seq1 / 1T
Seq1 / 1S
Seq1 / 1D
Seq1 / 2F
I/O-51
I/O-52
I/O-5326
I/O-54
I/O-55
I/O-56
I/O-57
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
1 to 5
1 to 8
1
1
1
2
Yes
Yes
The Number of Steps of
Sequence Number #
1st Step Frequency of
Sequence 1
Transient Time to 1st Step
of Sequence 1
Steady Speed Time at 1st
Step of Sequence 1
Motor Direction of 1st Step
of Sequence 1
0.01 to FU1-20
0.1 to 6000 [sec]
0.1 to 6000 [sec]
0.01 11.00 [Hz] Yes
0.1
0.1
-
1.1 [sec]
1.1 [sec]
Forward
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-2
Reverse
Forward
0
1
1st Step Frequency of
Sequence 2
0.01 to FU1-20
0.01 21.00 [Hz] Yes
25 Code I/O-46 through I/O-49 are used in Option Board like RS485, Device, Net and F-net etc.
26 The ‘Seq#’ of code I/O-53 through I/O-60 varies according to the sequence number selected in I/O-51.
The parameter code may be extended to I/O-84 depending the number of steps set in I/O-52 because the steps can be set up to 8.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
LCD 7-Segment
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
Transient Time to 1st Step
of Sequence 2
Steady Speed Time at 1st
Step of Sequence 2
Motor Direction of 1st Step
of Sequence 2
Seq1 / 2T
I/O-58
I/O-59
I/O-60
58
59
60
0.1 to 6000 [sec]
0.1 to 6000 [sec]
0.1
0.1
-
1.1 [sec]
1.1 [sec]
Forward
Yes
Yes
Yes
Seq1 / 2S
Seq1 / 2D
6-2
Reverse
0
Forward
1
[PROG/ENT]
or
Not
I/O-99 Return Code
99
Not available
-
1
Yes
displayed
[SHIFT/ESC]
5.5 External Group [EXT]
EXT group appears only when the corresponding Sub-Board is installed.
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
LCD
7-Segment
Jump code
EXT-00 Jump to Desired Code #
Not displayed
0 to 99
None
Not available
1
1
Yes
6-2
0
1
SUB-A
SUB-B
2
SUB-C
3
Automa
tically
set
Sub B/D
EXT-01 Sub Board Type Display
01
02
-
-
None
6-2
6-2
SUB-D
4
SUB-E
5
SUB-F
6
SUB-G
7
SUB-H
8
P4 define
EXT-02 Multi-Function Input
Speed-L
Speed-M
Speed-H
XCEL-L
XCEL-M
XCEL-H
Dc-brake
2nd Func
Exchange
- Reserved -
Up
0
XCEL-L
Yes
Terminal ‘P4’ Define
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Down
3-Wire
Ext Trip-A
Ext Trip-B
iTerm Clear
Open-loop
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
LCD
7-Segment
Main-drive
Analog hold
XCEL stop
P Gain2
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
SEQ-L
SEQ-M
SEQ-H
Manual
Go step
Hold step
Trv Off.Lo
Trv Off.Hi
Interlock1
Interlock2
Interlock3
Interlock4
Pre excite
Spd/Trq
ASR P/PI
Multi-Function Input
Terminal ‘P5’ Define
Multi-Function Input
Terminal ‘P6’ Define
P5 define
P6 define
EXT-03
EXT-04
03
04
-
-
XCEL-M
XCEL-H
Yes
Yes
Same as Above
6-2
6-2
None
0
1
2
V2 mode
EXT-05 V2 Mode Selection
05
-
None
No
Override
Reference
Filtering Time Constant
EXT-06
V2 filter
06
07
0 to 10000 [ms]
1
10 [ms]
0.00 [V]
Yes
Yes
for V2 Input Signal
V2 Input Minimum
V2 volt x1
EXT-07
0 to 10 [V]
0 to FU1-20
0 to 10 [V]
0.01
Voltage
Frequency
V2 freq y1
V2 volt x2
V2 freq y2
EXT-08 Corresponding to V2
Input Minimum Voltage
08
09
10
0.01 0.00 [Hz]
0.01 10.00 [V]
Yes
Yes
6-2
V2 Input Maximum
EXT-09
Voltage
Frequency
EXT-10 Corresponding to V2
Input Maximum Voltage
0 to FU1-20
0.01 60.00 [Hz] Yes
None
0
1
2
1
2
Usage of Pulse Input
F mode
EXT-12
12
13
-
-
None
-
No
-
6-2
Feed-back
Reference
Reverse
Signal
RealSpdDir
EXT-13 Real Speed Direction
Forward
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
LCD 7-Segment
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
ENC
7-Segment
Encoder Feedback
Frequency
EXT-14
14
* [Hz]
-
-
-
FeedBack
A+B
A
0
1
2
Pulse Input Signal
Selection
F pulse set
EXT-15
15
-
A+B
No
6-2
- (A+B)
F pulse num
F filter
EXT-16 Encoder Pulse Number
16
17
10 to 4096
1
1
1024
No
6-2
6-2
Filtering Time Constant
EXT-17
0 to 9999 [ms]
10 [ms]
Yes
for Pulse Input Signal
Pulse Input Minimum
EXT-18
F pulse x1
F freq y1
F pulse x2
F freq y2
18
19
20
21
0 to 100 [kHz]
0 to FU1-20
0 to 100 [kHz]
0 to FU1-20
0.01 0.00 [kHz] Yes
6-2
6-2
Frequency
Frequency Output
Corresponding to Pulse
EXT-19
0.01 0.00 [Hz]
Yes
Input Minimum
Frequency
Pulse Input Maximum
EXT-20
0.01 10.00 [kHz] Yes
0.01 60.00 [Hz] Yes
Frequency
Frequency Output
Corresponding to Pulse
EXT-21
Input Maximum
Frequency
PG P-gain
PG I-gain
EXT-22 P-Gain for ‘Sub-B’
EXT-23 I-Gain for ‘Sub-B’
22
23
0 to 9999
0 to 9999
1
1
3000
300
Yes
Yes
6-2
6-2
Slip Frequency for
EXT-24
PG Slip Freq
ASR P-Gain
ASR I-Gain
24
25
26
0 to 200 [%]
10 to 500 [%]
10 to 9999 [ms]
1
0.1
1
100 [%]
Yes
‘Sub-B’ Board
P-Gain for
EXT-25
100.0 [%] Yes
(Sensored) Vector_SPD
I-Gain for
EXT-26
200 [ms]
Yes
(Sensored) Vector_SPD
Trq + Limit
Trq - Limit
Q1 define
EXT-27 Forward Torque Limit
EXT-28 Reverse Torque Limit
EXT-30 Multi-Function Output
Terminal ‘Q1’ Define
27
28
30
0 to 200 [%]
0 to 200 [%]
1
1
-
180 [%]
180 [%]
FDT-1
Yes
Yes
Yes
FDT-1
0
1
6-2
FDT-2
FDT-3
FDT-4
FDT-5
OL
2
3
4
5
IOL
6
Stall
7
OV
8
LV
9
OH
10
11
12
Lost Command
Run
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
LCD
7-Segment
Stop
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Steady
INV line
COMM line
Ssearch
Step pulse
Seq pulse
Ready
Trv. ACC
Trv. DEC
MMC
Zspd Dect
Torq Dect
Multi-function Output
Terminal ‘Q2’ Define
Multi-function Output
Terminal ‘Q3’ Define
Q2 define
Q3 define
EXT-31
EXT-32
31
32
-
-
FDT-2
FDT-3
Yes
Yes
Same as Above
6-2
Frequency
Current
0
1
2
3
4
LM (Load Meter) Output
Selection
LM mode
LM adjust
AM1 mode
EXT-34
34
35
40
-
1
-
Current
100 [%]
Yes
Yes
6-2
6-2
Voltage
DC link Vtg
Torque
EXT-35 LM Output Adjustment
100 to 200 [%]
Frequency
Current
0
1
2
3
4
AM1 (Analog Meter 1)
EXT-40
Frequency Yes
Voltage
Output Selection
DC link Vtg
Torque
AM1 adjust
AM2 mode
6-2
EXT-41 AM1 Output Adjustment
41
42
100 to 200 [%]
1
-
100 [%]
Yes
Frequency
Current
0
1
2
4
AM2 (Analog Meter 2)
EXT-42
DC link Vtg Yes
Output Selection
DC link Vtg
Torque
AM2 adjust
Speed Limit
Speed Bias
Speed Gain
EXT-43 AM2 Output Adjustment
EXT-50 Speed Limit Level
EXT-51 Speed Limit Bias
EXT-52 Speed Limit Gain
43
44
45
46
100 to 200 [%]
1
100 [%]
100 [%]
100 [%]
1
Yes
No
No
No
0 to 100 [%]
0 to 200 [%]
1 to 10
0.1
0.1
1
Reverse
Forward
0
1
Speed Dir
ZSD Level
ZSD Band
EXT-53 Speed Limit Direction
47
48
49
-
Forward
2 [Hz]
No
Yes
Yes
Zero Speed Detection
EXT-54
0 to 120 [Hz]
0.01
0.01
Level
Zero Speed Detection
EXT-55
0 to 5 [Hz]
1 [Hz]
Bandwidth
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
LCD 7-Segment
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
TD Level
EXT-56 Torque Detection Level
50
0 to 150 [%]
0.1
0.1
100 [%]
5 [%]
Yes
Torque Detection
EXT-57
TD Band
51
0 to 10 [%]
Yes
Bandwidth
[PROG/ENT]
Not
EXT-99 Return Code
99
Not available
or
-
1
Yes
displayed
[SHIFT/ESC]
5.6 Communication Group [COM]
COM group appears only when the corresponding Option Boards are installed. Please refer to the option manual for detail.
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
LCD
7-Segment
Jump code
COM-00 Jump to Desired Code #
COM-01 Option Board Type
Not displayed
0 to 99
None
Not available
1
1
Yes
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1
2
3
Device Net
Synchro
PLC-GF
Profibus-DP
Digital-In
RS485
Opt B/D
01
-
None
Yes
Modbus-RTU
None
Command
Freq
Opt Mode
COM-02 Option Mode
COM-03 Option Version
02
03
-
-
None
-
No
No
Cmd + Freq
Opt Version
-
-
8 Bit Bin
8 BCD 1%
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
8 BCD 1Hz
12 Bit Bin
Binary Option Input
COM-04
D-In Mode
04
-
8 Bit Bin
No
Selection
12 BCD 0.1%
12 BCD 0.1Hz
12 BCD 1Hz
Digital Ftr
MAC ID
COM-05 Binary Input Filter Value
COM-10 Device Net ID
05
10
2-50
0-63
1
1
15
0
Yes
Yes
125 kbps
250 kbps
500 kbps
20
0
1
2
0
1
2
Device Net
COM-11
Baud Rate
11
12
-
-
125 kbps
20
Yes
No
Communication Speed
Out Instance
COM-12 Device Net Output
Instance
21
100
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
LCD
7-Segment
101
70
3
0
1
2
3
71
In Instance
Station ID
COM-13 Device Net Input Instance
13
17
-
70
1
No
110
111
PLC Option Station
COM-17
0 to 63
1
Yes
Number
Profi MAC ID
Output Num
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Output 5
Output 6
Output 7
Output 8
Input Num
Input 1
COM-20 Profibus ID
COM-30 Output Number
COM-31 Output 1
COM-32 Output 2
COM-33 Output 3
COM-34 Output 4
COM-35 Output 5
COM-36 Output 6
COM-37 Output 7
COM-38 Output 8
COM-40 Input Number
COM-41 Input 1
20
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
0 to 127
0 to 8
1
1
1
3
Yes
Yes
0000-57FF(HEX)
0000-57FF(HEX)
0000-57FF(HEX)
0000-57FF(HEX)
0000-57FF(HEX)
0000-57FF(HEX)
0000-57FF(HEX)
0000-57FF(HEX)
0 to 8
000A(HEX) Yes
000E(HEX) Yes
000F(HEX) Yes
0000(HEX) Yes
0000(HEX) Yes
0000(HEX) Yes
0000(HEX) Yes
0000(HEX) Yes
1
2
Yes
0000-57FF(HEX)
0000-57FF(HEX)
0000-57FF(HEX)
0000-57FF(HEX)
0000-57FF(HEX)
0000-57FF(HEX)
0000-57FF(HEX)
0000-57FF(HEX)
0005(HEX) Yes
0006(HEX) Yes
0000(HEX) Yes
0000(HEX) Yes
0000(HEX) Yes
0000(HEX) Yes
0000(HEX) Yes
0000(HEX) Yes
Input 2
COM-42 Input 2
Input 3
COM-43 Input 3
Input 4
COM-44 Input 4
Input 5
COM-45 Input 5
Input 6
COM-46 Input 6
Input 7
COM-47 Input 7
Input 8
COM-48 Input 8
ModBus
Yes
ModBus Mode
COM-52 ModBus Option Selection
52
ModBus RTU
RTU
[PROG/ENT]
Not
COM-99 Return Code
99
Not available
or
-
1
Yes
displayed
[SHIFT/ESC]
5.7 Application Group [APP]
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
LCD
7-Segment
Jump code
APP-00 Jump to Desired Code #
Not displayed
0 to 99
None
Not available
1
1
Yes
6-2
0
1
2
3
Application Mode
APP-01
Traverse
MMC
App Mode
01
-
None
No
6-2
Selection
DRAW
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
LCD 7-Segment
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
APP-0227 Traverse Amplitude
02
0.0 to 20.0 [%]
0.1
0.1
0.0 [%]
0.0 [%]
Yes
6-2
6-2
Trv. Amp
Traverse Scramble
APP-03
Trv. Scr
03
0.0 to 50.0 [%]
Yes
Amplitude
Trv Acc Time
Trv Dec Time
APP-04 Traverse Accel Time
APP-05 Traverse Decel Time
04
05
0 to 6000 [sec]
0 to 6000 [sec]
0.1
0.1
2.0 [sec]
3.0 [sec]
Yes
Yes
6-2
6-2
Traverse Offset (Hi)
Trv Off Hi
Trv Off Lo
Aux Mot Run
Starting Aux
Auto Op Time
Start freq 1
Start freq 2
Start freq 3
Start freq 4
Stop freq 1
Stop freq 2
Stop freq 3
Stop freq 4
Aux start DT
APP-06
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
0.0 to 20.0 [%]
0.0 to 20.0 [%]
-
0.1
0.1
-
0.0 [%]
Yes
Yes
-
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-2
Setting
Traverse Offset (Lo)
APP-07
0.0 [%]
Setting
Running Auxiliary Motor
APP-0828
-
1
-
Number Display
Starting Aux. Motor
APP-09
1 to 4
1
Yes
-
Selection
Operation Time Display
APP-10
-
-
on Auto Change
Start Frequency of Aux.
APP-11
0 to FU1-20
0 to FU1-20
0 to FU1-20
0 to FU1-20
0 to FU1-20
0 to FU1-20
0 to FU1-20
0 to FU1-20
0 to 9999 [sec]
0.01 49.99 [Hz] Yes
0.01 49.99 [Hz] Yes
0.01 49.99 [Hz] Yes
0.01 49.99 [Hz] Yes
0.01 15.00 [Hz] Yes
0.01 15.00 [Hz] Yes
0.01 15.00 [Hz]] Yes
0.01 15.00 [Hz] Yes
Motor 1
Start Frequency of Aux.
APP-12
Motor 2
6-2
Start Frequency of Aux.
APP-13
Motor 3
Start Frequency of Aux.
APP-14
Motor 4
Stop Frequency of Aux.
APP-15
Motor 1
Stop Frequency of Aux.
APP-16
Motor 2
6-2
6-2
Stop Frequency of Aux.
APP-17
Motor 3
Stop Frequency of Aux.
APP-18
Motor 4
Delay Time before
APP-19
0.1
60.0 [sec] Yes
60.0 [sec] Yes
Operating Aux Motor
Delay Time before
APP-20
Aux stop DT
Nbr Aux’s
20
21
22
0 to 9999 [sec]
0 to 4
0.1
1
Stopping Aux Motor
APP-21 The Number of Aux Motor
4
Yes
Yes
6-2
6-2
No
Yes
0 to 9999 [sec]
0 to FU1-20
0
1
Regul Bypass
APP-22 PID Bypass Selection
-
No
Sleep Delay
Sleep Freq
APP-23 Sleep Delay Time
APP-24 Sleep Frequency
23
24
0.1
60.0 [sec] Yes
6-2
6-2
0.01 19.00 [Hz] Yes
27 Code APP-02 through APP-07 appears only when APP-01 is set to ‘Traverse’.
28 Code APP-08 through APP-31 appears only when APP-01 is set to ‘MMC’.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
Adj.
During
Run
Keypad Display
Setting Range
LCD 7-Segment
Factory
Default
Code
Description
Units
Page
LCD
7-Segment
WakeUp Level
APP-25 Wake-Up Level
25
0 to 100 [%]
1
1
35 [%]
Yes
6-2
6-2
Auto Change Mode
APP-26
AutoCh-Mode
26
0 to 2
1
Yes
Selection
AutoEx-intv
AutoEx-level
APP-27 Auto Change Time
APP-28 Auto Change Level
27
28
00:00 to 99:00
0 to 100 [%]
00:01
0.1
70:00
Yes
Yes
6-2
20 [%]
No
0
1
Inter-lock
Actual Value
Actual Perc
APP-29 Inter-Lock Selection
29
30
31
-
-
-
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
6-2
6-2
6-2
Yes
APP-30 Actual Value Display
-
-
-
-
Actual Value Display in
APP-31
Percentage
None
0
1
2
3
V1_Draw
I_Draw
APP-3229 Draw Mode Selection
APP-33 Draw Size Setting
32
33
-
None
Yes
Yes
6-2
6-2
Draw Mode
DrawPerc
V2_Draw
0 to 150 [%]
0.1
100 [%]
29 Code APP-32 through APP-33 appears only when APP-01 is set to ‘Draw’.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
5.8 Sub-Board Selection Guide According To Function
Sub-Board Type
Code
Function Description
Multi-Function Input Terminal ‘P4’
SUB-A
Board
√
SUB-B
SUB-C
Board
√
SUB-D
Board
√
Board
EXT-02
EXT-03
EXT-04
EXT-05
EXT-06
EXT-07
EXT-08
EXT-09
EXT-10
EXT-14
EXT-15
EXT-16
EXT-17
EXT-18
√
√
√
Multi-Function Input Terminal ‘P5’
Multi-Function Input Terminal ‘P6’
V2 Mode Selection
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Filtering Time Constant for V2 Input Signal
V2 Input Minimum Voltage
√
√
√
√
√
√
Frequency Corresponding to V2 Input Minimum Voltage
V2 Input Maximum Voltage
√
√
√
√
√
√
Frequency Corresponding to V2 Input Maximum Voltage
Usage for Pulse Input Signal
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Pulse Input Signal Selection
√
Encoder Pulse Selection
√
Filtering Time Constant for Pulse Input Signal
Pulse Input Minimum Frequency
Frequency Output corresponding to Pulse Input Minimum
Frequency
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
EXT-19
EXT-20
EXT-21
Pulse Input Maximum Frequency
Frequency Output corresponding to Pulse Input Maximum
Frequency
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
P-Gain for PG Option
EXT-22
EXT-23
EXT-24
I-Gain for PG Option
Slip Frequency for PG Option
EXT-25 P-Gain for (Sensored) Vector_SPD
EXT-26 I-Gain for (Sensored) Vector_SPD
EXT-27 Forward Torque Limit
EXT-28 Reverse Torque Limit
√
√
√
√
√
√
Multi-function Output Terminal ‘Q1’
Multi-function Output Terminal ‘Q2’
Multi-function Output Terminal ‘Q3’
LM (Load Meter) Output Selection
LM Output Adjustment
EXT-30
EXT-31
EXT-32
EXT-34
EXT-35
EXT-40
EXT-41
EXT-42
EXT-43
√
√
√
√
AM1 (Analog Meter 1) Output Selection
AM1 Output Adjustment
AM2 (Analog Meter 2) Output Selection
AM2 Output Adjustment
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 - Parameter List
Notes:
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 6 -
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
ꢂ
Setting the DRV-04 [Frequency or Torque Mode]
6.1 Drive group [DRV]
(Note: In torque mode, speed unit is automatically
displayed in [%])
DRV-00: Command Frequency or Command
Torque/ Output Current (LCD)
Setti
ng
Parameter
Name
DRV-04
Programming Description
DRV
00
►
Cmd. Freq*
0.00 Hz
1. In DRV-00, press the
[PROG] key. 2. Enter the
desired freq. 3. Press the [ENT]
key to write the new value into
memory.
F *
0.00
KeyPad-
1
0
1
2
Factory Default:
0.00 Hz
0.00
* In Torque mode : LCD display - Cmd. Trq
7 Segment - r
Digital freq.
command
1. In DRV-00, press the
[PROG] key. 2. Press the
[ꢃ(Up)] or [ꢄ(Down)] key to
set the desired freq., while the
inverter keeps running. 3. Press
the [ENT] key to write the new
value into memory.
ꢂ
ꢂ
In FU2-39[Control Mode Selection], 4 (Sensorless_T)
6 (Vector_TRQ) is torque mode.
DRV-00 [Command Frequency or Command Torque]
has two functions.
KeyPad-
2
1) Digital frequency setting
- When DRV-04 [Frequency or Torque Mode] is set to 0
(KeyPad-1) or 1 (KeyPad-2), command freq is not
settable above FU1-20 [Maximum Frequency].
2) Monitoring function setting
- Command frequency displayed during stop
- Output current/frequency displayed during run.
Control terminal “V1” Voltage
analog input
V1
(0 to 0V)
See the description of I/O-
01~05.
Control terminal “I” Current
analog input (4 to 20mA)
See the description of I/O-
06~10.
Analog freq.
command
Analog/digital frequency command setting in DRV-04
[Frequency or Torque Mode]:
3
4
I
ꢂ
DRV-04 [Frequency or Torque Mode] is set to 2
(V1),3 (I) or 4 (V1+I), frequency command is set via
I/O-01~10 [Analog Frequency command/Torque].
Refer to I/O-01~10 for detail description.
Control terminal “V1”+“I” (0-
10V/4-20mA) Analog input
See the description of I/O-
01~10.
V1+I
ꢂ
ꢂ
DRV-16 [Speed Unit Selection] is set to 1 (Rpm),
speed is displayed in Rpm.
If FU2-39 is set to 4 (Sensorless_T) or 6
(Vector_TRQ), speed is displayed as the percent[%]
to the rated torque. Torque command is settable in
DRV-04 [Frequency or Torque Mode].
ꢂ
Command Freq/Torque setting via “V1” input terminal
when set DRV-04 [Frequency/Torque mode] to 2 (V1)
or 4 (V1+I)
* Factory default setting = 100[%] (Up to 150[%] settable)
Code
Default setting
10 [msec]
0 [V]
Setting range
0 ~ 10000 [msec]
0 ~ 10 [V]
0 ~ Max. freq
0 ~ 10 [V]
I/O-01
I/O-02
I/O-03
I/O-04
I/O-05
0 [Hz]
10 [V]
60 [Hz]
0 ~ Max freq
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [DRV]
Code
I/O-06
I/O-07
I/O-08
I/O-09
I/O-10
Keypad display
I filter
Parameter Name
Filter time constant for I signal
Input
I Input Minimum Current
Frequency Corresponding to I
Input Minimum Current
I Input Maximum Current
Frequency Corresponding to I
Input Maximum Current
Code
I/O-01
I/O-02
Keypad Display
V1 filter
Parameter Name
Filter Time Constant for
V1 Signal Input
I curr x1
I freq y1
I curr x2
I freq y2
V1 Input
Minimum Voltage
V1 volt x1
Frequency
Corresponding to V1
Input Minimum Voltage
I/O-03
V1 freq y1
➨ Important : Increase I/O-06-[Filter time constant for I signal
Input] if the I signal is affected by noise causing unstable
operation. Increasing this value makes response time slower.
V1 Input Maximum
Voltage
Frequency Corresponding
to V1 Input Maximum
Voltage
I/O-04
I/O-05
V1 volt x2
V1 freq y2
➨ Important : Increase I/O-01-[Filter Time Constant for V1
Signal Input] if the V1 signal is affected by noise causing
unstable operation. Increasing this value makes response time
slower.
Set freq
I/O-10
Set freq.
I/O-08
I/O-05
Terminal I ( 0 ~ 20 mA )
I/O-07
I Minimum
current
I/O-09
I Maximum
current
I/O-03
V1 analog input (0~10V)
Related parameters : DRV-04 [Frequency or Torque Mode]
DRV-16 [Speed Unit Selection]
FU1-20 [Maximum Frequency]
FU2-39 [Control Mode Selection]
I/O-1~10 [Analog Frequency
I/O-02
I/O-04
V1 Minimum V
V1 Maximum V
command/Torque]
I/O-06~10 [ Analog Current Input “ I “ Signal adjustment ]
ꢂ
Command Freq/Torque setting via “I” input terminal
when set DRV-04 [Frequency/Torque mode] to 3 (I)
or 4 (V1+I)
DRV-01: Acceleration Time
DRV
01
►
Acc. time
10.0 sec
Code
I/O-06
I/O-07
I/O-08
I/O-09
I/O-10
Default setting
10 [msec]
4 [mA]
Setting range
0 ~ 10000 [msec]
0 ~ 20 [mA]
0 ~ Max. freq
0 ~ 20 [mA]
01
10.0
Factory Default:
10.0 sec
10.0
0 [Hz]
20 [mA]
60 [Hz]
0 ~ Max. freq
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [DRV]
➨ Note: I/O-12 to I/O-14: Sets the terminal function of P1, P2,
DRV-02: Deceleration Time
P3 terminal inputs.
DRV
02
►
Dec. time
20.0 sec
LCD
display
XCEL- XCEL- XCEL- Factory
02
20.0
Code
Description
H
M
L
setting
DRV-
01
DRV-
02
Factory Default:
20.0 sec
20.0
Acc time Acc time 0
Dec time Dec time 0
0
0
0
10 sec
The inverter targets the FU2-70 when accelerating or
decelerating. When the FU2-70 is set to “Maximum
Frequency”, the acceleration time is the time taken by the
motor to reach FU1-20 from 0 Hz. The deceleration time is
the time taken by the motor to reach 0 Hz from FU1-20
[Maximum Frequency].
0
0
0
20 sec
I/O-25 ACC-1
I/O-26 DEC-1
I/O-27 ACC-2
I/O-28 DEC-2
I/O-29 ACC-3
I/O-30 DEC-3
I/O-31 ACC-4
I/O-32 DEC-4
I/O-33 ACC-5
I/O-34 DEC-5
I/O-35 ACC-6
I/O-36 DEC-6
I/O-37 ACC-7
I/O-38 DEC-7
Acc time 1
Dec time 1
Acc time 2
Dec time 2
Acc time 3
Dec time 3
Acc time 4
Dec time 4
Acc time 5
Dec time 5
Acc time 6
Dec time 6
Acc time 7
Dec time 7
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
20 sec
20 sec
30 sec
30 sec
40 sec
40 sec
50 sec
50 sec
40 sec
40 sec
30 sec
30 sec
20 sec
20 sec
When the FU2-70 is set to ‘Delta Frequency’, the
acceleration and deceleration time is the time taken to
reach a targeted frequency (instead the maximum
frequency) from a frequency.
The acceleration and deceleration time can be changed to
a preset transient time via multi-function inputs. By setting
the multi-function inputs (P1, P2, P3) to ‘XCEL-L’, ‘XCEL-
M’, ‘XCEL-H’ respectively, the Accel and Decel time set in
I/O-25 to I/O-38 are applied according to the binary inputs
of the P1, P2, P3.
FU2-71 [Accel/Decel time scale]
Set the Accel / Decel time unit.
ꢂ
Output Frequency
Setting
Unit
Description
Max. Freq.
Minimum 0 sec settable
Maximum 60 sec settable
Minimum 0 sec settable
0
1
2
0.01 sec
0.1 sec Maximum 600 sec settable
(Factory setting)
Minimum 0 sec settable
1 sec
Time
Maximum 6000 sec settable*
Acc. time
Dec. time
* Up to 6000 sec setting is avaiable via LE-200 keypad.
Related Functions: FU1-20 [Max freq]
FU2-70 [Reference freq. for Accel/Decel]
FU2-71 [Accel/Decel time scale]
I/O-12 to I/O-14 [Multi-function input
terminal P1, P2, P3]
DRV-03: Drive Mode (Run/Stop Method)
I/O-25 to I/O-38 [Acc/Dec time for step
frequency]
DRV
03
►
Drive mode
Keypad
03
1
ꢀ
FU2-70: Selects the frequency to be targeted for acceleration
and deceleration. [Max Freq, Delta Freq]
FU2-71: Selects the time scale. [0.01, 0.2, 1]
I/O-12 to I/O-14: Sets the terminal function of P1, P2, P3
terminal inputs.
ꢀ
ꢀ
Factory Default:
Fx/Rx-1
1
Select the source of run/stop command.
ꢀ
I/O-25 to I/O-38: Presets the Accel/Decel time activated via
multifunction inputs (P1, P2, P3)
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [DRV]
Setting Range
DRV-04: Frequency or Torque Mode (Frequency /
Torque Setting Method)
Description
LCD
7-Seg
Keypad
0
Run/Stop is controlled by Keypad.
Control Terminals FX, RX and 5G
control Run/Stop. (Method 1)
Control Terminals FX, RX and 5G
control Run/Stop. (Method 2)
Fx/Rx-1
Fx/Rx-2
1
2
DRV
04
►
Freq mode*
Keypad-1
04
0
Factory Default:
Keypad-1
0
* In Torque mode : LCD display: “Trque mode”
7 Segment: “04”
Output Frequency
Forward
ꢂ
If the DRV-04 [Frequency or Torque Mode] is set to 2
(V1), 3 (I), 4 (V1+I), see the description of I/O-01~10
[Analog Voltage/Current input signal adjustment].
If FU2-39 is set to 4 (Sensorless_T) or 6
Time
Reverse
ꢂ
(Vector_TRQ), speed is displayed as the percent[%]
to the rated torque. Torque command is settable in
DRV-04 [Frequency or Torque Mode].
DRV-04 setting value is separately saved according
to which control mode (Speed or Torque) is selected
in FU2-39 [Control mode selection].
Forward Run
ON
FX-CM
RX-CM
ꢂ
Reverse Run
ON
[Drive Mode: ‘Fx/Rx-1’]
Setting Range
Description
LCD
7-Seg
Frequency is set at DRV-00. The
Output Frequency
Forward
frequency is changed by pressing PROG
key and entered by pressing ENT key.
The inverter does not output the changed
frequency until the ENT key is pressed.
Frequency is set at DRV-00. Press
Keypad-1
0
Time
PROG key and then by pressing the ▲,
▼ key, the inverter immediately outputs
the changed frequency. Pressing the
ENT key saves the changed frequency.
Input the frequency reference (0-10V) to
the “V1” control terminal. Refer to the I/O-
01 to I/O-05 for scaling the signal.
Input the frequency reference (4~20mA)
to the “I” control terminal. Refer to the
I/O-06 to I/O-10 for scaling the signal.
Input the frequency reference (0~10V,
4~20mA) to the “V1”,“I” control terminals.
The ‘V1’ signal overrides the ‘I’ signal.
Reverse
Keypad-2
1
Run/Stop
Direction
ON
FX-CM
RX-CM
V1
I
2
3
4
ON
[Drive Mode: ‘Fx/Rx-2’]
V1+I
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [DRV]
DRV-05 ~ DRV-07: Step Frequency 1 ~ 3
Output Frequency
Freq. max
DRV
05
►
Step freq-1
10.00 Hz
05
06
07
10.00
Factory Default:
10.00 Hz
10.00
Reference Freq. Range
DRV►
Step freq-2
20.00 Hz
Analog Signal
Input (V1)
20.00
0V
10V
06
[Freq Mode: ‘V1’]
Factory Default:
20.00 Hz
20.00
DRV►
Step freq-3
30.00 Hz
Output Frequency
Freq. Max
30.00
07
Factory Default:
30.00 Hz
30.00
Reference Freq. Range
The inverter outputs preset frequencies set in these codes
according to the multi-function terminals configured as
‘Speed-L’, ‘Speed-M’ and ‘Speed-H’. The output
frequencies are decided by the binary combination of P1,
P2, P3 configured in I/O-12 to I/O-17. Refer to the
following table for the preset frequency outputs.
Analog Signal
Input (I)
4mA
20mA
[Freq Mode: ‘I’]
Output Frequency
Freq. Max
Binary Combination of P1, P2, P3
Output
Frequency
DRV-00
DRV-05
DRV-06
Step Speed
Speed-L
Speed-M
Speed-H
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
Speed 0
Speed 1
Speed 2
Speed 3
Reference Freq. Range
DRV-07
Analog Signal
Input (‘V1+I’)
0V+4mA
10V+20mA
Output Frequency
Speed 0
[Freq Mode: V1+’I’]
Related functions: DRV-00 [Digital Command Frequency or
Speed 3
Command Torque ]
Speed 2
Speed 1
FU2~39 [Control Mode Selection]
I/O-01~10 [Analog Voltage/Current input
signal adjustment]
Time
ON
ON
P1-CM
P2-CM
P3-CM
Time
Time
Time
ON
[Step Frequency Output]
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [DRV]
DRV-11: User Display Selection
Related Functions: I/O-12 to I/O-14 [Reference Inputs]
I/O-17 [Filtering Time Constant]
I/O-21 to I/O-21 [Step Frequency 4~7]
I/O-01 to I/O-10: Scaling the analog input signals (V1 and I)
for frequency reference.
DRV
11 Out
►
User disp
11
0.0
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
0.0 V
I/O-17: Adjusts the response sensibility of the input terminal
to eliminate contact noise.
I/O-21 to I/O-24: Sets the step frequency from 4 to 7.
Factory Default:
0.0 V
0.0
This code displays the parameter selected in FU2-73 [User
Display]. There are types of parameters in FU2-73:
Voltage, Watt and Torque.
☞
Note: The frequency setting method of ‘Speed 0’ is decided
by DRV-04.
DRV-12: Fault Display
DRV-08: Output Current
DRV
12
►
Fault
None
12
nOn
DRV
08
►
Current
0.0 A
08
0.0
Factory Default:
None
nOn
Factory Default:
0.0 A
0.0
This code displays the current fault (trip) status of the
inverter. Use the PROG, ▲ and ▼ key before pressing
the RESET key to check the fault content(s), output
frequency, output current, and whether the inverter was
accelerating, decelerating, or in constant speed at the time
of the fault occurred. Press the ENT key to exit. The fault
content will be stored in FU2-01 to FU2-05 when the
RESET key is pressed. For more detail, please refer to
Chapter 7.
This code displays the output current of the inverter in
RMS.
DRV-09: Motor Speed
DRV
09
►
Speed
09
0
0rpm
0rmp
Factory Default:
0
[Fault Contents]
Keypad display
This code displays the motor speed in RPM while the
motor is running.
Use the following equation to scale the mechanical speed
using FU2-74 [Gain for Motor Speed display] if you want to
change the motor speed display to rotation speed (r/min)
or mechanical speed (m/min).
Fault (Trip)
LCD
7-Segment
OC
Over-Current 1
Over-Voltage
Over Current 1
Over Voltage
External-A
OV
External Trip Input A
Emergency Stop
(Not Latched)
EXTA
BX
BX
Low-Voltage
Low Voltage
Fuse Open
Ground Fault
Over Heat
LV
FUSE
GF
Motor speed = 120 * (F/P) * FU2-74
Where, F= Output Frequency and P= the Number of Motor Poles
Fuse Open
Ground Fault
Over-Heat on Heat sink
Electronic Thermal Trip
Over-Load Trip
OH
E-Thermal
Over Load
ETH
OLT
DRV-10: DC Link Voltage
Inverter H/W Fault
- EEP Error
- ADC Offset
DRV
10
►
DC link vtg
----- V
10
----
HW-Diag
HW
- WDOG Error
- In-Phase Open
Factory Default:
---- V
----
External Trip Input B
Over-Current 2
Option Error
External-B
Arm Short
Option
EXTB
ASHT
OPT
This code displays the DC link voltage inside the inverter.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [DRV]
Output Phase Loss
Inverter Over-Load
This code shows the Reference Frequency and Feedback
Frequency while PID operation.
Phase Open
Inv. OLT
PO
IOLT
This code appears only when ‘PID’ is selected in FU2-47.
☞ Note: There are WDOG error, EEP error, and ADC Offset
for the inverter Hardware Fault - the inverter will not reset
when H/W fault occurs. Repair the fault before turning on
the power.
DRV-16: Hz/Rpm Display
DRV
12
►
Fault
None
12
nOn
☞ Note: Only the highest-level fault will be displayed when
multiple faults occur.
Factory Default:
None
nOn
Related Functions: FU2-01 to FU2-05 [Previous Fault History]
Set this parameter to 0 [Hz] to display frequency, or to 1[Rpm] to
display speed Ralated code
FU2-06 [Erase Fault History]
ꢀ
ꢀ
FU2-01 to FU2-05: There are up to 5 faults saved.
FU2-06: Erases the faults saved in FU2-01 to FU2-05.
Related Functions: Changing the Hz/Rpm display affects the
following parameter display.
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
DRV-00, 05, 06, 07, 14
FU1-20, 21,22, 24, 25, 32
FU2-32
DRV-13: Motor Direction Set (7-Segment Keypad)
13
I/O-03, 05, 08, 10, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 42, 43
EXT-08, 10
0
Factory Default:
0
DRV-20: FU1 Group Selection (7-Segment keypad)
DRV-21: FU2 Group Selection (7-Segment keypad)
DRV-22: I/O Group Selection (7-Segment keypad)
DRV-23: EXT Group Selection (7-Segment keypad)
This code sets the motor direction when using the 7-
Segment keypad.
7-Segment Display
Description
0
1
Run to forward direction
Run to reverse direction
DRV-14: Command/Output Frequency Display
(LCD Keypad)
DRV-24: COM Group Selection (7-Segment
keypad)
DRV
►TAR 0.00Hz
DRV-25: APP Group Selection (7-Segment
keypad)
14 OUT 0.00Hz
Factory Default:
0.00Hz
Select the desired group and press the PROG/ENT key to
move into the desired group. The parameter in the group
can be read and written after moving into the desired
group.
This code shows the Command (Target) Frequency set in
DRV00 and inverter Output Frequency.
DRV-15: Reference/Feedback Frequency Display
(LCD Keypad)
DRV►REF 0.00Hz
15 FBK 0.00Hz
Factory Default:
0.00Hz
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [DRV]
Notes:
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter description [FU1]
6.2 Function 1 Group [FU1]
Different combinations of acceleration and deceleration
patterns can be selected according to the application.
FU1-00: Jump to Desired Code #
Setting Range
Description
LCD
7-Seg
FU1►
Jump code
This is a general pattern for constant
torque applications.
00
1
Linear
0
This pattern allows the motor to
Factory Default:
1
accelerate and decelerate smoothly. The
actual acceleration and deceleration time
takes longer- about 40% than the time set
in DRV-01 and DRV-02.
This setting prevents shock during
acceleration and deceleration, and
prevents objects from swinging on
conveyors or other moving equipment.
This pattern provides more efficient
control of acceleration and deceleration in
typical winding machine applications.
The inverter makes shorten the
Jumping directly to any parameter code can be
accomplished by entering the desired code number. This
code is available only with LCD keypad.
S-curve
U-curve
1
2
FU1-03: Run Prevention
FU1
03
►
Run prev.
None
03
0
acceleration time by accelerating with a
current rate of about 150% of its rated
current and reduces the deceleration time
by decelerating with a DC voltage rate of
95% of its over-voltage trip level.
Appropriate application: When the
maximum capability of the inverter and
the motor are required.
Inappropriate application: The current
limit function may operate for a long
period of time for loads that have high
inertia such as fans.
Factory Default:
None
0
This function prevents reverse operation of the motor. This
function may be used for loads that rotate only in one
direction such as fans and pumps.
Minimum
Optimum
3
Setting Range
Description
LCD
None
7-Seg
0
1
2
Forward and Reverse run is available.
Forward run is prevented.
Reverse run is prevented.
Forward Prev
Reverse Prev
The inverter accelerates with a current
rate of about 120% of its rated current
and decelerates with a DC voltage rate of
93% of its over-voltage trip level.
4
FU1-05: Acceleration Pattern
FU1-06: Deceleration Pattern
☞ Note: In case of selecting the ‘Minimum’ or ‘Optimum’, the
DRV-01 and DRV-02 is ignored.
FU1
05
►
Acc. pattern
Linear
05
0
☞ Note: ‘Minimum’ and ‘Optimum’ functions operate normally
when the load inertia is less than 10 times compared to the
motor inertia. (FU2-37)
Factory Default:
Linear
0
☞ Note: ‘Optimum’ is useful when the motor capacity is
smaller than the inverter capacity.
☞ Note: ‘Minimum’ and ‘Optimum’ functions are not
appropriate for down operation in an elevator application.
FU1
06
►
Dec. pattern
Linear
06
0
Factory Default:
Linear
0
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter description [FU1]
Setting Range
Output Frequency
Description
LCD
7-Seg
Decel
0
Inverter stops by the deceleration pattern.
Inverter stops with DC injection braking.
Inverter outputs DC voltage when the
frequency reached the DC injection
braking frequency set in FU1-08 during
decelerating.
Dc-brake
1
Time
Free-run
(Coast to stop)
Inverter cuts off its output immediately
when the stop signal is commanded.
2
Acc. Pattern
Dec. Pattern
Output Frequency
[Accel/Decel Pattern: ‘Linear’]
Output Frequency
Time
Output Voltage
Time
Acc. Pattern
Dec. Pattern
Time
[Accel/Decel Pattern: ‘S-curve’]
Stop Command
ON
FX-CM
Time
Output Frequency
[Stop Mode: ‘Decel’]
Output Frequency
Time
Acc. Pattern
Dec. Pattern
FU1-08
Time
[Accel/Decel Pattern: ‘U-curve’]
Output Voltage
t1: FU1-09
t2: FU1-11
FU1-07: Stop Mode
FU1-10
[DCBr Value]
FU1
07
►
Stop mode
Time
07
0
Decel
t1 t2
Factory Default:
Decel
0
Stop Command
ON
FX-CM
Time
Sets the stopping method for the inverter.
[Stop Mode: ‘Dc-brake’]
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter description [FU1]
By introducing a DC voltage to the motor windings this
function stops the motor immediately. Selecting ‘DC-Brake’
in FU1-07 activates FU1-08 through FU1-11.
Output Frequency
Output Cutoff
FU1-08 [DC Injection Braking Frequency] is the frequency
at which the inverter starts to output DC voltage during
deceleration.
FU1-09 [DC Injection Braking On-delay Time] is the
inverter output blocking time before DC injection braking.
FU1-10 [DC Injection Braking Voltage] is the DC voltage
applied to the motor and is based on FU2-33 [Rated
Current of Motor].
Time
Output Voltage
Output Cutoff
FU1-11 [DC Injection Braking Time] is the time the DC
current is applied to the motor.
Time
Time
Stop Command
ON
FX-CM
Output Frequency
[[Stop Mode: ‘Free-run’]
FU1-08: DC Injection Braking Frequency
FU1-08
[DCBr Freq]
Time
FU1-09: DC Injection Braking On-delay Time
FU1-10: DC Injection Braking Voltage
FU1-11: DC Injection Braking Time
Output Voltage
FU1
08
►
DcBr freq
5.00 Hz
t1: FU1-09
08
09
10
11
5.00
t2: FU1-11
FU1-10
[DCBr Value]
Factory Default:
5.00 Hz
5.00
Time
t1 t2
FU1►
DcBlk time
0.10 sec
Stop Command
0.10
09
ON
FX-CM
Time
Factory Default:
0.10 sec
0.10
[DC Injection Braking Operation]
FU1►
DcBr value
50 %
50
10
Factory Default:
50 %
50
FU1►
DcBr time
1.0 sec
1.0
11
Factory Default:
1.0 sec
1.0
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter description [FU1]
☞ Note: The DC injection braking function does not function
when either FU1-12 or FU1-13 is set to “0”.
FU1-12: Starting DC Injection Braking Time
FU1-13: Staring DC Injection Braking Time
☞ Note: FU1-12 [Starting DC Injection Braking Voltage] is
also used as the DC Injection Braking Voltage for the
multifunction input when the multifunction input is set to “DC
braking”.
FU1
12
►
DcSt value
50 %
12
50
Factory Default:
50 %
50
FU1
13
►
DcSt time
0.0 sec
13
0.0
FU1-14: Pre-excitation Time
Factory Default:
0.0 sec
0.0
FU1► PreExTime
14
1.0
14
1.0 sec
Inverter holds the starting frequency for Starting DC
Injection Braking Time. It outputs DC voltage to the motor
for FU1-13 [Starting DC Injection Braking Time] with the
FU1-12 [Starting DC Injection Braking Voltage] before
accelerating.
Factory Default:
1.0 sec
1.0
To set the time for pre-exitation (Flux gain time) before
starting Vector or Sensorless Vector control
ꢂ
After FU1-14 [Pre-excitation Time] elapses the motor
starts acceleration,
Output Frequency
Code
FU1-14
LCD display
PreExTime
Factory setting
1 [sec]
Setting range
0 ~ 60 [sec]
FU1-22
Output freq
Time
[ Hz ]
Output Voltage
T1 = Pre-excitation time
FU1-12
Time
Output
voltage
[V]
t1
Output Current
t1: FU1-13 [Starting DC Injection
Braking Time]
FX-CM
Time
Ralated function :
FU2-34 [No Load Motor Current (RMS)]
FU1-16 [Pre-excitation Current]
Run Command
ON
FX-CM
Time
[Starting DC Injection Braking Operation]
Related Functions: FU2-33 [Rated Current of Motor]
FU2-33: the DC current is limited by this parameter.
ꢀ
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter description [FU1]
Code
FU1-16
LCD display
Flux Force
Factory setting
100 [%]
Setting range
100 ~ 500 [%]
FU1-15: Hold Time
FU1► Hold Time
15
1000
15
1000 ms
Motor magnetic flux
Factory Default:
1000 ms
1000
Excited current
FX-CM
To set the time to maintain holding torque at zero speed
and stop the operation in a shortest time during
Vector_SPD mode operation
ꢂ
The inverter runs to maintain speed 0 for the hold
time in Vector_SPD mode and decelerates to stop
after the hold time elapse.
Related Functions: FU2-34 [No Load Motor Current (RMS)]
FU1-14 [Pre-excitation Time]
Output Speed
[Hz or Rpm]
FU1-20: Maximum Frequency
FU1-21: Base Frequency
FU1-22: Starting Frequency
Output
Voltage
[V]
FU1►
M
ax freq
20
21
60.00
20
60.00 Hz
Hold time
Factory Default:
60.00 Hz
60.00
ꢅOperation method during Hold Time:
FU1-7[Stop mode] Decel: speed zero control
FU1-7[Stop mode] DC-brake
FU1
21
►
Base freq
60.00 Hz
60.00
Factory Default:
60.00 Hz
60.00
FU1-16: Pre-excitation Current
FU1► Flux Force
16 100.0 %
FU1
22
►
Start freq
0.50 Hz
16
1 00.0
22
0.50
Factory Default:
100.0 %
100.0
Factory Default:
0.50 Hz
0.50
FU1-20 [Maximum Frequency] is the maximum output
frequency of the inverter. Make sure this maximum
frequency does not exceed the rated speed of the motor.
FU1-21 [Base Frequency] is the frequency where the
inverter outputs its rated voltage. In case of using a 50Hz
motor, set this to 50Hz.
FU1-16 [Pre-excitation Current] is applied during FU1-14.
When the motor magnetic flux increases to match the
rated magnetic flux, pre-excitation current starts to
decrease. When the motor magnetic flux reaches to the
rated magnetic flux, the pre-excitation current matches the
rated pre-excitation current.
FU1-22 [Starting Frequency] is the frequency where the
inverter starts to output its voltage.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter description [FU1]
Output Frequency
Output Voltage
Reference Frequency Curve
Output Frequency Curve
Freq. Max
FU1-24
Rated
Voltage
FU1-25
Time
Output
Frequency
FU1-22.
FU1-21.
FU1-20
[Freq. limit: ‘Yes’]
☞ Note: If the command frequency is set lower than the
☞ Note: Frequency limit does not work during accelerating
starting frequency, inverter does not output voltage to motor.
and decelerating.
FU1-23: Frequency Limit Selection
FU1-24: Low Limit Frequency
FU1-25: High Limit Frequency
FU1-26: Manual/Auto Boost Selection
FU1-27: Torque Boost in Forward Direction
FU1-28: Torque Boost in Reverse Direction
FU1
►
Freq limit
0
23
24
25
23 --- No ---
FU1
26
►
Torque boost
Manual
26
0
Factory Default:
No
0
Factory Default:
Manual
0
FU1►
F-limit Lo
0.50 Hz
0.50
24
FU1
27
►
Fwd boost
2.0 %
27
2.0
Factory Default:
0.50 Hz
0.50
Factory Default:
2.0 %
2.0
FU1►
F-limit Hi
60.00 Hz
60.00
25
FU1
28
►
Rev boost
2.0 %
28
2.0
Factory Default:
60.00 Hz
60.00
Factory Default:
2.0 %
2.0
FU1-23 selects the limits for the inverter operating
frequency. If FU1-23 is set to ‘Yes’, inverter operates
within the upper and lower limit setting. The inverter
operates at the upper or the lower limit when the frequency
reference is outside the frequency limit range.
This function is used to increase the starting torque at low
speed by increasing the output voltage of the inverter. If
the boost value is set too high than required, it may cause
the motor flux to saturate, causing over-current trip.
Increase the boost value when there is excessive distance
between inverter and motor.
[Manual Torque Boost]: The forward and reverse torque
boost is set separately in FU1-27 and FU1-28.
☞ Note: The torque boost value is the percentage of inverter
rated voltage.
☞ Note: When FU1-29 [Volts/Hz Pattern] is set to ‘User V/F’,
this function does not work.
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter description [FU1]
☞ Note: When FU2-40 [Control Mode] is set to ‘Sensorless’,
the torque boost value is the rate per thousand of inverter
rated voltage.
FU1-29: Volts/Hz Pattern
FU1
29
►
V/F pattern
Linear
29
0
[Auto Torque Boost]: Inverter outputs high starting torque
by automatic boosting according to the load.
☞ Note: Auto torque boost is only available for the 1st motor.
Manual torque boost must be used for the 2nd motor.
☞ Note: The auto torque boost value is added to the manual
torque boost value.
Factory Default:
Linear
0
This is the pattern of voltage/frequency ratio. Select the
proper V/F pattern according to the load. The motor torque
is dependent on this V/F pattern.
☞ Note: Auto torque boost is available only when FU2-40
[Control Mode] is set to ‘V/F’.
[Linear] pattern is used where constant torque is required.
This pattern maintains a linear volts/frequency ratio from
zero to base frequency. This pattern is appropriate for
constant torque applications.
☞ Note: Conduct Auto tuning in FU2-41 [Auto tuning] to use
Auto torque boost effectively.
[Square] pattern is used where variable torque is required.
This pattern maintains squared volts/hertz ratio. This
pattern is appropriate for fans, pumps, etc.
[User V/F] pattern is used for special applications. Users
can adjust the volts/frequency ratio according to the
application. This is accomplished by setting the voltage
and frequency, respectively, at four points between starting
frequency and base frequency. The four points of voltage
and frequency are set in FU1-30 through FU1-37.
Output Voltage
100%
Forward and Reverse direction
(Set the same value for FU1-27
and FU1-28)
Manual
Boost
Value
Output
Frequency
Freq. Base
[Constant Torque Loads: Conveyor, Moving Equip. etc.]
Output Voltage
100%
Output Voltage
100%
Forward Direction - Motoring
(Set FU1-27 to a value)
Reverse Direction - Regenerating
(Set FU1-28 to ‘0’)
Output
Frequency
Manual
Boost
Value
Freq. Base
Output
Frequency
[V/F Pattern: ‘Linear’]
FU1-21
[Ascending and Descending Loads: Parking, Hoist etc.]
Related Functions: FU1-29 [Volts/Hz Pattern]
FU2-40 [Control Mode selection]
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter description [FU1]
FU1-30 ~ FU1-37: User V/F Frequency and Voltage
Output Voltage
100%
FU1►
User freq 1
15.00 Hz
30
15.00
30
Factory Default:
15.00 Hz
15.00
Output
Frequency
FU1
31
►
User volt 1
25 %
31
25
Freq. Base
Factory Default:
25 %
25
[V/F Pattern: ‘Square’]
□
□
□
Output Voltage
100%
FU1-37
FU1
36
►
User freq 4
60.00 Hz
36
37
15.00
FU1-35
FU1-33
Factory Default:
60.00 Hz
15.00
FU1-31
Output
Frequency
FU1
37
►
User volt 4
100 %
FU1-30
FU1-32
FU1-36
FU1-34
100
Freq. Base
Factory Default:
100 %
100
[V/F Pattern: ‘User V/F’]
These functions are available only when ‘User V/F’ is
selected in FU1-29 [V/F pattern]. Users can make the
custom V/F pattern by setting four points between FU1-22
[Starting Frequency] and FU1-21 [Base Frequency].
Output Voltage
100%
FU1-37
FU1-35
FU1-33
FU1-31
Output
Frequency
FU1-30
FU1-32
FU1-36
FU1-34
Freq. Base
[User V/F]
☞ Note: When the ‘User V/F’ is selected, the torque boost of
FU1-26 through FU1-28 is ignored.
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter description [FU1]
Related Functions: FU1-21 [Base Frequency]
FU1-22 [Starting Frequency]
Output Voltage
FU1-29 [Volts/Hz Pattern]
100%
80%
FU1-38: Output Voltage Adjustment
FU1
38
►
Volt control
100.0 %
38
100
Output
Frequency
Factory Default:
100.0 %
100
Reference Frequency
(Steady Speed)
This function is used to adjust the output voltage of the
inverter. This is useful when using a motor with a lower
rated voltage than the main input voltage. When this is set
at 100%, inverter outputs its rated voltage.
[When Energy Save Level is set at 20%]
☞ Note: This function is not recommended for a large load or
for an application that need frequent acceleration and
deceleration.
Output Voltage
100%
☞ Note: This function does not work when ‘Sensorless’ is
selected in FU2-40 [Control Mode].
When set at 50%
50%
FU1-50: Electronic Thermal (Motor i2t) Selection
FU1-51: Electronic Thermal Level for 1 Minute
FU1-52: Electronic Thermal Level for Continuous
FU1-53: Electronic Thermal Characteristic (Motor
type) selection
Output
Frequency
FU1-21 [Base Freq]
☞ Note: The inverter output voltage does not
exceed the main input voltage, even though FU1-
38 is set at 110%.
These functions are to protect the motor from overheating
without using additional thermal overload relay. Inverter
calculates the temperature rising of the motor using
several parameters and determines whether or not the
motor is overheated. Inverter will turn off its output and
display a trip message when the electronic thermal feature
is activated.
FU1-39: Energy Save Level
FU1
39
►
Energy save
0 %
39
0
FU1
►
ETH select
50
0
Factory Default:
0 %
0
50 --- No ---
This function is used to reduce the output voltage in
applications that do not require high torque and current at
its steady speed. The inverter reduces its output voltage
after accelerating to the reference frequency (steady
speed) if the energy save level is set at 20%. This function
may cause over-current trip due to the lack of output
torque in a fluctuating load.
Factory Default:
No
0
This function activates the ETH parameters by setting
‘Yes’.
FU1
51
►
ETH 1min
150 %
51
150
This function does not work with 0% set point value.
Factory Default:
150 %
150
This is the reference current when the inverter determines
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter description [FU1]
the motor has overheated. It trips in one minute when
150% of rated motor current established in FU2-33 flows
for one minute.
power a cooling fan. As the motor speed changes, the
cooling effects doe not change.
Output Current
Forced-Cool
☞ Note: The set value is the percentage of FU2-33 [Rated
100%
95%
Motor Current].
FU1
52
►
ETH cont
100 %
Self-Cool
52
100
65%
Factory Default:
100 %
100
This is the current at which the motor can run continuously.
Generally, this value is set to ‘100%’ and which means the
rated motor current set in FU2-33. This value must be set
less than FU1-52 [ETH 1min].
20Hz
60Hz
[Load Current Derating Curve]
☞ Note: Despite the motor current changing frequently due to
load fluctuation or acceleration and deceleration, the
inverter calculates the i2t and accumulates the value to
protect the motor.
☞ Note: The set value is the percentage of FU2-33 [Rated
Motor Current].
Load Current [%]
Related Functions: FU2-33 [Rated Motor Current]
FU1-51
[ETH 1min]
FU1-54: Overload Warning Level
FU1-55: Overload Warning Time
FU1-52
[ETH cont]
FU1
54
►
OL level
150 %
54
150
Trip Time
1 minute
Factory Default:
150 %
150
[Motor i2t Characteristic Curve]
FU1
55
►
OL time
10.0 sec
55
10.0
FU1
53
►
Motor type
Self-cool
53
0
Factory Default:
10.0 sec
10.0
Factory Default:
Self-cool
0
The inverter generates an alarm signal when the output
current has reached the FU1-54 [Overload Warning Level]
for the FU1-55 [Overload Warning Time]. The alarm signal
persists for the FU1-55 even if the current has become the
level below the FU1-54.
To make the ETH function (Motor i2t) work correctly, the
motor cooling method must be selected correctly according
to the motor.
[Self-cool] is a motor that has a cooling fan connected
directly to the shaft of the motor. Cooling effects of a self-
cooled motor decrease when a motor is running at low
speeds. The motor current is derated as the motor speed
decreases.
Multi-function output terminal (AXA-AXC) is used as the
alarm signal output. To output the alarm signal, set I/O 44
[Multifunction Auxiliary Contact Output] to ‘OL’.
☞ Note: Inverter is not tripped by this function.
[Forced-cool] is a motor that uses a separate motor to
☞ Note: The set value is the percentage of FU2-33 [Rated
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter description [FU1]
Motor Current].
Output Current
☞ Note: The set value is the percentage of FU2-33 [Rated
Motor Current].
Output Current
FU1-54
[OL Level]
FU1-57
[OLT Level]
Time
Time
FU1-54
[OL Level]
Time
FU1-57
[OLT Level]
FU1- 58 [OLT Time]
AXA-AXC
ON
t1
Output Frequency
Overload Trip
t1
t1: FU1-55 [Overload Warning Time]
[Overload Warning]
Related Functions: FU2-33 [Rated Motor Current]
I/O-44 [Multi-function Auxiliary Contact
Output]
Time
[Overload Trip Operation]
Related Functions: FU2-33 [Rated Motor Current]
FU1-56: Overload Trip Selection
FU1-57: Overload Trip Level
FU1-58: Overload Trip Delay Time
FU1-59: Stall Prevention Mode Selection (Bit set)
FU1-60: Stall Prevention Level
FU1
►
OLT select
56
57
1
56 --- Yes ---
FU1
59
►
Stall prev.
000
Factory Default:
Yes
1
59
000
Factory Default:
000
000
FU1►
OLT level
180 %
180
57
This bit set parameter follows the conventions used in I/O-
15 and I/O-16 to show the ON (bit set) status.
Factory Default:
180 %
180
FU1
58
►
OLT time
60.0 sec
FU1
60
►
Stall level
180 %
58
60.0
60
180
Factory Default:
60.0 sec
60.0
Factory Default:
180 %
180
Inverter cuts off its output and displays fault message
when the output current persists over the FU1-57
[Overload Trip Level] for the time of FU1-58 [Overload Trip
Time]. This function protects the inverter and motor from
abnormal load conditions.
This function is used to prevent the motor from stalling by
reducing the inverter output frequency until the motor
current decreases below the stall prevention level. This
function can be selected for each mode of acceleration,
steady speed, and deceleration via bit combination.
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter description [FU1]
☞ Note: The set value is the percentage of FU2-33 [Rated
Output Current
Motor Current].
FU1-60
[Stall Level]
FU1-59 [Stall Prevention Mode Selection]
Setting Range
Time
FU1-59
Description
3rd bit 2nd bit 1st bit
FU1-60
[Stall Level]
Stall Prevention during
Acceleration
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
001
Stall Prevention during Steady
Speed
Output Frequency
010
Stall Prevention during
Deceleration
100
When FU1-59 is set to ‘111’, stall prevention works during
accelerating, steady speed and decelerating.
Time
[Stall Prevention during Steady Speed]
☞ Note: The acceleration and deceleration time may take
longer than the time set in DRV-01, DRV-02 when Stall
Prevention is selected.
☞ Note: If stall prevention status persists, inverter may stop
during acceleration.
DC Link Voltage
390VDC or
680V DC
Related Functions: FU2-33 [Rated Motor Current]
Time
Time
Output Frequency
Output Current
FU1-60
[Stall Level]
Time
FU1-60
[Stall level]
[Stall Prevention during Deceleration]
Output Frequency
FU1-99: Return Code (7-Segment Keypad)
[Stall Prevention during Acceleration]
Time
99
0
Factory Default:
0
This code is used to exit a group when using a 7-segment
keypad. After pressing PROG/ENT key, set the value to ‘1’
and press the PROG/ENT key again to exit.
Related Functions: FU2-99 [Return Code]
I/O-99 [Return Code]
EXT-99 [Return Code]
COM-99 [Return Code]
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter description [FU1]
Notes:
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter description [FU2]
6.3 Function 2 Group [FU2]
[Fault Contents]
Keypad Display
LCD
Over Current 1
Over Voltage
External-A
Fault (Trip)
7-Segment
OC
FU2-00: Jump to desired code #
Over-Current 1
Over-Voltage
OV
FU2►
Jump code
External Trip Input A
00
1
EXTA
Emergency Stop
(Not Latched)
BX
BX
Factory Default:
1
Low-Voltage
Low Voltage
Fuse Open
Ground Fault
Over Heat
LV
FUSE
GF
Jumping directly to any parameter code can be
accomplished by entering the desired code number. This
code is available only with LCD keypad.
Fuse Open
Ground Fault
Over-Heat on Heat sink
Electronic Thermal Trip
Over-Load Trip
OH
E-Thermal
Over Load
ETH
OLT
FU2-01: Previous Fault History 1
FU2-02: Previous Fault History 2
FU2-03: Previous Fault History 3
FU2-04: Previous Fault History 4
FU2-05: Previous Fault History 5
FU2-06: Erase Fault History
Inverter H/W Fault
- EEP Error
- ADC Offset
- WDOG Error
- In-Phase Open
External Trip Input B
Over-Current 2
HW-Diag
HW
External-B
Arm Short
Option
EXTB
ASHT
OPT
PO
Option Error
FU2
01
►
Last trip-1
None
01
0
Output Phase Loss
Inverter Over-Load
Phase Open
Inv. OLT
IOLT
Factory Default:
None
0
☞ Note: There are WDOG error, EEP error, and ADC Offset
for the inverter Hardware Fault, and the inverter will not
reset when H/W fault occurs. Repair the fault before turning
on the power.
□
□
□
☞ Note: When multiple faults occur, only the highest-level
fault will be displayed.
FU2
05
►
Last trip-5
None
05
0
Related Functions: DRV-12 [Fault Display] displays current
Factory Default:
None
0
fault status.
This code displays up to five previous fault (trip) status of
the inverter. Use the PROG, ▲ and ▼ key before
pressing the RESET key to check the fault content(s),
output frequency, output current, and whether the inverter
was accelerating, decelerating, or in constant speed at the
time of the fault occurred. Press the ENT key to exit. The
fault content will be stored in FU2-01 through FU2-05
when the RESET key is pressed. For more detail, please
refer to Chapter 7.
FU2
►
Erase trips
06
0
06 --- No ---
Factory Default:
No
0
This function erases all fault histories of FU2-01 to FU-05
from the memory.
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
FU2-10 ~ FU2-16: Frequency Jump
FU2-07: Dwell Frequency
FU2-08: Dwell Time
FU2
►
Jump freq
10
0
10 --- No ---
FU2
07
►
Dwell freq
5.00 Hz
Factory Default:
No
0
07
5.00
Factory Default:
5.00 Hz
5.00
FU2
11
►
jump lo 1
10.00 Hz
11
10.00
FU2
08
►
Dwell time
0.0 sec
Factory Default:
10.00 Hz
10.00
08
0.0
Factory Default:
0.0 sec
0.0
FU2
12
►
jump Hi 1
15.00 Hz
12
15.00
This function is used to output torque in an intended
direction. It is useful in hoisting applications to get enough
torque before a releasing mechanical brake. If the dwell
time is set at ‘0’, this function is not available. In dwell
operation, the inverter outputs AC voltage not a DC
voltage.
Factory Default:
15.00 Hz
15.00
□
□
FU2►
jump lo 3
30.00 Hz
15
16
30.00
15
☞ Note: DC Injection Braking does not output torque to an
intended direction. It is just to hold the motor.
Factory Default:
30.00 Hz
30.00
Output Frequency
FU2►
jump Hi 3
35.00 Hz
35.00
16
Factory Default:
35.00 Hz
35.00
FU1-07
To prevent undesirable resonance and vibration on the
structure of the machine, this function locks out the
potential resonance frequency from occurring. Three
different jump frequency ranges may be set. This
avoidance of frequencies does not occur during
accelerating or decelerating. It only occurs during
continuous operation.
Time
t1
Output Current
t1: FU2-08 [Dwell Time]
Time
Output Frequency
Freq. Max
FU2-12
FU2-11
Run Command
ON
Release
FU2-14
FU2-13
FX-CM
Mechanical
Time
Time
FU2-16
FU2-15
Brake
Reference
Frequency
[Dwell Operation]
10Hz 20Hz 30Hz
[Frequency Jump]
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
☞ Note: When the reference frequency is set inside the jump
frequency, the output frequency goes to the frequency
marked by “n” symbol.
Ex) If DRV-10: 1 sec, FU2-17: 40%, FU2-18: 20%,
Actual Accel Time = 1 sec + (1sec*0.4)/2 + (1sec*0.2)/2 =
1.3 sec
☞ Note: If one frequency jump range is required, set all ranges
to the same range.
FU2-19: Input/Output Phase Loss Protection (Bit
Set)
FU2-17: Start Curve for S-Curve Accel/Decel
Pattern
FU2-18: End Curve for S-Curve Accel/Decel
FU2
19
►
Trip select
00
19
00
Pattern
Factory Default:
00
00
FU2
17
►
Start Curve
40 %
This function is used to cut the inverter output off in case of
phase loss in either input power or inverter output.
17
40
Factory Default:
40%
40
FU2-19 [Phase Loss Protection Select]
Setting Range
FU2-19
Description
2nd bit 1st bit
FU2► End Curve
18
18
40
0
0
1
0
1
0
00 Phase loss protection does not work
01 Protect inverter from output phase loss
10 Protect inverter from input phase loss
40 %
Factory Default:
40%
40
Protect inverter from input and output
phase loss
1
1
11
This parameter is used to adjust the Accel and Decel
pattern when ‘S-Curve’ is selected in FU1-05 and FU1-06
respectively. To use this function, the Reference
Frequency for Accel and Decel set in FU2-70 should be
set to ‘Delta freq’.
Related Functions: FU2-22 to FU2-25 [Speed Search]
FU2-20: Power ON Start Selection
Output Frequency
FU2►Power-on run
20
0
20 --- No ---
Factory Default:
No
0
Max. Freq./2
Time
If FUN-20 is set to ‘No’, restart the inverter by cycling the
FX or RX terminal to CM terminal after power has been
restored.
If FUN-20 is set to ‘Yes’, the inverter will restart after power
is restored. If the motor is rotating by inertia at the time
power is restored, the inverter may trip. To avoid this trip,
use ‘Speed Search’ function by setting FU2-22 to ‘1xxx’.
FU2-17
FU2-18
FU2-17
FU2-18
Linear
Linear
[S0Curve Adjustment]
Actual Accel Time = DRV-01 + (DRV-01 * FU2-17)/2 +
(DRV-01*FU2-18)/2
Actual Decel Time = DRV-02 + (DRV-02 * FU2-17)/2 +
(DRV-02*FU2-18)/2
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
reset. If the motor is rotating by inertia at the time power is
restored, the inverter may trip. To avoid this trip, use
‘Speed Search’ function by setting FU2-22 to ‘xx1x’.
Input Power
Power On
Output Frequency
Tripped
Time
Output Frequency
Time
Time
Time
No Effect
ON
Start
ON
No Effect
Start
ON
ON
FX-CM
Time
Time
ON
FX-CM
RST-CM
[Reset restart: ‘No’]
Input Power
Power On
Output Frequency
Tripped
Time
Output Frequency
[Power ON Start: ‘No’]
Time
Start
ON
Time
Time
FX-CM
Time
Time
Start
ON
ON
RST-CM
FX-CM
[Power ON Start: ‘Yes’]
[Reset restart: ‘Yes’]
☞ Note: In case of using ‘Power ON Start’ to ‘Yes’, make sure
to utilize appropriate warning notices to minimize the
potential for injury or equipment damage.
☞ Note: In case of using ‘Reset Restart’ to ‘Yes’, make sure to
utilize appropriate warning notices to minimize the potential
for injury or equipment damage.
Related Functions: FU2-22 ~ FU2-25 [Speed Search]
Related Functions: FU2-22 ~ FU2-25 [Speed Search]
FU2-21: Restart After Fault Reset
FU2-22: Speed Search Selection (Bit Set)
FU2-23: Current Limit Level During Speed Search
FU2-24: P Gain During Speed Search
FU2►
RST restart
21
0
21 --- No ---
FU2-25: I Gain During Speed Search
Factory Default:
No
0
FU2
22
►
Speed Search
0000
22
0000
If FU2-21 is set to ‘Yes’, inverter will restart after the RST
(reset) terminal has been reset a fault.
Factory Default:
0000
0000
If FU2-21 is set to ‘No’, restart the inverter by cycling the
FX or RX terminal to CM terminal after the fault has been
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
FU2-25 [I Gain] is the Integral gain used for speed search.
Set this value according to load inertia set in FU2-37.
FU2
23
►
SS Sup-Curr
100 %
23
24
25
100
Factory Default:
100 %
100
Input Power
Input Power loss
FU2►
SS P-gain
100
24
100
Time
Factory Default:
100
100
Motor Speed
FU2►
SS I-gain
1000
25
1000
Factory Default:
1000
100
Time
Output Frequency
This function is used to permit automatic restarting after
Power ON, Fault Reset, and Instant Power Failure without
waiting for the motor to stop.
The speed search gain should be set after considering the
inertia moment (GD2) and magnitude of torque of the load.
FU2-37 [Load Inertia] must be set at the correct value to
make this function operate correctly.
Time
Output Voltage
FU2-22 [Speed Search Select]
Setting Range
Description
4th bit 3rd bit 2nd bit 1st bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Speed search function does not work
Speed search during Accelerating
Speed search during a Fault Reset
restarting (FU2-21) and Auto restarting
(FU2-26)
Speed search during Instant Power
Failure restarting.
Speed search during Power ON
starting (FU2-20)
Time
[Speed Search Operation]
0
0
1
0
Related Functions: FU2-20 [Power ON Start]
FU2-21 [Restart after Fault Reset]
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
FU2-26 ~ FU2-27 [Auto Restart]
FU2-30 ~ FU2-37 [Motor Parameters]
When FU2-22 is set to ‘1111’, Speed Search works for all
conditions.
FU2-26: Number of Auto Restart Attempt
FU2-27: Delay Time Before Auto Restart
FU2-22 [Speed Search Selection] selects the speed
search function.
FU2
26
►
Retry number
0
26
0
FU2-23 [Current Limit Level] is the current that the inverter
limits its current rise during speed searching. (The set
value is the percentage of FU2-33 [Rated Motor Current])
Factory Default:
0
0
FU2
27
►
Retry delay
1.0 sec
FU2-24 [P Gain] is the proportional gain used for speed
search. Set this value according to load inertia set in FU2-
37.
27
1.0
Factory Default:
1.0 sec
1.0
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
This function is used to allow the inverter to reset itself for
a selected number of times after a fault has occurred. The
inverter can restart itself automatically when a fault occurs.
To use the speed search function during auto restarting set
FU2-22 to ‘xx1x’. See FU2-22 ~ FU2-25.
Input power[v]
When an under voltage (LV) fault, inverter disable (BX) or
Arm short occurs, the drive does not restart automatically.
Time [sec]
Time [sec]
Time [sec]
Motor speed [rpm]
Output vtg [V]
Output Frequency
t: FU2-27
t
t
Time
1st Fault
2nd Fault
t1
t2 t3
Restart with
Restart with
Speed Search Speed Search
t1 : Ssearch wait time
t2 : Ssearch Accel time
t3 : Ssearch Decel time
☞ Note: Inverter decreases the retry number by one as a fault
occurs. When restarted without a fault during 30 seconds,
the inverter increases the retry number by one.
☞ Note: This parameter is not valid when low voltage (LV)
fault or instant power loss (within 15msec) occurs.
FU2-28: Speed search hold time
FU2► SS blk time
FU2-30: Rated Motor Selection
FU2-31: Number of Motor Pole
FU2-32: Rated Motor Slip
FU2-33: Rated Motor Current
FU2-34: No Load Motor Current
FU2-36: Motor Efficiency
28
1.0
28
1.0 sec
Factory Default:
1.0 sec
1. 0
The inverter starts speed search function after the preset
time t1 elapses. Set the desired time for inverter to restart
the previous operation using Speed search function.
Speed search function [FU2-22] is activated automatically
during exchanging function.
FU2-37: Load Inertia
If you do not set these values, inverter will use its default
values.
FU2
30
►
Motor select
0.75kW
Keypad
display
Factory
setting
Setting
Range
30
0
Code
Description
Speed search
hold time
Factory Default:
0.75 kW
0
0 ~ 60
sec
(This value is set according to the model number before shipping)
FU2-28 SS blk time
1 sec
during speed
search
This parameter sets the motor capacity. Other motor
related parameters are changed automatically according to
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
motor capacity. The motor related parameters are FU2-32
[Rated Motor Slip], FU2-33 [Rated Motor Current], FU2-34
[No Load Motor Current], FU2-42 [Stator Resistance],
FU2-43 [Rotor Resistance], and FU2-44 [Leakage
Inductance].
output frequency higher than the reference frequency to
increase the motor speed. The inverter increases or
decreases the output by delta frequency shown below.
Output current – No load current
Delta
=
×
Rated Slip
Freq.
If you know the motor parameters, set the values in the
relevant codes for better control performance.
Rated current – No load current
Output frequency = Reference freq. + Delta freq.
FU2
31
►
Pole number
4
31
4
Factory Default:
4
4
FU2
36
►
Efficiency
72 %
36
72
This is used to display the motor speed. If you set this
value to 2, inverter will display 3600 rpm instead 1800rpm
at 60Hz output frequency. (See motor nameplate)
Factory Default:
72%
72
(This value is set according to the motor capacity set in FU2-30)
This value is used for calculating the output wattage when
FU2-72 is set to ‘Watt’.
FU2
32
►
Rated-Slip
3.00 Hz
32
3.00
Factory Default:
3.00 Hz
3.00
FU2
37
►
Inertia rate
0
37
0
This is used in ‘Slip Compensation’ control. If you set this
value incorrectly, motor may stall during slip compensation
control. (See motor nameplate)
Factory Default:
0
0
This parameter is used for sensorless control, minimum
Accel/Decel, optimum Accel/Decel and speed search. For
better control performance, this value must be set as exact
as possible.
FU2
33
►
Rated-Curr
3.6 A
3.6
33
Factory Default:
3.6 A
3.6
(This value is set according to the motor capacity set in FU2-30)
Set ‘0’ for loads that has load inertia less than 10 times
that of motor inertia.
This is very importance parameter that must be set
correctly. This value is referenced in many other inverter
parameters. (See motor nameplate)
Set ‘1’ for loads that have load inertia about 10 times that
of motor inertia.
FU2
34
►
Noload-Curr
1.8 A
34
1.8
FU2-38: Carrier Frequency
Factory Default:
1.8 A
1.8
(This value is set according to the motor capacity set in FU2-30)
FU2
38
►
Carrier freq
5 kHz
38
5
This parameter is only displayed when ‘Slip Compen’ is
selected in FU2-40 [Control Method].
Factory Default:
5 kHz
5
This function is used to maintain constant motor speed. To
keep the motor speed constant, the output frequency
varies within the limit of slip frequency set in FU2-32
according to the load current. For example, when the
motor speed decreases below the reference speed
(frequency) due to a heavy load, the inverter increases the
Factory
setting
Code LCD Display
Description
Setting range
1 ~ 15 [kHz]
FU2-
Carrier
Frequency
Carrier freq
38
5 [kHz]
6-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
This parameter affects the audible sound of the motor,
noise emission from the inverter, inverter termperature,
and leakage current. If the ambient temperature where the
inverter is installed is high or other equipment may be
affected by potential inverter noise, set this value lower. If
set above 10kHz, use it by reducing 5%[1kHz] of the rated
current. Setting Carrier freqeuncy set below 2.5[kHz] when
the FU2-39 [Control mode selection] is set to Vector_SPD,
Vector_TRQ could weaken the control performance.
according to the load current. For example, when the
motor speed decreases below the reference speed
(frequency) due to a heavy load, the inverter increases the
output frequency higher than the reference frequency to
increase the motor speed. The inverter increases or
decreases the output by delta frequency shown below.
Delta freq = Rated slip * (Output current - Motor No
load current) / rated current - Motor No load current)
Output freq = Reference freq + Delta freq
☞ : Motor parameters must be set correctly for better
performance of control.
FU2-39: Control mode selection
FU2-32~36 [Motor related parameters] is automatically
determined by FU2-30 [Rated Motor selection]. Most
suitable motor capacity corresponding inverter capacity is
set as factory setting, but the following setting value can be
adjusted if necessary.
FU2
39
►
Control mode
V/F
39
0
Factory Default:
V/F
0
ꢂ
Selects the control mode of the inverter
Related parameter :FU2-30~37 [Motor related parameters]
FU2-40 setting
LCD Display
V/F
Slip compen
Description
V/F Control
Code
LCD Display
Motor select
Rated-Slip
Rated-Curr
Noload-Curr
Efficiency
Description
Select motor capacity
Motor rated slip (Hz)
Motor rated current (rms)
Motor no load current (rms)
Motor efficiency (%)
Motor inertia rate
0
1
FU2-30
FU2-32
FU2-33
FU2-34
FU2-36
FU2-37
Slip compensation
Sensorless vector
control speed operation
Sensorless vector
control torque operation
Vector control speed
operation
2
3
4
5
Sensorless_S
Sensorless_T
Vector_SPD
Vector_TRQ
Inertia rate
ꢂ
Sensorless_S (Sensorless vector speed control)
operation :
Vector control torque
operation
Use it when 1) high starting torque needed at low speed 2)
load fluctuation is high 3) rapid response needed.
Note) Setting Vector_SPD, Vector_TRQ is only valid when
the inverter is equipped with SUB-B board and EXT-12[F
mode] is set to Feed-back. Vector control comprises of
Vector_SPD, Vector_TRQ with secsorless vector
Sensorless_S and Sensorless_T.
If not using CMC 220V/440V Class motor: Set Yes in FU2-
40 [Auto tuning] first.
Vector_SPD (Vector control speed) operaation : only valid
when Sub-B board is mounted (Speed-detecting Encoder
installed to the motor).
ꢂ
V/F control:
This parameter controls the voltage/frequency ratio
constant. It is recommended to use the torque boost
function when a greater starting torque is required.
Related function : FU1-26~28 [Torque boost]
Related parameters : FU2-30~37 [Motor related parameters]
FU2-41~44 [Motor constant]
FU2-45~46 [P/I gain for Sensorless]
EXT-25~26 [P/I gain for Vector_SPD],
EXT-27~28 [Torque limit for
Vector_SPD]
ꢂ
Slip compensation :
This function is used to maintain constant motor speed. To
keep the motor speed constant, the output frequency
varies within the limit of slip frequency set in FU2-32
6-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
Conditions for Sensorless Vector Control
Conditions for sensorless control are as follows. If one of
the following conditions is not satisfied, the inverter may
ꢁ
Over current fault can occur if the FU2-41 [Stator
Resistance (Rs)] is set to a value more than twice the
auto tuned value
malfunction with insufficient torque, irregular rotation, or ꢁ Max setting range is 300 Hz.
excessive motor noise. It is recommended to use V/F
control.
ꢁ
Use a motor capacity that is equal to or one
Detail Tuning Method for Sensorless Vector Control
horsepower level lower than the inverter capacity. ꢁ Adjust the FU2–34 [No Load Motor Current (RMS)] value
ꢁ
Two different motor parameters can be set for one
inverter, but use only one motor parameter for
sensorless control.
If the motor in use is not CMC 220V/440V Class motor or
using 220V/380V dual use motor, utilize the auto
tuning feature in FU2-40 [Auto tuning] before starting.
Set appropriate values for the electronic thermal
function, the overload limit function and the stall
prevention. The set values should not exceed 150%
of the rated motor current.
larger or smaller by 5% units if the current is larger or
smaller than that of V/F control with small load.
Adjust the FU2–32 [Rated Motor Slip] value larger or
smaller by 5% units if the speed is faster or slower
than that of V/F control with small load.
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢂ
ꢂ
Sensorless_T(Sensorless Vector Torque) Operation:
Vector_TRQ(Vector control torque) Operation:
All settings are the same as Vector_SPD except
using torque reference for torque control.
ꢁ
When DRV–04 [Frequency Mode] is set to “V1”, “I”, or
“V1+I”, eliminate any potential noise influence with
the frequency reference.
ꢁ
ꢁ
Pole number of the motor should be 2 pole, 4 pole, or
6 pole.
The distance between the inverter and the motor
should not exceed 100m (328 ft).
Precautions When Using Sensorless Control
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
Forced-cooling should be used for the motor when
the average operating speed is under 20Hz and more
than 100% load is used constantly.
The motor may rotate 0.5% faster than the maximum
speed if the motor temperature does not reach
normal operating temperature.
The performance can be improved during
regeneration for systems with frequent acceleration
and deceleration operations by installing the DB
(Dynamic Brake) braking unit option.
ꢁ
ꢁ
Utilize the auto-tuning feature when the motor
reaches normal temperature (average temperature
where the motor normally operates).
Output torque may be reduced when an output filter
option is used between the inverter and the motor.
Speed change is more frequent than the V/F control.
If the speed changes excessively when the FU2–38
[Carrier Frequency Selection] is set to a value more
than 10kHz, change the setting to 5~10kHz.
ꢁ
ꢁ
6-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
[Motor rotation mode when set to All, Enc Test, Tr]
1. With PG Option installed: if FU2-40 is set to All, Stator
resistance (Rs), Leakage inductance (Lsigma),
Stator inductance (Ls), No-load current (Noload-
Curr), Speed Encoder status and Rotor constants
(Tr) are calculated.
FU2-40 ~ 44 [ Auto tuning ]
FU2► Auto tuning
40 --- NO ---
40
0
2. Without PG Option installed: if FU2-40 is set to All,
Stator resistance (Rs), Leakage inductance
(Lsigma), Stator inductance (Ls) and No-load
current (Noload-Curr) are calculated.
3. if FU2-40 is set to Rs + Lsigma, Stator resistance
(Rs), Leakage inductance (Lsigma) are calculated.
4. Either PG Status or Rotor constant (Tr) can be
checked with PG option card installed.
Factory Default:
NO
0
FU2►
Rs *
41
0.171
3.34
41
0.171 ohm
Factory Default:
0.171 ohm
0.171
3.34
FU2►
Lsigma *
42
43
42
3.34 mH
[Motor non-rotation mode when set to Rs + Lsigma]
1. Stator resistance (Rs), Leakage inductance
(Lsigma) can be calculated by setting FU2-40 to
Rs + Lsigma.
Factory Default:
3.34 mH
FU2►
Ls *
2. User should set Stator resistance (Rs), No-load
current (Noload-Curr) and Rotor constants (Tr).
3. To automatically calculate the Stator inductance
(Ls), No-load current (Noload-Curr) and Rotor
constants (Tr), set the motor rotation mode and
FU2-40 to All.
29.03
43
29.03 mH
Factory Default:
29.03 mH
29.03
FU2►
Tr *
44
260
44
260 ms
[With PG option card installed]
Factory Default:
260 ms
260
1. Set EXT-12 to Feed-back.
2. Set EXT-15 to (A + B).
Note) * These values are automatically entered according to the
FU2-30 [Rated motor selection]. The above values are displayed
when FU2-30 is set to 5 (7.5 kW).
3. if FU2-40 is set to All, Stator resistance (Rs),
Leakage inductance (Lsigma), Stator inductance
(Ls), No-load current (Noload-Curr), and Rotor
constants (Tr) are calculated.
4. Stator resistance (Rs), Leakage inductance
(Lsigma) can be calculated by setting FU2-40 to
Rs + Lsigma.
5. User should set the Stator inductance (Ls), No-
load current (Noload-Curr) and Rotor constants
(Tr) if FU2-40 is set to Rs + Lsigma.
ꢂ
The auto tuning function automatically measures the
motor parameters needed for control selected in FU2-
39[Control mode selection] such as stator resistance,
rotor resistance, leakage inductance, no-load current
and Encoder feedback frequency. The motor does
not rotate during auto tuning so there is no need to
separate the motor from the system.
[Without PG option card installed]
ꢂ
ꢂ
Encoder operating status can be checked.
1. if FU2-40 is set to All, Stator resistance (Rs),
Leakage inductance (Lsigma), Stator inductance
(Ls), No-load current (Noload-Curr) are
calculated.
2. If FU2-40 is set to Rs + Lsigma, Stator resistance
(Rs), Leakage inductance (Lsigma) is calculated.
3. User should set the Stator inductance (Ls), No-
load current (Noload-Curr).
The rated current, voltage, efficiency and slip
described in the motor nameplate should be entered
before performing auto tuning. If efficiency is not
indicated on the nameplate, use the preset value.
All or selected parameters can be tuned in Auto-
tuning mode.
ꢂ
6-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
T5
Displayed during Rotor filter
time constant (Tr) auto-
tuning
FU2-40
0
LCD display
No
Description
Auto-tuning disabled
Auto-tuning all
Tr Tuning
1
All
[Keypad error display after Encoder test]
parameters
Display
Stator resistance (Rs) and
Leakage inductance
(Lsigma) Auto-tuning
PG status check
Rotor constant(Tr)
calculation
Code
Description
2
Rs + Lsigma
LED
7-Segment
T6
Displayed when incorrect
Encoder wiring error occurs
Displayed when Encoder
wiring is connected reversly.
Enc Err
3
4
Enc Test
Tr
FU2-
40
T7
Enc Rev
➨ Note 1 : Ls and Noload-Curr are only valid during Motor
Rotation mode.
[Motor parameter display corresponding to inverter
capacity]
➨ Note 2 : The motor constants values change with temperature
change, so auto tuning is to be conducted after the
temperature of the motor is stabilized.
➨ Note 3 : The auto-tuning result could be different unless CMC
motor is used.
inverter
capacity
0.8[kW] ~
5.5[kW]
7.5[kW] ~
55[kW]
0.8[kW] ~
1.5[kW]
2.2[kW] ~
15[kW]
Motor parameter
Class
Rs
X.XXX
ohm
Lsigma
X.XX
mH
Ls
X.XX
mH
Tr
XXX
ms
XXX
ms
XXX
ms
XXX
ms
200V
X.X
X.XXX
mH
X.XX
mH
➨ Note 4 : The actual motor parameters (Rs, Rr, Lsigma, Tr)
can be used or set by user.
mohm
X.XX
ohm
X.XXX
ohm
X.X mH X. mH
Code LCD display
Name
No Load
Motor
Current
(RMS)
Description
X.XX
X.X mH
mH
X.XXX
X.XX
mH
400V
Setting and display the No
Load Motor Current
(RMS)
FU2-
18.5[kW] ~
75[kW]
X.X
mohm
XXX
ms
Noload-Curr
34
➨ Note : For 7-segment Keypad, parameter unit is not
FU2-
displayed.
Auto tuning Auto Tuning Auto-tuning enable
40
FU2-
41
FU2-
42
Stator
Setting and display the
Rs
Lsigma
Ls
resistance Stator resistance Rs
Leakage Setting and display the
inductance Lsigma
Related Functions: FU2-30~37 [Motor related parameters]
FU2-39 [Control mode selection]
EXT-01 [Sub Board Type Display]
EXT-14 [Encoder Feedback Frequency]
EXT-15 [Pulse Input Signal Selection]
FU2-
43
Stator
Setting and display the
inductance Stator inductance Ls
FU2-
44
Rotor
constant
Setting and display the
Rotor constant Tr.
Tr
[Keypad display during Auto-tuning of motor parameters]
FU2-45: P Gain for Sensorless Control
FU2-46: I Gain for Sensorless Control
Display
Code
Description
LED
7-Segment
T1
FU2
45
►
SL P-gain
32767
FU2-
40
Displayed during Stator
resistance (Rs) Auto-tuning
Displayed during Leakage
inductance (Lsigma) auto-
tuning.
45
3276
Rs Tuning
T2
T3
T4
Factory Default:
32767
3276
Lsigma
Tuning
SL P-gain is the proportional gain of speed controller. If
this value is set high, you can get fast speed response
characteristic. However, if this value is set too high, the
steady state characteristics may become unstable.
Displayed during Stator
inductance (Ls) and No-load
current auto-tuning.
Displayed during Encoder
auto-tuning.
Ls Tuning
ENC Test
6-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
Related Functions: DRV-04 [Frequency Mode]
I/O-01 to I/O-10 [Analog Signal Setting]
FU2
46
►
SL I-gain
3276
46
3276
I/O-12 to I/O-14 [Multi-Function Input]
EXT-15 to EXT-21 [Pulse Input Setting]
FU2-50 to FU2-54 [PID Feedback]
Factory Default:
3276
3276
SL I-gain is the integral gain of speed controller. If this
value is set low, you can get better transient response
characteristic and steady state characteristic. However, if
this value is set too low, there may be an overshoot in
speed control.
FU2-48: PID Reference Frequency Selection
FU2-49: PID Reference Mode Selection
FU2-50: PID Output Direction Selection
FU2
►
PID Ref
☞ Note: The response time of a system is affected by the load
inertia. For better control performance, set the FU2-37
[Load Inertia] correctly.
48
0
48 Ramp freq.
Factory Default:
No
0
Related Functions: FU2-30 ~ FU2-37 [Motor Parameters]
This code selects reference frequency for PID control.
FU2-40 [Control Method]
[Ramp Freq]: PID control references frequency with Accel
and Decel pattern and time.
FU2-47: PID Operation Selection
[Target Freq]: PID control references frequency without
Accel and Decel pattern and time.
FU2►Proc PI mode
47 --- No ---
47
0
FU2►PID Ref Mode
49 Freq mode
Factory Default:
No
0
49
0
This code selects the PID control.
Factory Default:
Freq mode
0
For HVAC or Pump applications, the PID control can be
used to adjust the actual output by comparing a feedback
with a ‘Set-point’ given to the inverter. This ‘Set-point’ can
be in the form of Speed, Temperature, Pressure, Flow
level, etc. The ‘Set-point’ and the feedback signals are
provided externally to the inverter analog input terminals
V1, V2 or I. The inverter compares the signals in
calculating ‘total-error’ which is reflected in the inverter
output.
This code selects reference input for PID control.
[Freq Mode]: PID control references signal set in DRV-04.
When selected other than ‘Freq mode’, PID control
references the selected signal regardless the selection in
DRV-04.
FU2
►
PID Out Dir
50
0
50 Ramp Freq.
Please see FU2-50 to FU2-54 for more detail.
Factory Default:
Ramp Freq.
0
☞ Note: PID control can be bypassed to manual operation
temporarily by defining one of the multifunction input
terminals (P1~P3) to “Open-loop”. The inverter will change
to manual operation from PID control when this terminal is
ON, and change back to PID control when this terminal is
OFF.
This code selects the direction of output value of PID
controller. The output value is added to reference
frequency.
6-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
FU2-51: PID Feedback Signal Selection
FU2-52: P Gain for PID Control
FU2-53: I Gain for PID Control
This is the frequency at which the output frequency is
limited over during PID control.
FU2-54: D Gain for PID Control
FU2-55: High Limit Frequency for PID Control
FU2-56: Low Limit Frequency for PID Control
FU2-57: PID Output Inversion
FU2-58: PID Output Scale
FU2-59: PID P2 Gain
FU2►
PID F/B
I
51
0
51
FU2-60: P Gain Scale
Factory Default:
I
0
FU2►PID Out Inv.
57
0
57 --- No ---
Select the feedback signal for PID control. This can be set
one of ‘I’, ‘V1’, ‘V2’ according to the signal (current or
voltage) and the terminal (V1 or V2).
Factory Default:
No
0
This code is used to inverter PID controller output.
FU2
52
►
PID P-gain
300.0 %
52
300.0
FU2►PID OutScale
58
100.0
58
100.0 %
Factory Default:
300.0 %
300.0
Factory Default:
100.0 %
100.0
Set the proportional gain for PID control. When P-Gain is
set at 100% and I-Gain at 0.0 second, it means the PID
controller output is 100% for 100% error value.
This code sets the scale of PID controller output.
FU2► PID P2-gain
59
100.0
FU2►
PID I-time
30.0 sec
59
100.0 %
53
30.0
53
Factory Default:
100.0 %
100.0
Factory Default:
30.0 sec
30.0
This code sets the second P-Gain for PID control. The
second P-Gain is can be selected for PID controller by
setting a multi-function input (I/O-12 ~ I/O14 or EXT-02 ~
EXT-04) to ‘Open-loop’.
Set the integral gain for PID control. This is the time the
PID controller takes to output 100% for 100% error value.
FU2
54
►
PID D-time
0.0 ms
54
0.0
FU2►P-gain Scale
60
100.0
60
100.0 %
Factory Default:
0.0 ms
0.0
Factory Default:
100.0 %
100.0
Set the differential gain for PID control.
This code sets the scale of P-Gain and P2-Gain. (FU2-52,
FU2-59)
FU2
55
►
PID +limit
60.00 Hz
55
60.00
☞ PID output value can be set to ‘0’ by setting a multi-
function input terminal (P1 ~ P6) to ‘Open loop’ in I/O-
12 ~ I/O-14 or EXT-02 ~ EXT-04.
Factory Default:
60.00 Hz
60.00
This is the frequency at which the output frequency is
limited under during PID control.
☞ The accumulated value by I-Gain can be set to ‘0’ by
setting a multi-function input terminal (P1 ~ P6) to
‘iTerm Clear’ in I/O-12 ~ I/O-14 or EXT-02 ~ EXT-04.
FU2
56
►
PID -limit
60.00 Hz
56
60.00
Factory Default:
60.00 Hz
60.00
6-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
[P Control] This is to compensate the error of a system
proportionally. This is used to make the controller
response fast for an error. When P control is used alone,
the system is easily affected by an external disturbance
during steady state.
[I Control] This is to compensate the error of a system
integrally. This is used to compensate the steady state
error by accumulating them. Using this control alone
makes the system unstable.
[PI control] This control is stable in many systems. If “D
control” is added, it becomes the 3rd order system. In some
systems this may lead to system instability.
[D Control] Since the D control uses the variation ratio of
error, it has the merit of controlling the error before the
error is too large. The D control requires a large control
quantity at start, but has the tendency of increasing the
stability of the system. This control does not affect the
steady state error directly, but increases the system gain
because it has an attenuation effect on the system. As a
result, the differential control component has an effect on
decreasing the steady state error. Since the D control
operates on the error signal, it cannot be used alone.
Always use it with the P control or PI control.
Related Functions: DRV-04 [Frequency Mode]
FU2-40 [Control Method]
I/O-01 ~ I/O-10 [Analog Signal Scaling]
EXT-15 ~ EXT-21 [Pulse Input Signals]
6-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
Process PID Control
Multi-Function Input
(P1~P6:Open-Loop)
I/O-12~14
FU2-47
EXT-2~4
Target Frequency
DRV-14
PID Selection
DRV-14
V/F,Sensorless,
Output
Frequency
Slip compen,drv.disPI
wOutFreq
wRampFreq
wTarFreq
Freq
Accel/Decel
Main Routine
I/O- 12~14
EXT- 2~4
Multi-Function Input
(P1~P6)
PID Ref Mode
FU2-49
Software Timer
FU2-48
PID Ref
I/O- 12~14
EXT- 2~4
Multi-Function Input
(P1~P6)
PID Positive Limit
'P Gain2'
'iTerm Clear'
PID Output
Inversion
FU2-55
PID Ref Display
DRV-15
FU2-57
0
Freq Mode
0
Keypad-1
Keypad-2
Gain
Limit
KI
-1
V1
I
'Open-loop'
KP
KP
2
V2
K
FU2-50
FU2-58
PID Output
Dirction
PID F/B
Selection
FU2-56
FU2-51
PID Output Scale
KD
PID F/B Display
DRV-15
PID Negative Limit
I
V1
V2
FU2-60
PID P Gain Scale
FU2-52
FU2-53
PID P Gain
PID I Gain
FU2-54
FU2-59
PID D Gain
PID P2 Gain
[PID Control Block Diagram]
6-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
FU2-69: Accel/Decel Change Frequency
The Accel/Decel time is the time that
takes to reach a target frequency
from a frequency (currently operating
frequency).
Delta freq
1
FU2
69
►
Acc/Dec ch F
0.00 Hz
69
0
Related Functions: DRV-01, DRV-02 [Accel/Decel Time]
FU2-71 [Accel/Decel Time Scale]
Factory Default:
0.00 Hz
0
I/O-25 ~ I/O-38 [1st ~ 7th Accel/Decel Time]
This function is used to change Accel/Decel ramp at a
certain frequency. This is useful in textile machine
application.
FU2-71: Accel/Decel Time Scale
☞ Note: If the multi-function input terminal (I/O-12 ~ I/O-14) is
set to ‘XCEL-L’, XCEL-M’, or XCEL-H’, The Multi-
FU2
71
►
Time scale
0.1 sec
71
0.1
Accel/Decel Time (I/O-25 ~ I/O-38) has the priority.
Factory Default:
0.1 sec
0.1
This is used to change the time scale.
Max. Frequency
Accel/Decel
Change
Frequency
Output Frequency
Related Functions: DRV-01, DRV-02 [Accel/Decel Time]
FU2-70 [Reference Freq. for Accel/Decel]
I/O-25 ~ I/O-38 [1st ~ 7th Accel/Decel Time]
Setting Range
Description
LCD
7-Seg
DRV-01 [AccTime]
DRV-02 [DecTime]
I/O-26 [Dec Time1]
The Accel/Decel time is changed by 0.01
second. The maximum setting range is
600 seconds.
0.01 sec
0
I/O-25 [Acc Time1]
The Accel/Decel time is changed by 0.1
second. The maximum setting range is
6000 seconds.
The Accel/Decel time is changed by 1
second. The maximum setting range is
60000 seconds.
0.1 sec
1 sec
1
2
FX
[Accel/Decel Change Operation]
FU2-70: Reference Frequency for Accel/Decel
FU2-72: Power On Display
FU2
70
►
Acc/Dec freq
Max freq
70
0
FU2
72
►
PowerOn disp
0
72
0
Factory Default:
Max freq
0
Factory Default:
0
0
This is the reference frequency for acceleration and
deceleration. If a decided Accel/Decel time from a
frequency to a target frequency is required, set this value
to ‘Delta freq’.
This code selects the parameter to be displayed first on
keypad (DRV-00) when the power is turned on.
Setting
Description
Range
Setting Range
Description
0
1
2
3
DRV-00 [Command Frequency]
DRV-01 [Acceleration Time]
DRV-02 [Deceleration Time]
DRV-03 [Drive Mode]
LCD
7-Seg
The Accel/Decel time is the time that
takes to reach the maximum
frequency from 0 Hz.
Max freq
0
6-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
4
5
DRV-04 [Frequency Mode]
DRV-05 [Step Frequency 1]
DRV-06 [Step Frequency 2]
DRV-07 [Step Frequency 3]
DRV-08 [Output Current]
FU2-75: DB (Dynamic Braking) Resistor Mode
Selection
6
FU2►
DB mode
7
75
1
75 Int. DB-R
8
9
DRV-09 [Motor Speed]
Factory Default:
Int. DB-R
1
10
11
12
DRV-10 [DC link Voltage
This code is used to protect the DB resistor from over
heating.
DRV-11 [User Display selected in FU2-73]
DRV-12 [Fault Display]
Setting Range
Description
LCD
7-Seg
FU2-73: User display selection
This is selected when there is no resistor
connected. At this time, inverter does not
generate DB turn on signal.
None
0
Related parameter : DRV-11 [User display selection]
This is selected when using the internal
DB resistor. This must be selected for
1~5 HP inverters because they have
internal DB resistor as a default.
Enable Duty (%): 2 ~ 3 %
Continuous Turn On Time: 5 seconds
This is selected when using an external
DB resistor. This must be selected for
7.5~10 HP inverters. This must be
selected for 1~5 HP inverters in case of
using an external DB resistor.
ꢂ
Select the display as shown below in FU2-73 [User
display selection].
Int. DB-R
Ext. DB-R
1
2
Setting FU2-73
Name
Output
voltage
Output
power
Description
Display output voltage of the
inverter (Factory setting)
Display output power of the
inverter
Voltag
e
0
1
Watt
Note) The display of “Watt” is approximate value.
Enable Duty (%): 0 ~ 30 %
Continuous Turn On Time: 15 seconds
FU2-74: Gain for Motor Speed Display
☞ The inverter turns the DB turn on signal OFF when the
Continuous Turn On Time expires during dynamic braking,
and an over voltage fault can occur. When this happens,
increase the deceleration time or install an external high-
duty DB resistor.
FU2
74
►
RPM factor
100 %
74
100
Factory Default:
100 %
100
This code is used to change the motor speed display to
rotating speed (r/min) or mechanical speed (m/min). The
display is calculated by following equation.
☞ Install an exterior high-duty DB resistor when the load
accelerates and decelerates frequently. Set the FU2-75 [DB
Resistor Mode selection] to ‘Ext. DB-R’, and set the FU2-76
[Duty of DB Resistor].
Rotating speed = 120 x F / P, where F=Output frequency,
P= motor pole number
☞ This does not apply to 15~30 HP inverters. They need the
Optional DB unit to use DB resistor.
Mechanical speed = Rotating speed x Motor RPM Display
Gain
FU2-76: Duty of DB (Dynamic Braking) Resistor
Related Functions: DRV-00 [Output Frequency]
DRV-09 [Motor Speed]
FU2
76
►
DB %ED
10 %
76
10
FU2-31 [Number of Motor Pole]
Factory Default:
10 %
10
This must be set when using an external DB resistor. The
6-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
duty is calculated by ‘%ED=Decel time * 100 / (Accel time
+ Steady speed time + Decel time + Stop status time)’.
☞ Exchange the motor connection from the 1st motor to the 2nd
motor or the opposite when the motor is stopped. Over
voltage or over current fault can occur when the motor
connection is exchanged during operation.
FU2-79: Software Version
☞ The ‘User V/F’ function of FU1-29 [V/F Pattern] is used for
both the 1st motor and the 2nd motor.
FU2
79
►
S/W Version
Ver 2.0
79
2.0
FU2-91: Parameter Read
FU2-92: Parameter Write
Factory Default:
Ver. 2.0
2.0
Displays the software version.
FU2►
Para. read
91 --- No ---
FU2-81 ~ FU2-90: 2nd Motor Related Functions
Factory Default:
No
These functions are displayed only when one of the
multifunction inputs is set at ‘2nd func’ in I/O-12 to I/O-14.
When using two motors with an inverter by exchanging
them, different values can be set for the 2nd motor by using
the multifunction input terminal.
FU2
►
Para. write
92 --- No ---
Factory Default:
No
Following table is the 2nd functions corresponding to the 1st
functions.
This is useful for programming multiple inverters to have
same parameter settings. The LCD keypad can read
(upload) the parameter settings from the inverter memory
and can write (download) them to other inverters. This
function is only available with LCD keypad.
2nd Functions
FU2-81
1st Functions
DRV-01
Description
Acceleration time
[2nd Acc time]
[Acc. time]
FU2-82
[2nd Dec time]
FU2-83
DRV-02
[Dec. time]
FU1-21
Deceleration time
Base Frequency
FU2►
Para. read
[2nd BaseFreq]
[Base freq]
91 --- Yes ---
FU2-84
[2nd V/F]
FU2-85
FU1-29
[V/F Pattern]
FU1-27
Volts/Hz mode
Parameter Upload
Forward torque boost
Reverse torque boost
Stall prevention level
ETH level for 1 minute
ETH level for continuous
Motor rated current
[2nd F-boost]
FU2-86
[2nd R-boost]
FU2-87
[2nd Stall]
FU2-88
[2nd ETH 1min]
FU2-88
[2nd ETH cont]
FU2-90
[Fwd Boost]
FU1-28
[Rev Boost]
FU1-60
[Stall Level]
FU1-51
[ETH 1min]
FU1-52
[ETH cont]
FU2-33
Parameter Download
[2nd R-Curr]
[Rated-Curr]
FU2►
Para. write
92 --- Yes ---
☞ The 1st functions are applied if the multifunction terminal is
not defined to ‘2nd Func’ or if it is not ON. The 2nd function
parameters are applied when the multifunction input
terminal set to ‘2nd Func’ is ON. Parameters not listed on
the table above are applied to the 2nd motor as to the 1st
motor.
6-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
This function is used to lock the parameters from being
changed. When the parameters are locked, the display
arrow changes from solid to dashed line.
FU2-93: Parameter Initialize
FU2►
Para. init
93
0
93 --- No ---
The lock and unlock code is ‘12’.
Factory Default:
No
0
FU2-99: Return Code (7-Segment Keypad)
This is used to initialize parameters back to the factory
default values. Each parameter group can be initialized
separately.
99
0
Setting Range
Description
Factory Default:
0
LCD
7-Seg
Displayed after initializing
parameters.
All parameter groups are initialized to
factory default value.
This code is used to exit a group when using a 7-segment
keypad. After pressing PROG/ENT key, set the value to ‘1’
and press the PROG/ENT key again to exit.
No
0
All Groups
1
DRV
FU1
FU2
I/O
2
3
4
5
6
Only Drive group is initialized.
Only Function 1 group is initialized.
Only Function 2 group is initialized.
Only Input/Output group is initialized.
Only External group is initialized.
Only Communication group is
initialized.
Related Functions: FU1-99 [Return Code]
I/O-99 [Return Code]
EXT-99 [Return Code]
COM-99 [Return Code]
EXT
COM
APP
7
8
Only Application group is initialized.
☞ Note: FU1-30 ~ FU1-37 [Motor Parameters] must be set
first after initializing parameters.
FU2-94: Parameter Write Protection
FU2
94
►
Para. lock
94
0
0
Factory Default:
0
0
6-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [FU2]
Notes:
6-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter description [I/O]
6.4 Input/Output Group [I/O]
I/O-00: Jump to Desired Code #
I/O► V1 volt x2
04
10.00
04
0.00 V
Factory Default:
10.00 V
10.00
I/O►
Jump code
00
1
This is the maximum voltage of the V1 input at which
inverter outputs maximum frequency.
Factory Default:
1
I/O► V1 volt y2
Jumping directly to any parameter code can be
accomplished by entering the desired code number. This
code is available only with LCD keypad.
05
60.00
05
60.00 Hz
Factory Default:
60.00 Hz
60.00
This is the inverter output maximum frequency when there
is the maximum voltage (I/O-03) on the V1 terminal.
I/O-01 ~ I/O-05: Analog Voltage Input (V1) Signal
Adjustment
Reference Frequency
I/O-05
This is used to adjust the analog voltage input signal when
the frequency is referenced by the control terminal ‘V1’.
This function is applied when DRV-04 is set to ‘V1’ or
‘V1+I’. Reference frequency versus Analog voltage input
curve can be made by four parameters of I/O-02 ~ I/O-04.
I/O-03
I/O► V1 filter
01
10
Analog Voltage
Input (V1)
01
10 ms
I/O-02
I/O-04
Factory Default:
10 ms
10
[Reference Frequency vs. Analog Voltage Input, V1 (0 to 10V)]
This is the filtering time constant for V1 signal input.
Increase this value if the V1 signal is affected by noise
causing unstable operation of the inverter. Increasing this
value makes response time slower.
Related Functions: DRV-04 [Frequency Mode]
FU1-20 [Maximum Frequency]
I/O► V1 volt x1
02
0.00
02
0.00 V
I/O-06 ~ I/O-10: Analog Current Input (I) Signal
Adjustment
Factory Default:
0.00 V
0.00
This is the minimum voltage of the V1 input at which
inverter outputs minimum frequency.
This is used to adjust the analog current input signal when
the terminal ‘I’ references the frequency. This function is
applied when DRV-04 is set to ‘V1’ or V1+I’. Reference
frequency versus Analog current input curve can be made
by four parameters of I/O-07 ~ I/O-10.
I/O► V1 volt y1
03
0.00
03
0.00 Hz
Factory Default:
0.00 Hz
0.00
I/O► I filter
This is the inverter output minimum frequency when there
is the minimum voltage (I/O-02) on the V1 terminal.
06
10
06
10 ms
Factory Default:
10 ms
10
6-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
Related Functions: DRV-04 [Frequency Mode]
This is the filtering time constant for ‘I’ signal input. If the ‘I’
signal is affected by noise causing unstable operation of
the inverter, increase this value. Increasing this value
makes response time slower.
FU1-20 [Maximum Frequency]
I/O-11: Criteria for Analog Input Signal Loss
I/O► I curr x1
07
4.00
07
4.00 mA
I/O► Wire broken
11
0
11
None
Factory Default:
4.00 mA
4.00
Factory Default:
None
0
This is the minimum current of the ‘I’ input at which inverter
outputs minimum frequency.
This is to set the criteria for analog input signal loss when
DRV-04 [Frequency Mode] is set to ‘V1’, ‘I’ or ‘V1+I’.
Following table shows the setting value.
I/O► I freq y1
08
0.00
08
0.00 Hz
Setting Range
Description
Factory Default:
0.00 Hz
0.00
LCD
7-Seg
Does not check the analog input
signal.
This is the inverter output minimum frequency when there
is minimum current (I/O-07) on the ‘I’ terminal.
None
0
The inverter determines that the
frequency reference is lost when the
analog input signal is less than half of
the minimum value (I/O-02 or I/O-07).
The inverter determines that the
frequency reference is lost when the
analog input signal is less than the
minimum value (I/O-02 or I/O-07).
half of x1
below x1
1
2
I/O► I curr x2
09
20.00
09
20.00 mA
Factory Default:
20.00 mA
20.00
This is the maximum current of the ‘I’ input at which
inverter outputs maximum frequency.
When the analog input signal is lost, inverter displays the
following table.
I/O► I freq y2
10
60.00
10
60.00 Hz
Setting Range
Description
Factory Default:
60.00 Hz
60.00
LCD
7-Seg
Loss of frequency reference from Option
Board (DPRAM time out)
This is the inverter output maximum frequency when there
is the maximum current (I/O-09) on the ‘I’ terminal.
LOP
LP
Loss of frequency reference from Option
Board (Communication fault)
Loss of analog input signal, V1
Loss of analog input signal, I
Loss of frequency reference from Sub-
Board, V2 or ENC
LOR
LR
Reference Frequency
I/O-10
LOV
LOI
LV
LI
LOX
LX
Related Functions: I/O-48 [Lost command] selects the
operation after determining the loss of frequency reference.
I/O-08
Analog Voltage
Input (V1)
I/O-07
I/O-09
[Reference Frequency vs. Analog Current Input, I (4 to 20mA)]
6-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
Setting Range
Description
The following table shows the selection in I/O-48.
LCD
Speed-L
Speed-M
Speed-H
XCEL-L
XCEL-M
XCEL-H
Dc-brake
2nd Func
Exchange
-Reserved-
Up
7-Seg
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Multi-step speed - Low
Multi-step speed - Mid
Multi-step speed - High
Multi-accel/decel - Low
Multi-accel/decel - Mid
Multi-accel/decel - High
DC injection braking during stop
Exchange to 2nd functions
Exchange to commercial power line
Reserved for future use
Up drive
Setting Range
Description
LCD
7-Seg
Continuous operating after loss of
frequency reference.
None
0
Inverter cuts off its output after
determining loss of frequency reference.
Inverter stops by its Decel pattern and
Decel time after determining loss of
frequency reference.
FreeRun
Stop
1
2
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
I/O-49 [Time out] sets the waiting time before determining
the loss of reference signal. Inverter waits to determine the
loss of a reference signal until times out.
Down
3-Wire
Ext Trip-A
Ext Trip-B
iTerm Clear
Down drive
3 wire operation
External trip A
External trip B
Used for PID control
Exchange between PID mode and
V/F mode
Exchange between Option and
Inverter
Hold the analog input signal
Disable accel and decel
Used for PID control
Sequence operation - Low
Sequence operation - Mid
Sequence operation - High
Exchange between Sequence
operation and Manual operation
Triggering Sequence operation
(Auto-B)
☞ Note: I/O-48 and I/O-49 also apply when DRV-04 is set to
‘Keypad-1’ or ‘Keypad-2’ for determining the loss of
command frequency.
Open-loop
Main-drive
16
17
Related Functions: DRV-04 [Frequency Mode]
I/O-02 [V1 Input Minimum Voltage]
I/O-07 [I Input Minimum Current]
I/O-48 [Lost command]
Analog hold
XCEL stop
P Gain2
SEQ-L
SEQ-M
SEQ-H
18
19
20
21
22
23
I/O-49 [Time out]
Manual
Go step
24
25
I/O-12: Multi-function Input Terminal ‘P1’ Define
I/O-13: Multi-function Input Terminal ‘P2’ Define
I/O-14: Multi-function Input Terminal ‘P3’ Define
Hold step
Trv Off.Lo
Trv Off.Hi
Interlock1
Interlock2
Interlock3
Interlock4
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Hold last step (Auto-A)
Used for Traverse Operation
I/O► P1 dedine
12
0
12
Speed-L
Used for MMC operation
Factory Default:
Speed-L
0
I/O► P2 dedine
13 Speed-M
13
1
[Speed-L, Speed-M, Speed-H]
By setting P1, P2, P3 terminals to ‘Speed-L’, ‘Speed-M’
and ‘Speed-H’ respectively, inverter can operate at the
preset frequency set in DRV-05 ~ DRV-07 and I/O-20 ~
I/O-24.
Factory Default:
Speed-M
1
I/O► P3 dedine
14 Speed-H
14
2
The step frequencies are determined by the combination of
P1, P2 and P3 terminals as shown in the following table.
Factory Default:
Speed-H
2
Multi-function input terminals can be defined for many
different applications. The following table shows the
various definitions for them.
6-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
and ‘XCEL-H’ respectively, up to 8 different Accel and
Decel times can be used. The Accel/Decel time is set in
DRV-01 ~ DRV-02 and I/O-25 ~ I/O-38.
The Accel/Decel time is determined by the combination of
P1, P2 and P3 terminals as shown in the following table.
Step
Parameter Speed-H Speed-M Speed-L
Frequency
Step Freq-0
Step Freq-1
Step Freq-2
Step Freq-3
Step Freq-4
Step Freq-5
Step Freq-6
Step Freq-7
0: OFF, 1: ON
Code
DRV-00
DRV-05
DRV-06
DRV-07
I/O-21
(P3)
0
(P2)
0
(P1)
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
Accel/Decel Parameter XCEL-H XCEL-M XCEL-L
1
0
0
Time
Code
DRV-01
DRV-02
I/O-25
I/O-26
I/O-27
I/O-28
I/O-29
I/O-30
I/O-31
I/O-32
I/O-34
I/O-35
I/O-36
I/O-37
I/O-38
I/O-39
(P3)
(P2)
(P1)
I/O-22
1
0
1
Accel Time-0
Decel Time-0
Accel Time-1
Decel Time-1
Accel Time-2
Decel Time-2
Accel Time-3
Decel Time-3
Accel Time-4
Decel Time-4
Accel Time-5
Decel Time-5
Accel Time-6
Decel Time-6
Accel Time-7
Decel Time-7
0: OFF, 1: ON
I/O-23
1
1
0
0
0
0
I/O-24
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
☞ I/O-20 [Jog Frequency] can be used as one of the step
frequencies.
☞ If the ‘Jog’ terminal is ON, inverter operates to Jog
frequency regardless of other terminal inputs.
Output Frequency
Time
Step Step Step Step Step Step Step Step
Jog
Output Frequency
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Ref.
Freq.
ON
ON
ON
ON
P1-CM
P2-CM
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
ON
ON
ON
P3-CM
Time
ON
JOG-CM
FX-CM
RX-CM
Time 0 Time 1 Time 2 Time 3 Time 4 Time 5 Time 6 Time 7
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
P1-CM
P2-CM
P3-CM
FX-CM
ON
Time
Time
Time
Time
ON
[Multi-Step Frequency Operation]
ON
ON
Related Functions: DRV-05 ~ DRV-07 [Step Frequency]
I/O-20 [Jog Frequency]
I/O-20 ~ I/O-24 [Step Frequency]
[Multi-Accel/Decel Time Operation]
Related Functions: I/O-25 ~ I/O-38 [1st ~7th Accel/Decel Time]
☞ Note: The frequency for ‘Speed 0’ is determined by DRV-04.
[XCEL-L, XCEL-M, XCEL-H]
By setting P1, P2 and P3 terminals to ‘XCEL-L’, ‘XCEL-M’
6-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
[Dc-brake]
Speed Search
Output Frequency
DC Injection Braking can be activated during inverter
stopped by configuring one of the multi-function input
terminals (P1, P2, P3) to ‘Dc-bake’. To activate the DC
Injection Braking, close the contact on the assigned
terminal while the inverter is stopped.
[Exchange]
Time
Time
Time
Time
Exchange is used to bypass the motor from the inverter
line to commercial power or the opposite. To bypass the
motor to commercial line, set the ‘Exchange’ function in
multi-function output terminal and ‘INV line’, ‘COMM line’
function in multi-function output terminal. Speed search
function (FU2-22) is activated automatically during
exchanging operation.
ON
FX-CM
‘Exchange’-CM
ON
ON
AXA-AXC
‘COMM line’
ON
ON
ON
ON
‘INV line’
Time
M1
ON
M1
M2
Time
Time
MCCB
R
S
T
U
V
W
t1
Inverter Commercial
t2
MOTOR
Inverter
Drive
Drive Line Drive
M2
G
t1, t2: 50msec (interlock time)
[Exchanging Sequence]
FM
5G
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
FX
RX
[Up, Down]
‘Exchange’
P1
P2
Factory Setting:
‘Speed-L’
By using the Up and Down function, the drive can
accelerate to a steady speed and decelerate down to a
desired speed by using only two input terminals.
‘Speed-M’
‘Speed-H’
P3
A
C
B
AC220V Line
Common Terminal
CM
M1
M2
M1
Potentiometer
(1 kohm, 1/2W)
Shield
Power supply for
speed signal:
+ 11V, 10mA
AXA
AXB
Output Frequency
VR
V1
I
Speed signal input:
0 ~ 10V
Freq.
Max.
Speed signal input:
4 ~20mA (250ohm)
Common for
VR, V1, I
5G
Speed signal Input2
Time
[Wiring to By-Pass Motor to Commercial line]
P1-CM
ON
‘Up’
Time
Time
Time
P2-CM
ON
‘Down’
ON
FX-CM
[Up/Down Operation]
6-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
[3-Wire]
[iTerm Clear]
This function is for 3-wire start/stop control.
This function is mainly used with a momentary push button
to hold the current frequency output during acceleration or
deceleration.
This function is used for PID control. When this terminal is
ON, the accumulated value by I-Gain is set to ‘0’. Refer to
PID Control Block Diagram.
[Open-loop]
This is used to exchange the control mode of inverter from
PID mode (Close Loop) to V/F mode (Open Loop).
DRV-03 [Drive Mode] and DRV-04 [Frequency Mode] are
applied when the mode has been changed.
☞ Note: This function can be used only when the inverter is
stopped.
FX
RX
P2 CM
[Wiring for 3-Wire Operation, P2 set to ‘3-Wire’]
[Main-drive]
When an option board (like RS485, DeviceNet, F-Net) is
installed and used for the frequency setting and the
run/stop command, the inverter operation can be changed
to manual operation using this function without changing
parameters.
Output Frequency
Freq.
Max.
FU1-02 [Frequency Mode] and FU1-01 [Drive Mode] are
applied when the mode has been changed.
☞ Note: this function can be used only when the inverter is
stopped.
Time
Freq.
max.
[Analog hold]
When there is an analog input signal for frequency
reference and ‘Analog hold’ terminal is ON, inverter fixes
its output frequency regardless of the frequency reference
change. The changed frequency reference is applied when
the terminal is OFF.
ON
P2-CM
FX-CM
RX-CM
Time
Time
Time
ON
ON
This function is useful when a system requires constant
speed after acceleration.
[3-Wire Operation]
Reference Frequency,
Reference Frequency
Output Frequency
Output frequency
[Ext Trip-A]
This is a normally open contact input. When a terminal set
to ‘Ext Trip-A’ is ON, inverter displays the fault and cuts off
its output. This can be used as an external latch trip.
[Ext Trip-B]
This is a normally closed contact input. When a terminal
set to ‘Ext Trip-B’ is OFF, inverter displays the fault and
cuts off its output. This can be used as an external latch
trip.
Time
Time
P1-CM
‘Analog hold’
ON
[Analog hold Operation]
6-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
[XCEL stop]
[Hold step]
Inverter stops accelerating and decelerating when this
terminal is ON.
This is used to hold the last step frequency in Auto-A
operation.
Related Functions: I/O-51 ~ I/O-84 [Sequence Operation]
[P Gain2]
This function is used to change P-Gain during PID
operation. When this terminal is ON, PID controller
changes P-Gain with PID P2-Gian set in FU2-59.
Refer to PID Control Block Diagram.
Output Frequency
Sequence 1
Sequence 3
Sequence 2
SEQ1 / 2F
SEQ2 / 2F
[SEQ-L, SEQ-M, SEQ-H]
These functions are used for Auto drive (I/O-50).
Five different sequences can be selected according to the
combination of these terminals. Eight step frequencies,
Accel/Decel time and steady speed time can be set for
each sequence. The following table shows the sequence
of selection.
SEQ1 / 1F
SEQ3 / 2F
Time
SEQ3 / 1F
P1-CM
‘SEQ-L’
Step
Parameter Speed-H Speed-M Speed-L
ON
Time
Time
Time
Frequency
Sequence 1
Sequence 2
Sequence 3
Sequence 4
Sequence 5
0: OFF, 1: ON
Code
(P3)
0
(P2)
0
(P1)
1
P2-CM
‘SEQ-M’
ON
0
1
0
I/O-50 ~
I/O-84
P3-CM
‘Go step’
1
0
0
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
0
1
1
1
0
1
Minimum 100msec
[‘Go step’ in Auto-B Operation]
☞ Note: The inverter stops after finishing all steps of that
sequence once the Auto (Sequence) operation is started.
To stop the inverter during sequence operation, use ‘BX’
terminal on the control terminal strip.
Output Frequency
Sequence 1
Sequence 2
SEQ2 / 2F
SEQ1 / 2F
Related Functions: I/O-51 ~ I/O-84 [Sequence Operation]
SEQ2 / 1F
SEQ1 / 1F
[Manual]
Time
This is used to exchange the operation mode of inverter
from Auto (Sequence) to manual operation.
DRV-03 [Drive Mode] and DRV-04 [Frequency Mode] are
applied when the mode has been changed.
P1-CM
‘SEQ-L’
ON
Time
Time
Time
P2-CM
‘SEQ-M’
☞ Note: This function can be used only when the inverter is
ON
stopped.
P3-CM
‘Hold step’
ON
[Go step]
This is used to trigger the next step in a sequence of Auto-
B operation.
[‘Hold step’ in Auto-A Operation]
Related Functions: I/O-51 ~ I/O-84 [Sequence Operation]
6-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
[Trv Off.Lo]
I/O► Out status
16
0000
This function is used to make negative offset during
traverse operation.
16
0000
Factory Default:
0000
Related Functions: APP-06 ~ APP-07 [Traverse Offset]
This code displays the output status of control terminals.
[Trv Off.Hi]
[LCD Keypad Display]
This function is used to make positive offset during
traverse operation.
Output
AXA-AXC
Q3
Q2
Q1
Terminals
OFF status
ON status
Bit 3
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Related Functions: APP-06 ~ APP-07 [Traverse Offset]
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
[Interlock1, 2, 3, 4]
This function is used for MMC operation. Refer to MMC
operation.
[7-Segment Keypad Display]
The ‘JOG’ terminal is not displayed on 7-Segment keypad.
Related Functions: APP-29 [Inter-Lock Selection]
ON status
OFF status
AXA-AXC Q3 Q2 Q1
I/O-15: Terminal Input Status
I/O-16: Terminal Output Status
I/O► In status
I/O-17: Filtering Time Constant for Multi-function
Input Terminals
15
0000
15
000000000
Factory Default:
000000000
I/O►Ti Filt Num
17
15
17
15
This code displays the input status of control terminals.
Terminals P4, P5, P6 and Q1, Q2, Q3 are provided on
optional Sub-Board.
Factory Default:
15
15
This is the response time constant for terminal inputs (JOG,
FX, RX, P3, P2, P1, RST, BX). This is useful where there
is a potential for noise. The response time is determined
by ‘Filtering time constant * 0.5msec’.
[LCD Keypad Display]
Input
JOG FX RX P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
Terminals
OFF status
ON status
Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
I/O-20: Jog Frequency
[7-Segment Keypad Display]
I/O► Jog freq
The ‘JOG’ terminal is not displayed on 7-Segment keypad.
20
10.00
20
10.00 Hz
ON status
OFF status
Factory Default:
10.00 Hz
10.00
This code sets the jog frequency. See [Speed-L, Speed-M,
Speed-H] in I/O-12 ~ I/O-14.
FX RX P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1
6-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
I/O-21 ~ I/O-24: Step Frequency 4, 5, 6, 7
I/O-25 ~ I/O-38: 1st ~ 7th Accel/Decel Time
I/O► Step freq-4
I/O► Acc time-1
25 20.0 sec
25
20.00
21
40.00
21
40.00 Hz
Factory Default:
40.00 Hz
40.00
Factory Default:
20.0 sec
20.0
□
□
□
□
□
□
I/O► Step freq-7
24 30.00 Hz
I/O► Dec time-7
38 20.0 sec
24
30.00
38
20
Factory Default:
30.00 Hz
30.00
Factory Default:
20.0 sec
20.0
These codes set the step frequencies. These frequencies
are applied when the multi-function input terminals (P1, P2,
P3) select the step. See [Speed-L, Speed-M, Speed-H] in
I/O-12 ~ I/O-14.
These codes are applied when the multi-function input
terminals (P1, P2, P3) select the Accel/Decel time. See
[XCEL-L, XCEL-M, XCEL-H] in I/O-12 ~ I/O-14.
Related Functions: DRV-01 ~ DRV-02 [Accel/Decel Time]
FU2-70 [Reference Freq. for Accel/Decel]
FU2-71 [Accel/Decel Time Scale]
Related Functions: DRV-05 ~ DRV-07 [Step Frequency 1 ~ 3]
I/O-12 ~ I/O-14 [Multi-function inputs]
I/O-12 ~ I/O-14 [Multi-function inputs]
I/O-17 [Filtering Time Constant]
Output Frequency
I/O-40: FM (Frequency Meter) Output
I/O-41: FM Adjustment
Speed 3
Speed 2
Speed 1
Speed 0
Time
I/O► FM mode
40
0
40
Frequency
Factory Default:
Frequency
0
Speed 4
Speed 5
JOG
I/O► FM Adjust
41
Speed 6
Speed 7
41
100
100 %
Factory Default:
100 %
100
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
P1-CM
P2-CM
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
Time
Frequency meter displays the inverter output Frequency,
Current, Voltage and DC link voltage with pulse signals on
the FM terminal. The average ranges from 0V to 10V. I/O-
41 is used to adjust the FM value.
ON
P3-CM
ON
JOG-CM
FX-CM
RX-CM
[Frequency]
ON
FM terminal outputs inverter output frequency. The output
value is determined by,
FM Output Voltage = (Output freq. / Max. freq.) × 10V ×
IO-41 / 100
ON
[‘JOG’ and ‘Multi-Step’ Operation]
6-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
400V class -> 440V
2. Max DC link voltage : 200V class -> 400V
400V class -> 800V
[Current]
FM terminal outputs inverter output current. The output
value is determined by,
FM Output Voltage = (Output current / Rated current) ×
10V × IO-41 / 150
3. Refer to chapter 2 Specification for inverter rated current.
I/O-42: FDT (Frequency Detection) Level
I/O-43: FDT Bandwidth
[Voltage]
FM terminal outputs inverter output voltage. The output
value is determined by,
FM Output Voltage = (Output voltage / Max. output
voltage) × 10V × IO-41 / 100
I/O► FDT freq
42
30.00
42
30.00 Hz
Factory Default:
30.00 Hz
30.00
[DC link vtg]
FM terminal outputs the DC link voltage of inverter. The
output value is determined by,
FM Output Voltage = (DC link voltage / Max. DC link
voltage) × 10V × IO-41 / 100
I/O► FDT band
43
10.00
43
10.00 Hz
Factory Default:
10.00 Hz
10.00
These functions are used in I/O-44 [Multi-function Auxiliary
Contact Output]. See [FDT-#] in I/O-44.
FM Terminal Output
15Vpeak
Related Functions: I/O-44 [Multi-function Auxiliary Output]
Avg. 0~10V
I/O-44: Multi-function Auxiliary Contact Output
define (AXA-AXC)
Time
500Hz, 2msec (fixed)
I/O► Aux mode
[FM Output (FM-CM terminal)]
44
12
44
Run
[Torque]
Factory Default:
Run
12
FM terminal outputs the torque of inverter. The output
value is determined by
FM Output Voltage = (Torque current / Max.Torque
current) × 10V × IO-41 / 150
The auxiliary contact works (Close) when the defined
condition has occurred.
Setting Range
Description
LCD
7-Seg
FM-5G
Output V
FDT-1
FDT-2
FDT-3
0
1
2
Output frequency arrival detection
Specific frequency level detection
Frequency detection with pulse
Frequency detection with contact
closure
Frequency detection with contact
closure (inverted FDT-4)
Overload detection
I/O-41 * 10 V
10
FDT-4
FDT-5
3
4
OL
IOL
Stall
OV
LV
5
6
7
8
9
Inverter overload detection
Stall prevention mode detection
Over voltage detection
I/O-40
0 %
100
Low voltage detection
OH
10 Overheat detection
Note : 1. Max output voltage : 200V class -> 220V
6-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
Setting Range
LCD
Description
7-Seg
Lost Command
11 Lost command detection
12 Inverter running detection
13 Inverter stop detection
14 Steady speed detection
Run
Stop
Steady
INV line
COMM line
Ssearch
Step pulse
Seq pulse
Ready
Output Frequency
I/O-42
Reference Frequency
15
16
Exchange signal outputs
17 Speed search mode detection
18 Step detection in Auto mode
19 Sequence detection in Auto mode
20 Inverter ready detection
I/O-43 / 2
Time
Trv. ACC
Trv. DEC
MMC
21 Traverse acceleration frequency
22 Traverse deceleration frequency
23 Used for MMC operation
AXA-AXC
CLOSED
Time
0 Rpm detection signal during vector
control
Zspd Dect
24
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘FDT-2’]
Torque detection signal during vector
and sensorless control.
Torq Dect
25
[FDT-3]
[FDT-1]
AXA-AXC is CLOSED when the output frequency reaches
the band centered on the FDT frequency. The output is
OPENED when the output frequency goes outside the FDT
bandwidth centered on the FDT frequency.
When the output frequency reaches the reference
frequency (target frequency), AXA-AXC terminal is
CLOSED.
Output Frequency
Reference Frequency
I/O-43 / 2
Output Frequency
Time
Time
I/O-42
I/O-43 / 2
AXA-AXC
CLOSED
Time
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘FDT-1’]
AXA-AXC
ON
ON
Time
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘FDT-3’]
[FDT-2]
AXA-AXC is CLOSED when the reference frequency is in
I/O-43 [FDT Bandwidth] centered on I/O-42 [FDT
Frequency], and the output frequency reaches I/O-43
centered on I/O-42.
[FDT-4]
AXA-AXC is CLOSED when the output frequency reaches
the FDT frequency. The output is OPENED when the
output frequency goes below the FDT bandwidth centered
on the FDT frequency.
6-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
Related Functions: FU1-54 [Overload Warning Level]
Output Frequency
I/O-42
FU1-55 [Overload Warning Time]
[IOL]
AXA-AXC is CLOSED when the output current is above
the 150% of rated inverter current for 36 seconds. If this
situation is continued for one minute, the inverter will cut
off its output and displays ‘IOL’ (Inverter overload) Trip.
See the nameplate for the rated inverter current.
I/O-43 / 2
Time
AXA-AXC
CLOSED
Time
Output Current
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘FDT-4’]
150% of Rated
Inverter Current
[FDT-5]
Time
This is the inverted output of [FDT-4].
150% of Rated
Inverter Current
Output Frequency
AXA-AXC
ON
Time
I/O-42
I/O-43 / 2
36sec
24sec
Time
Time
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘IOL’]
AXA-AXC
ON
ON
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘FDT-5’]
[Stall]
[OL]
AXA-AXC is CLOSED when the output current has
AXA-AXC is CLOSED when the inverter is on the stall
prevention mode.
reached the FU1-54 [Overload Warning Level] for the FU1-
55 [Overload Warning Time].
Output Current
FU1-60
[Stall Level]
Output Current
Time
FU1-54
[OL level]
FU1-60
[Stall Level]
Time
FU1-54
[OL level]
Output Frequency
AXA-AXC
ON
t1
Time
Time
t1
t1: FU1-55 [Overload Warning Time]
AXA-AXC
CLOSED
Time
[[AXA-AXC configured as ‘OL’]
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘Stall’]
6-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
[Stop]
Related Functions: FU1-59 [Stall Prevention Mode]
AXA-AXC is CLOED when the inverter is stopped.
FU1-60 [Stall Prevention Level]
[OV]
[INV line, COMM line]
AXA-AXC is CLOSED when the DC link voltage is above
the Over-voltage level.
This function is used in conjunction with ‘Exchange’
function of multi-function input for commercial line
exchange. To use both signal of ‘INV line’ and ‘COMM line’,
the optional Sub-A or Sub-C board must be installed.
DC Link Voltage
OV Level (380V DC or 760V DC)
Speed Search
Output Frequency
Time
AXA-AXC
ON
Time
Time
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘OV’]
ON
ON
ON
FX-CM
Time
Time
Time
[LV]
AXA-AXC is CLOSED when the DC link voltage is below
the Low-voltage level.
‘Exchange’-CM
AXA-AXC
‘COMM line’
DC Link Voltage
LV Level (200V DC or 400V DC)
Q1-EXTG
‘INV line’
ON
ON
Time
t1
Inverter Commercial
t2
Inverter
Drive
Drive Line Drive
Time
t1, t2: 50msec (interlock time)
AXA-AXC
ON
Time
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘COMM line’ and ‘Q1’ as INV line’]
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘LV’]
Related Functions: I/O-12 ~ I/O-14 [Multi-function input]
- [Exchange]
[OH]
AXA-AXC is CLOSED when the heat sink of the inverter is
above the reference level.
[Ssearch]
AXA-AXC is CLOSED during the inverter is speed
searching.
[Lost Command]
AXA-AXC is CLOSED when frequency reference is lost.
[Step pulse]
Related Functions: I/O-11 [Criteria for Analog Signal Loss]
I/O-48 [Operating Method at Signal Loss]
When Auto (Sequence) operation is selected in I/O-50,
AXA-AXC outputs pulse signals on every step.
I/O-49 [Waiting Time for Time Out]
Related Functions: I/O-50 ~ I/O-84 [Auto Operation]
[Run]
AXA-AXC is CLOED when the inverter is running.
6-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
[Ready]
Output Frequency
AXA-AXC is CLOED when the inverter is ready to run.
[Trv. ACC]
Sequence 1
Sequence 3
Sequence 2
SEQ1 / 2F
SEQ2 / 2F
CLOSED when output frequency reaches Accel frequency.
[Trv. DEC]
CLOSED when output frequency reaches Decel frequency.
[MMC]
Automatically set to ‘MMC’ when ‘MMC’ is selected in
APP-01.
SEQ1 / 1F
SEQ3 / 2F
Time
[Zspd Dect]
0 Rpm detection signal during vector control
SEQ3 / 1F
[Torq Dect]
P1-CM
‘SEQ-L’
Torque detection signal during vector and sensorless control.
ON
Time
Time
Time
I/O-45: Fault Output Relay (30A, 30B, 30C)
P2-CM
‘SEQ-M’
ON
I/O► Relay mode
P3-CM
‘Go step’
45
010
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
45
010
Factory Default:
010
010
AXA-AXC
‘Step pulse’
Time
This function is used to allow the fault output relay to
operate when a fault occurs. The output relay terminal is
30A, 30B, 30C where 30A-30C is a normally open contact
and 30B-30C is a normally closed contact.
Minimum 100msec
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘Step pulse’]
[Seq pulse]
Bit
Setting Display
Description
When Auto (Sequence) operation is selected in I/O-50,
AXA-AXC outputs pulse signals on the last step.
Fault output relay does not
operate at ‘Low voltage’ trip.
Fault output relay operates at
‘Low voltage’ trip.
0
1
0
000
001
000
Bit 0
(LV)
Output Frequency
2D
(Forward)
Fault output relay does not
operate at any fault.
Seq# / 2F
1D
Bit 1
Fault output relay operates at
any fault except ‘Low voltage’
and ‘BX’ (inverter disable) fault.
Fault output relay does not
operate regardless of the retry
number.
(Forward)
Seq# / 1F
(Trip)
1
0
1
010
000
100
Time
Bit 2
3D
(Retry)
Fault output relay operates when
the retry number set in FU2-26
decreases to 0 by faults.
(Reverse)
Seq# / 3F
1T
1S
2T 2S
3T
3S DRV-02
ON
AXA-AXC
‘Step pulse’
☞ When several faults occurred at the same time, Bit 0 has
Time
the first priority.
Minimum 100msec
[AXA-AXC configured as ‘Step pulse’]
Related Functions: DRV-12 [Fault Display]
FU2-26 [Retry number]
6-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
(Coast to stop)
Stop
I/O-46: Inverter Number
I/O-47: Baud Rate
Inverter stops with Decel time (DRV-
02) and Decel pattern (FU1-26).
2
I/O►
46
Inv No.
46
1
1
I/O► Time out
49
1.0
49
1.0 sec
Factory Default:
1
1
Factory Default:
1.0 sec
1.0
This code sets the inverter number. This number is used in
communication between inverter and communication
board.
This is the time inverter determines whether there is a
frequency reference or not. If there is no frequency
reference satisfying I/O-11 during this time, inverter
determines that it has lost of frequency reference.
I/O► Baud rate
47
9600
47
9600 bps
Related Functions: DRV-04 [Frequency Mode]
Factory Default:
9600
9600
I/O-11 [Criteria for Analog Signal Loss]
This code sets the communication speed. This is used in
communication between inverter and communication
board.
I/O-50: Auto (Sequence) Operation
I/O-51: Sequence Number Selection (Seq #)
I/O-52: The Number of Steps of Sequence #
I/O-48: Operating at Loss of Freq. Reference
I/O-49: Waiting Time after Loss of Freq. Reference
I/O► Auto mode
50
0
50
None
I/O►Lost command
48
0
Factory Default:
None
0
48
None
Factory Default:
None
0
There are two modes of ‘Auto-A’ and ‘Auto-B’ in Auto
mode. Auto operation is activated by the multi-function
input terminals set to [SEQ-L], [SEQ-M], [SEQ-H] and [Go
step] in I/O-12 ~ I/O-14.
There are two kinds of loss of frequency reference. One is
the loss of digital frequency reference and the other is of
analog frequency reference.
I/O► Seq select
51
51
1
Loss of digital frequency reference is applied when DRV-
04 [Frequency Mode] is set to ‘Keypad-1’ or ‘Kepad-2’. At
this time, the ‘Loss’ means the communication error
between inverter and keypad or communication board
during the time set in I/O-49.
3
Factory Default:
1
1
This code selects the sequence to set frequency, transient
time, steady speed time and motor direction the steps.
Loss of analog frequency reference is applied when DRV-
04 [Frequency Mode] is set to other than ‘Keypad-1’ or
‘Kepad-2’. At this time, the ‘Loss’ is determined by the
criteria set in I/O-11 [Criteria for Analog Input Signal Loss].
I/O► Step number
52
2
52
2
Factory Default:
2
2
This code sets the number of steps to use for the
sequence number selected in I/O-51.
Setting Range
Description
LCD
None
7-Seg
Inverter keeps on operating at the
previous frequency.
Inverter cuts off its output.
0
1
FreeRun
6-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
[Auto-A]
Output Frequency
Sequence 1
This mode will allow the inverter to operate automatically
followed by its pre-programmed sequence. According to
this sequence, eight different steps of Frequency,
Transient Time, Steady Speed time and Motor Direction
can be initiated with only a single multi-function input
contact closure (I/O-12 ~ I/O-14). The sequence and steps
are set in I/O-51 ~ I/O-84.
Sequence 3
Sequence 2
SEQ1 / 2F
SEQ2 / 2F
SEQ1 / 1F
Time
SEQ3 / 2F
SEQ3 / 1F
Step
Parameter Speed-H Speed-M Speed-L
Frequency
Sequence 1
Sequence 2
Sequence 3
Sequence 4
Sequence 5
0: OFF, 1: ON
Code
(P3)
0
(P2)
0
(P1)
1
0
1
0
P1-CM
‘SEQ-L’
I/O-50 ~
I/O-84
ON
1
0
0
Time
Time
0
1
1
P2-CM
‘SEQ-M’
1
0
1
ON
[Example 2 of ‘Auto-A’ operation]
[AUTO B]
This mode can be also used to program up to 8 different
steps as Auto A. However, to switch from one step to
another, an external contact closure set to ‘Go step’ is
required.
Output Frequency
2D
(Forward)
Seq1 / 2F
Seq1 / 1F
1D
Output Frequency
(Forward)
Sequence 1
Sequence 3
Sequence 2
SEQ1 / 2F
SEQ2 / 2F
Time
SEQ1 / 1F
SEQ3 / 2F
3D
(Reverse)
Time
Seq1 / 3F
1T
1S
2T 2S
3T
3S
SEQ3 / 1F
P1-CM
‘SEQ-L’
ON
Time
P1-CM
‘SEQ-L’
[Example 1 of ‘Auto-A’ operation]
ON
Time
Time
Time
P2-CM
‘SEQ-M’
ON
P3-CM
‘Go step’
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Minimum 100msec
[Example of ‘Auto-B’ operation]
6-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
☞ Note: When a new sequence is selected during a sequence
operating, the new sequence starts after the current
sequence is finished.
I/O-53 ~ I/O-84: Frequency, Transient Time, Steady
Speed Time, Motor Direction setting of each Step
and Sequence
These parameter codes set the frequency, transient time,
steady speed time, and motor direction. These codes are
displayed according to the sequence number and steps.
6-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [I/O]
Notes:
6-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [EXT]
6.5 External Group [EXT]
EXT-02 ~ EXT-04: Multi-Function Input Terminal
Define (P4, P5, P6) – Sub-A, Sub-C
EXT group appears only when an optional Sub-Board is
installed.
EXT► P4 define
02
17
02
XCEL-L
EXT-00: Jump to Desired Code #
Factory Default:
XCEL-L
17
EXT► Jump code
00
1
An optional Sub-Board is needed if an application requires
more than three multi-function input terminals.
Factory Default:
1
‘Sub-A’ and ‘Sub-C’ boards provide additional three multi-
function terminals. These terminals are used in conjunction
with P1, P2 and P3 terminals. Refer to I/O-12 ~ I/O-14 for
use. The following table shows the terminal definitions.
Jumping directly to any parameter code can be
accomplished by entering the desired code number. This
code is available only with LCD keypad.
Setting Range
Description
LCD
Speed-L
Speed-M
Speed-H
XCEL-L
XCEL-M
XCEL-H
Dc-brake
2nd Func
Exchange
iTerm Clear
Up
Down
3-Wire
Ext Trip-A
Ext Trip-B
iTerm Clear
7-Seg
EXT-01: Sub-Board Display
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Multi-Step Speed - Low
Multi-Step Speed - Mid
Multi-Step Speed - High
Multi-Accel/Decel - Low
Multi-Accel/Decel - Mid
Multi-Accel/Decel - High
DC injection braking during stop
Exchange to 2nd functions
Exchange to commercial power line
Reserved for future use
Up drive
EXT►
01
Sub B/D
Sub-A
01
1
Factory Default:
Sub-A
1
This code automatically displays the types of Sub-Board
installed.
8
9
Setting Range
Description
10
11
12
13
14
15
LCD
7-Seg
Down drive
3 wire operation
External trip A
External trip B
This board provides three multi-function
input terminals (P4, P5, P6), three multi-
function output terminals (Q1, Q2, Q3),
Load meter output (LM) and second input
frequency reference (V2).
Sub-A
1
Used for PID control
Exchange between PID mode and
V/F mode
Exchange between Option and
Inverter
Open-loop
Main-drive
16
17
This board provides encoder input
terminals (AOC, BOC / A+, A-, B+, B-),
encoder output terminals (FBA, FBB) and
power terminals (+5V input, Vcc output).
This board provides three multi-function
input terminals (P4, P5, P6), one multi-
function output terminal (Q1), isolated
second input frequency reference (V2) and
two analog meters (AM1, AM2).
Sub-B
Sub-C
2
3
Analog hold
XCEL stop
P Gain2
SEQ-L
SEQ-M
SEQ-H
18
19
20
21
22
23
Hold the analog input signal
Disable accel and decel
Used for PID control
Sequence operation - Low
Sequence operation - Mid
Sequence operation - High
Exchange between Sequence
operation and Manual operation
Triggering Sequence operation
(Auto-B)
Three multi-function input terminals (P4,
P5, P6), two multi-function output
Manual
Go step
24
25
terminals (Q1, Q2), Encoder input signal
A, B (LD/Open collector), isolated second
input frequency reference (V2) and Pulse
frequency reference
Sub-D
4
Hold step
Trv Off.Lo
Trv Off.Hi
Interlock1
Interlock2
26
27
28
29
30
Hold last step (Auto-A)
Used for Traverse Operation
Used for MMC operation
See ‘Chapter 7 - Options’ for more detail function, wiring, and
terminal descriptions.
6-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [EXT]
Setting Range
This is the filtering time constant for ‘V2’ signal input. If the
‘V2’ signal is affected by noise causing unstable operation
of the inverter, increase this value. Increasing this value
may make response time slower.
Description
LCD
7-Seg
31
Interlock3
Interlock4
Pre excite
32
33 Pre-excitation
Sensored Vector_SPD/TRQ
Operation change
Sensored Vectro_SPD
P/PI control selection
Spd/Trq
34
35
EXT► V2 volt x1
07
0.00
07
0.00 V
ASR P/PI
Factory Default:
0.00 V
0.00
This is the minimum voltage of the ‘V2’ input at which the
inverter outputs minimum frequency.
EXT-05: V2 Mode Selection – Sub-A, Sub-C
EXT► V2 mode
EXT► V2 volt y1
05
0
08
0.00
05
None
08
0.00 Hz
Factory Default:
None
0
Factory Default:
0.00 Hz
0.00
‘V2’ signal can be used as the frequency reference and
override function.
This is the minimum frequency the inverter outputs when
there is the minimum voltage (EXT-07) on the ‘V2’ terminal.
EXT► V2 volt x2
[None]
V2 signal is not used.
09
10.00
09
0.00 V
Factory Default:
10.00 V
10.00
[Override]
‘V2’ signal override the frequency reference signal (V1, I,
V1+I) selected in DRV-04.
This is the maximum voltage of the ‘V2’ input at which the
inverter outputs maximum frequency.
EXT► V2 volt y2
[Reference]
10
60.00
10
60.00 Hz
‘V2’ signal is used as the frequency reference. At this time,
the frequency reference selected in DRV-04 is ignored.
Factory Default:
60.00 Hz
60.00
This is the maximum frequency the inverter outputs when
there is the maximum voltage (EXT-09) on the ‘V2’
terminal.
EXT-06 ~ EXT-10: Analog Voltage Input (V2)
Signal Adjustment – Sub-A, Sub-C
Reference Frequency
EXT-10
This is used to adjust the analog voltage input signal when
the frequency is referenced or overridden by the ‘V2’
control terminal. This function is applied when EXT-05 is
set to ‘Override’ or ‘Reference’. Reference Frequency
versus Analog Voltage Input Curve can be made by four
parameters of EXT-07 ~ EXT-10.
EXT► V2 filter
EXT-08
06
10
06
10 ms
Analog Voltage
Input (V2)
EXT-07
EXT-09
Factory Default:
10 ms
10
[Reference Frequency vs. Analog Voltage Input, V2 (0 to 10V)]
6-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [EXT]
Reference Frequency
Related Functions: DRV-04 [Frequency Mode]
I/O-01 ~ I/O-05 [V1 Adjustment]
EXT-21
EXT-12: Usage of Pulse Input Signal – Sub-B
EXT► F mode
14
0
EXT-19
14
None
Pulse Input
(0 to 10 kHz)
Factory Default:
None
0
EXT-18
EXT-20
[Reference Frequency vs. Pulse Input]
This function is to select the usage of encoder pulse signal
of ‘Sub-B’ board. The pulse signal from encoder can be
used as the motor speed feedback or frequency reference.
When ‘Sub-B’ board is installed, FU2-40 must be set to
‘V/F’.
Related Functions: EXT-15 [Pulse Input Signal selection]
EXT-17 [Filtering Time Constant]
EXT-18 [Minimum Pulse Frequency]
EXT-19 [Minimum Output Frequency]
EXT-20 [Maximum Pulse Frequency]
EXT-21 [Maximum Output Frequency]
[None]
The encoder pulse signal is not used.
EXT-13: Real Motor Speed Direction
[Feed-back]
The encoder pulse signal is used as the motor speed
feedback. The inverter can maintain the motor speed
constantly, regardless of the load fluctuation, by using the
encoder feedback. The encoder pulse related functions
must be set correctly for better performance in EXT-15 ~
EXT-24.
EXT► RealSpdDir
13
0
13
None
Factory Default:
None
0
If EXT-12 is set to 1 Feed-back with SUB-B mounted,
motor rotation direction is displayed in this parameter.
Related Functions: EXT-15 [Pulse Input Signal selection]
EXT-16 [Encoder Pulse Number]
EXT-22 [P-Gain for ‘Sub-B’]
EXT-23 [I-Gain for ‘Sub-B’]
EXT-14: Encoder Feedback Frequency
EXT-24 [Slip Frequency for ‘Sub-B’]
EXT► ENC FeedBack
14
0
14
None
[Reference]
Factory Default:
None
0
The encoder pulse signal is used as the frequency
reference. When this function is selected, the frequency
reference selected in DRV-04 is ignored. Reference
Frequency versus Pulse Input Curve can be made by four
parameters of EXT-18 ~ EXT-20.
Read frequency regardless of control mode if SUB-B is
installed with EXT-12 set to Feed-back.
EXT-15: Pulse Input Signal Selection – Sub-B
EXT► F pulse set
15
0
15
A + B
Factory Default:
A + B
0
This code sets the encoder pulse to use. [A+B] uses two
encoder signal lines of A and B, and [A] uses one encoder
signal line of A or B. –[A+B] is used when encoder and mot
or rotation direction is opposite.
6-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [EXT]
EXT-16: Encoder Pulse Number – Sub-B
EXT► F pulse x2
20 10.0 kHz
20
10.0
EXT► F pulse num
16
1024
16
1024
Factory Default:
10.0 kHz
10.0
Factory Default:
1024
1024
This is the maximum pulse frequency at which the inverter
outputs maximum frequency.
This code sets the encoder pulse per rotation of encoder.
EXT► F freq y2
EXT-17: Filtering Time Constant for Pulse Input
Signal – Sub-B
21
60.00
21
60.00 Hz
Factory Default:
60.00 Hz
60.00
EXT► F filter
17
10
This is the maximum frequency the inverter outputs when
there is the maximum pulse frequency (EXT-20).
17
10 ms
Factory Default:
10 ms
10
This is the filtering time constant of pulse input signal. This
is used to make the inverter respond slowly to the pulse
input signal when the EXT-14 is set to ‘Reference’.
Reference Frequency
EXT-21
EXT-18 ~ EXT-21: Pulse Input Signal Adjustment –
Sub-B
EXT-19
This is used to adjust the pulse input signal when the pulse
input through Sub-B board references the frequency. This
function is applied when EXT-14 is set to ‘Reference’.
Reference Frequency versus Analog Voltage Input Curve
can be made by four parameters of EXT-18 ~ EXT-21.
Pulse Input
(0 to 10 kHz)
EXT-18
EXT-20
[Reference Frequency vs. Pulse Input]
EXT► F pulse x1
EXT-22 ~ EXT-23: Gains for ‘Sub-B’ Board
18
0.0
18
0.0 kHz
Factory Default:
0.0 kHz
0.0
EXT► PG P-gain
22
3000
22
3000
This is the minimum pulse frequency at which the inverter
outputs minimum frequency.
Factory Default:
3000
3000
This is the proportional gain when the EXT-14 is set to
‘Feed-back’.
EXT► F freq y1
19
0.00
19
0.00 Hz
EXT► PG I-gain
23
300
Factory Default:
0.00 Hz
0.00
23
300
Factory Default:
300
300
This is the minimum frequency the inverter outputs when
there is the minimum pulse frequency (EXT-18).
This is the integral gain when the EXT-14 is set to ‘Feed-
back’.
6-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [EXT]
EXT► Q1 define
30 FDT-1
EXT-24: Slip Frequency for ‘Sub-B’ Board
30
0
EXT►PG Slip Freq
Factory Default:
FDT-1
0
24
100
24
100 %
EXT► Q2 define
31 FDT-2
Factory Default:
100 %
100
31
1
This is the limit frequency the inverter uses to compensate
the motor speed drop due to load fluctuation. The set point
value is the percentage of FUN-32 [Rated Motor Slip].
Factory Default:
EXT► Q3 define
32 FDT-3
FDT-2
1
32
2
Factory Default:
FDT-3
2
EXT-25: P Gain for Sensored Vector_SPD
EXT-25: I Gain for Sensored Vector_SPD
EXT-27: Forward Torque Limit
Related Functions: FU1-54 [Overload Warning Level]
FU1-55 [Overload Warning Time]
FU1-59 [Stall Prevention Mode]
FU1-60 [Stall Prevention Level]
I/O-12 ~ I/O-14 [Multi-function Input
Terminal define]
EXT-28: Reverse Torque Limit
EXT► ASR P-gain
25
26
150
25
100 %
I/O-42 ~ I/O-43 [Frequency Detection]
I/O-44 [Multi-function Auxiliary Contact
Output define]
Factory Default:
150 %
150
I/O-50 ~ I/O-56 [Auto Operation]
EXT► ASR I-gain
200
26
200 ms
Factory Default:
200 ms
200
EXT-34: LM (Load Meter) Output – Sub-A
EXT-35: LM Adjustment
EXT► TRQ + Limit
27
27
150
100 %
EXT► LM mode
34
1
34
Current
Factory Default:
150 %
150
Factory Default:
Current
1
EXT► TRQ – Limit
28
150
28
100 %
EXT► LM Adjust
35
100
Factory Default:
150 %
150
35
100 %
Factory Default:
100 %
100
EXT-30 ~ EXT-32: Multi-Function Output Terminal
(Q1, Q2, Q3) Define – Sub-A, Sub-C
Load meter displays the inverter output Frequency,
Current, Voltage and DC link voltage with pulse signals on
the LM terminal of Sub-A board. The average ranges from
0V to 10V. EXT-35 is used to adjust the LM value.
Q1, Q2, Q3 terminals are provided on Sub-A and Sub-C
board as an open collector output. The functions of these
terminals can be selected the same as I/O-44 [Multi-
function Auxiliary Contact Output Define].
[Frequency]
LM terminal outputs inverter output frequency. The output
value is determined by,
LM Output Voltage = (Output freq. / Max. freq.) × 10V ×
EXT-35 / 100
6-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [EXT]
[Current]
EXT-40: AM1 (Analog Meter 1) Output – Sub-C
EXT-41: AM1 Adjustment
EXT-42: AM2 (Analog Meter 2) Output – Sub-C
LM terminal outputs inverter output current. The output
value is determined by,
LM Output Voltage = (Output current / Rated current) ×
10V × EXT-35 / 150
EXT-43: AM2 Adjustment
These terminals are provided on Sub-C board.
[Voltage]
LM terminal output inverter output voltage. The output
value is determined by,
LM Output Voltage = (Output voltage / Max. output
voltage) × 10V × EXT-35 / 100
EXT► AM1 mode
40
Frequency
0
40
Frequency
Factory Default:
0
EXT► AM1 Adjust
[DC link vtg]
41
100
LM terminal outputs the DC link voltage of inverter. The
output value is determined by,
LM Output Voltage = (DC link voltage / Max. DC link
voltage) × 10V × EXT-35 / 100
41
100 %
Factory Default:
100 %
100
EXT► AM2 mode
42 DC link Vtg
42
3
[Torque]
FM terminal outputs the motor torque. The output value is
determined by,
Factory Default:
DC link Vtg
3
FM terminal output voltage= (Torque current/Rated torque
current)*10V* FM output gain (I/O-41) / 150
EXT► AM2 Adjust
43
100
43
100 %
LM Terminal Output
Factory Default:
100 %
100
15Vpeak
Analog meter displays the inverter output Frequency,
Current, Voltage and DC link voltage with analog voltage
on the AM1 and AM2 terminals of Sub-C board. The output
voltage ranges from 0V to 10V. EXT-41 and EXT-43 are
used to adjust the AM output value.
Avg. 0~10V
Time
500Hz, 2msec (fixed)
[LM Output (LM-CM terminal)]
[Frequency]
The AM terminal outputs inverter output frequency. The
output value is determined by,
Related Functions: I/O-40 ~ I/O-41 [FM Output]
AM Output Voltage = (Output freq. / Max. freq.) × 10V
[Current]
The M terminal outputs inverter output current. The output
value is determined by,
AM Output Voltage = (Output current / Rated current) ×
10V
[Voltage]
The AM terminal outputs inverter output voltage. The
output value is determined by,
6-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [EXT]
AM Output Voltage = (Output voltage / Max. output
voltage) × 10V
range of EXT-50 [Speed Limit Level] + EXT-51 [Speed
bias]. When the motor rotates in Reverse direction, REV
torque is controlled in EXT-51[Speed Limit Bias] and
torque is controlled constant in the above speed range.
EXT-52 [Speed limit gain] is the curve value to reduce the
FWD torque or to increase to the constant torque in
Reverse direction.
[DC link vtg]
The AM terminal outputs the DC link voltage of inverter.
The output value is determined by,
AM Output Voltage = (DC link voltage / Max. DC link
voltage) × 10V
Output torque
[Torque]
The AM terminal outputs the Torque of the motor. The
output value is determined by,
DRV_00
Torque
Command
AM Output Voltage = (Torque current/ Rated Torque
current ) * 10V* AM output gain (EXT-41~42) / 150
Speed
EXT_51
Speed Bias
EXT_51
Speed Bias
EXT-50~53 [Speed limit for Torque mode
operation]
EXT_50
Speed Limit
Related parameters : FU2-39 [Control mode selection]
FU1-20 [max Freq]
EXT-27[Trq + Limit] EXT-28[Trq - Limit]
LCD
display
Speed
Limit
Speed
Bias
Factory
setting
Setting
range
0 –
100[%]
0 –
Code
Description
EXT-
50
EXT-
51
EXT-
52
Speed Limit
Level
Speed Limit
Bias
Speed Limit
Gain
100[%]
10[%]
1
200[%]
Speed
Gain
1 – 10
0
EXT-
53
Speed Limit
Direction
1
(Reverse)
Speed Dir
(Forward)
1
(Forward)
By setting speed limit, this parameter prevents the motor
from rotating excessively high speed due to no-load or light
load connection during Vector_TRQ in FU2-39 [Control
mode].
Set as the percent of EXT-50 [Speed limit level] and EXT-
51 [Speed Limit Bias] to FU1-20 [Max Freq].
If EXT-53 [Speed Limit Direction]= FWD, EXT-51 [Speed
Limit Bias]
FWD Torque control is set, the FWD Torque control is
shown as below. In other words, when the motor rotates in
Forward direction, FWD torque is kept controlled in the
6-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [EXT]
The following illustrations show the relationship between torque, motor speed and speed limit direction.
Torque Dir.
FWD
FWD
REV
REV
Speed limit
direction
Output TRQ
EXT-27
Trq +
Output TRQ
EXT-50
Speed
Limit
EXT-27
Trq +
Limit
Limit
SPD
EXT-28
Trq -
Limit
SPD
Torque change
EXT-28
Trq -
Limit
EXT-51
Speed
Bias
EXT-51
Speed
Bias
EXT-50
Speed
Limit
EXT_51
Speed
Bias
EXT_51
Speed
Bias
Torque Dir.
FWD
FWD
REV
Speed limit
direction
REV
Output TRQ
Output TRQ
EXT-50
EXT-27
Trq +
Limit
EXT-27
Trq +
Limit
Speed
Limit
EXT-50
Speed
Limit
SPD
SPD
Torque change
EXT-28
Trq -
Limit
EXT-28
Trq -
Limit
EXT_51
Speed Bias
EXT_51
Speed Bias
EXT-51
Speed Bias
EXT-51
Speed Bias
6-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [EXT]
EXT-56: Torque Detection Level
EXT-54: Zero Speed Detection Level
EXT-57: Torque Detection Bandwidth
EXT-55: Zero Speed Detection Bandwidth
Use to set output torque detection (SUB-B)
Used to set the zero speed detection (SUB-B)
ꢂ
ꢂ
Only valid when FU2-39 [Control mode selection] is
set to Vector_SPD, Vector_TRQ.
Detect Torque using I/O-44 [Multi-function auxiliary
contact output selection].
ꢂ
ꢂ
Only valid when FU2-39 [Control mode selection] is
set to Vector_SPD, Vector_TRQ.
Detect the zero speed using I/O-44 [Multi-function
auxiliary contact output selection]. Set Zspd Dect in
I/O-44 [Multi-function auxiliary contact output] to
activate this function.
➨ Note : Sub-board should be mounted to use multi-
function output terminal Q1,Q2,Q3.
➨ Note : Sub-board is needed to use multi-function output
terminal Q1,Q2,Q3.
Keypad
Display
Factory
setting
Setting
range
Code
Description
Keypad
Display
Parameter
Name
Zero Speed
Detection
Level
Zero Speed
Detection
Bandwidth
Factory
setting
Setting
range
Torque
Detection
Level
Torque
Detection
Code
EXT-56 TD Level
EXT-57 TD Band
100[%]
5[%]
0 – 150 [%]
0 – 10 [%]
EXT-
54
ZSD
Level
0 – 120
[Hz]
0.3[Hz]
0.1[Hz]
Bandwidth
EXT-
55
ZSD
Band
0 – 0.3
[Hz]
EXT-56 [Torque Detection Level] and EXT-57 [Torque
Detection Bandwidth] are activated in the following
conditions as shown below.
Auxiliary contact relay activates as shown below if the
following settings are applied to EXT-54 [Zero Speed
Detection Level] and EXT-55 [Zero Speed Detection
Bandwidth].
TORQUE
EXT-57
TD Band/
2
EXT-56
TD Level
EXT-56
TD Level
SPEED
EXT-54
EXT-54
ZSD
Level
ZSD
EXT-55
ZSD
Level
Band
AXA-
AXC
Close
AXA-
AXC
Close
Close
Related parameters : FU2-39 [Control mode selection]
I/O-44 [Multi-function auxiliary
Related parameters : FU2-39 [Control mode select]
I/O-44 [Multi-function auxiliary
contact output]
contact output selection]
6-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [APP]
6.6 Application Group [APP]
APP-00: Jump to desired code #
Thread
APP► Jump code
00
1
Traverse
Reciprocation
(Mechanical)
Thread
(Constant
Speed)
Traverse
Rotary
Motion
Factory Default:
1
Jumping directly to any parameter code can be
accomplished by entering the desired code number. This
code is available only with LCD keypad.
[An example of Traverse Operation]
APP-03
Trv. Scr
APP-01: Application Mode Selection
APP-02
Trv. Amp
APP-06
Offset-High
APP► App. mode
01
0
01
None
Reference
Speed
Factory Default:
None
0
APP-07
Offset-Low
This code sets the application mode.
Setting Range
Description
LCD
7-Seg
APP-05
Traverse Dec
APP-04
Traverse Acc
None
0
Application mode is not selected.
Traverse mode is selected in application
group. Related functions (APP-02~07) are
displayed.
MMC (Multi-Motor Control) mode is
selected in application group. Related
functions (APP-08~31) are displayed.
DRAW mode is selected in application
group. Related functions (APP-32~33) are
displayed.
Traverse
MMC
1
2
3
[Traverse Operation Pattern]
[MMC]: The ‘PID’ control should be selected in FU2-47 to
use this function.
♦ One inverter can control multiple motors. This function
is often used when controlling the amount and pressure of
flow in fans or pumps. Built-in PI controller controls a main
motor after receiving process control value and keeps the
control value constant by connecting auxiliary motors to
commercial line when needed.
DRAW
[Traverse]: This is a mechanism to wind thread to an
intended shape on a reel with a rotary motion and
reciprocation. Adjusting the speed of mechanical
reciprocation can make different shapes of thread reel.
The following figure shows an example. The guide should
move with low speed at the center of the reel and fast at
the edge of the reel.
♦ In case that flow amount or flow pressure is beyond or
below the reference so the main drive cannot control by
itself, auxiliary motors are automatically turned on/off.
Maximum four (Q1~3 and Aux. output) auxiliary motors
can be run. Each Starting and Stop Frequency should be
set to four auxiliary motors.
Related Functions: APP-02 to APP-07 [Traverse Parameters]
I/O-12 to I/O-14 [Multi-Function Input]
EXT-30 to EXT-32 [Multi-Function Output]
♦ Auto Change can be selected to automatically switch
the order of the running motors for keeping motor run-time
constant. Set mode ‘1’ for automatic changing of auxiliary
motors only and set mode ‘2’ for automatic changing of all
6-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [APP]
motors including main motor. For mode ‘2’, external
sequence (Refer to APP-26) should be configured.
[Draw]: This is a kind of Open-Loop Tension Control. This
is used to maintain constant tension of material with the
speed difference between main motor and subordinate
motor.
♦ Abnormal motor can be skipped from running by using
the multi-function input terminals (P1, P2, P3, and P4). If a
multi-function terminal is opened, the inverter stops all
running motors and restarts operation with only normal
motors except the abnormal motor. (Refer to APP-29)
Related Functions: APP-32 to APP-33 [Draw Parameters]
DRV-04 [Frequency Mode]
I/O-01 to I/O-10 [Analog Signal Input]
EXT 06 to EXT-10 [Analog Input Setting]
I/O-12 to I/O-14 [Multi-Function Input]
EXT-02 to EXT-04 [Multi-Function Input]
♦ Sleep function is initiated when flow demand is low.
Inverter stops motor when the motor runs below Sleep
Frequency (APP-24) during Sleep Delay Time (APP-23).
While in the sleep state, inverter keeps monitoring and
initiates Wake-Up function when the real value of the
controlling amount has decreased below the Wake-Up
level (APP-25).
APP-02: Traverse Amplitude
APP►Trv. Amp[%]
02
0.0
02
0.0%
Factory Default:
0.0%
0.0
☞ Note: Only one auxiliary motor can be connected with AUX
terminal on control terminal strip without using MMC Option
Board.
This code sets the frequency amplitude of traverse
operation. The value is the percentage of reference
frequency. The output value is determined by,
Trv. Amp Frequency = (Reference Freq. * Trv. Amp)/100
Related Functions: APP-08 to APP-31 [MMC Parameters]
DRV-04 [Frequency Mode]
FU2-47 [PID Operation Selection]
I/O-01 to I/O-10 [Analog Signal Input]
EXT 15 to EXT21 [Pulse Input Signal]
I/O-12 to I/O-14 [Multi-Function Input]
EXT-30 to EXT-32 [Multi-Function Output]
APP-03: Traverse Scramble Amplitude
APP►Trv. Scr[%]
03
0.0
03
0.0%
Factory Default:
0.0%
0.0
Input
Power
MMC Board
This code sets the frequency amplitude of scramble
operation. The output value is determined by,
Trv. Scr Frequency = (Trv. Amp Frequency * (100 - Trv.
Scr))/100
Aux. Motor 1
M1
ACti
RLY1
RLY2
RLY3
Aux. Motor 2
M2
APP-04: Traverse Accel Time
APP-05: Traverse Decel Time
V1
V2
I
Aux. Motor 3
M3
AUX
APP►Trv Acc Time
Aux. Motor 4
04
2.0
04
2.0 sec
M4
M
Main Motor
Factory Default:
2.0 sec
2.0
[MMC Diagram]
APP►Trv Dec Time
05
3.0
05
3.0 sec
Factory Default:
3.0 sec
3.0
6-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [APP]
Sets the acceleration and deceleration time for traverse
operation.
APP-08: Running Auxiliary Motor Number Display
APP►Aux Mot Run
08
08
0
0
☞ The ‘Trv Acc’ terminal set in EXT-30 to EXT-32 is ON
during traverse acceleration time. (Open Collector Output)
☞ The ‘Trv Dec’ terminal set in EXT-30 to EXT-32 is ON
during traverse deceleration time. (Open Collector Output)
☞ APP-04 and APP-05 should be set to a value less than
APP-03. If not, traverse control does not accomplished
correctly.
Factory Default:
0
0
This code shows how many auxiliary motors are running
by MMC control.
APP-09: Starting Auxiliary Motor Selection
APP-06: Traverse Offset (Hi) Setting
APP-07: Traverse Offset (Lo) Setting
APP►Starting Aux
09
1
09
1
Factory Default:
1
1
APP► Trv Off Hi
06
0.0
06
0.0 %
This code sets the starting auxiliary motor for MMC control.
Factory Default:
0.0 %
0.0
This code makes positive offset during traverse operation
by multi-function input terminal. When the ‘Trv Off Hi’
terminal is ON, the offset frequency is added to the
reference frequency. To use this function, set a terminal
out of multi-function input terminals (P1, P2, P3) to ‘Trv Off
Hi’ in I/O-12 ~ I/O-14. The offset value is determined by,
Trv. Off Hi Frequency =(Reference Frequency * Trv. Off
Hi)/100
APP-10: Operation Time Display on Auto Change
APP►Auto Op Time
10
00:00
10
00:00
Factory Default:
00:00
00:00
This code displays the operation time after Auto Change is
accomplished.
APP► Trv Off Lo
07
0.0
APP-11: Start Frequency of Aux. Motor 1
APP-12: Start Frequency of Aux. Motor 2
APP-13: Start Frequency of Aux. Motor 3
APP-14: Start Frequency of Aux. Motor 4
07
0.0 %
Factory Default:
0.0 %
0.0
This code makes negative offset during traverse operation
by multi-function input terminal. When the ‘Trv Off Lo’
terminal is ON, the offset frequency is subtracted from the
reference frequency. To use this function, set a terminal
out of multi-function input terminals (P1, P2, P3) to ‘Trv Off
Lo’ in I/O-12 ~ I/O-14. The offset value is determined by,
Trv. Off Lo Frequency =(Reference Frequency * Trv. Off
Lo)/100
APP►Start freq1
11
49.99
11
49.99 Hz
Factory Default:
49.99 Hz
49.99
APP►Start freq2
12
49.99
12
49.99 Hz
Factory Default:
49.99 Hz
49.99
6-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [APP]
APP-19: Delay Time before Operating Aux. Motor
APP-20: Delay Time before Stopping Aux. Motor
APP►Start freq3
13
14
49.99
13
49.99 Hz
APP►Aux Start DT
Factory Default:
49.99 Hz
49.99
19
60.0
19
60.0 sec
Factory Default:
60.0 sec
60.0
APP►Start freq4
49.99
14
49.99 Hz
Sets the time the inverter waits before starting the auxiliary
motors.
Factory Default:
49.99 Hz
49.99
APP►Aux Stop DT
The inverter turns on AUX, RLY1, RLY2, and RLY3 in
20
60.0
order if the output frequency is over the frequencies set in 20
APP-11 to APP-14, respectively, and the time is over APP-
60.0 sec
Factory Default:
60.0 sec
60.0
19.
Sets the time the inverter waits before stopping the
auxiliary motors.
APP-15: Stop Frequency of Aux. Motor 1
APP-16: Stop Frequency of Aux. Motor 2
APP-17: Stop Frequency of Aux. Motor 3
APP-18: Stop Frequency of Aux. Motor 4
Output
Aux start DT(APP-19)
Frequency
Frequency rise according to
APP►Stop freq1
APP-19
Start freq 1
(APP-11)
15
16
17
15.00
15
15.00 Hz
Factory Default:
15.00 Hz
15.00 Hz
15.00 Hz
15.00 Hz
15.00
Stop freq
1(APP-15)
Frequency drop according to
APP-20
APP►Stop freq2
15.00
Starting
Freq.
16
15.00 Hz
Aux stop DT(APP-20)
Flow
Factory Default:
15.00
When the Flo
increse
Start
Aux. Motor
Start/Stop
When the Flo
decrese
APP►Stop freq3
15.00
17
15.00 Hz
Stop
Factory Default:
15.00
[Aux. Motor Start/Stop with MMC]
APP►Stop freq4
18
15.00
18
15.00 Hz
APP-21: The Number of Aux. Motors
Factory Default:
15.00
APP►Nbr Aux’s
21
21
4
4
The inverter turns off RLY3, RLY2, RLY1, and AUX in
order if the output frequency is below the frequencies set
in APP-15 to APP-18, respectively, and the time is over
APP-20.
Factory Default:
4
4
Sets the number of auxiliary motors connected to the
inverter.
6-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [APP]
APP-22: PID Bypass Selection
APP-23: Sleep Delay Time
APP-24: Sleep Frequency
APP-25: Wake-Up Level
APP►Regul Bypass
22
0
22 --- No ---
APP►Sleep Delay
Factory Default:
No
0
23
23
25
60.0
23
60.0 sec
This is used to bypass the PID operation selected in FU2-
47. Select this code to ‘Yes’ when using MMC function
without PID control. The frequency is determined by real
value of control amount instead PID controller output. The
real value is also used as the Start/Stop reference of Aux.
motors.
Factory Default:
60.0 sec
60.0
APP►Sleep Freq
19.00
24
19.00 Hz
Factory Default:
19.00 Hz
19.00
The following figure shows the running pattern with this
function applied for controlling the flow rate of a tank. To
control the flow rate according to the water level of a tank,
divide the water level of the tank into the region to the
number of Aux. motors plus one, and map each region
from staring frequency to maximum frequency. The
inverter increases output frequency to lower the water
level in the tank when the water level in the tank rises.
When reaching maximum frequency, inverter connects aux.
motors connected directly to commercial line. After
connecting aux. motor, inverter starts again from the
starting frequency. By selecting APP-22 to ‘Yes’, PID
operation is disabled and Control Mode (FU2-47) is
changed to ‘V/F’. PID Bypass is available only when Freq.
Mode (DRV-04) is set to ‘V1’, ‘1’ or ‘V2’. The level in a tank
can be checked in APP-30 [Actual Value] and APP-31
[Actual Percent].
APP►WakeUp level
35
25
35 %
Factory Default:
35 %
35
Sleep function is initiated when flow demand is low.
Inverter stops motor when the motor runs below Sleep
Frequency (APP-24) during Sleep Delay Time (APP-23).
While in the sleep state, inverter keeps monitoring and
initiates Wake-Up function when the real value of the
controlling amount has decreased below the Wake-Up
level (APP-25).
☞ Note: Sleep function is not operated if the Sleep Delay
Time (APP-23) is set to ‘0’.
Actual Value
Output
Frequency
Wakeup level
(APP25)
Max. Freq.
Time
Time
Output Frequency
Sleep delay
Starting
Freq.
(APP23)
t<APP23
Water Level in
a Tank
Sleep freq
(APP24)
H-min
H-max
RUN
STOP
Main Motor
Aux. Motor
Main
Motor
RUN
STOP
Start
[Aux. Motor Start/Stop without PID Control]
[Sleep Operation]
6-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [APP]
APP-26: Auto Change Mode Selection
230VAC
APP►AutoCh_Mode
26
26
0
SV-
0
CM
P1
P2
RLY
RLY
Factory Default:
0
0
This function is used to change the running order of the
motors to regulate their run-time when multiple motors are
connected for MMC.
Main
Main
Auto
S1
Auto
S2
K2
K1
K2
[0]: Not using Auto Change Function.
The inverter keeps the order Main motor ⇒RLY1 ⇒
RLY2 ⇒ RLY3 ⇒ AUX and do not change the running
order of auxiliary motors.
K2.1
K2
K1
K1.1
K2.1
M1/ACti M1/main
M2/ACti
[Sequence Circuit for Inter-Lock Configuration]
[1]: Auto Change Function is applied only to aux. motors.
The inverter changes the order of auxiliary motors except
the main motor connected to the drive. Running order is
Main Motor ⇒ RLY1 ⇒ RLY2 ⇒ RLY3 ⇒ AUX. And
then it is changed to Main Motor ⇒ RLY2 ⇒ RLY3 ⇒
AUX ⇒ RLY1.
APP-27: Auto Change Time
APP-28: Auto Change Level
[2]: Auto Change Function is applied to all motors. The
inverter changes the order of all motors. The inverter
operates the initial motor and the others are directly
powered by commercial line. It should be used with Inter-
lock function after configuring external inter-lock sequence
circuit as shown below.
APP►AutoEx-intv
27
72:00
27
72:00
Factory Default:
72:00
72:00
APP►AutoEx-level
28
20
28
20 %
Factory Default:
20 %
20
3 Phase
Input
This function is used to protect motor from running alone
for a long time by changing operation to other motor.
R S T
K1.1
K2.2
ACtion
Auto Change is accomplished when the following
conditions are satisfied:
U V W
1) The time set in APP-27 is over.
2) The actual value of controlling amount is less than the
value set in APP-28.
K1
K2
3) Only one motor is running.
When above three conditions are met, the inverter stops
the running motor, and changes motor to run by the order
set in APP-26. and then continues operation according to
new order.
M
M1
If Auto Change Level (APP-28) is set to ‘0’, the function is
initiated only when the motor is in Stop or Sleep state. The
[Wiring Diagram for Inter-Lock Configuration]
6-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [APP]
count time for Auto Change is depend on Auto Change
Mode (APP-26). In mode ‘0’, inverter starts counting only
when auxiliary motor is running. In mode ‘1’ or ‘2’, inverter
starts counting when any motor is running including main
motor.
APP-31: Actual Value Display in Percentage
APP►Actual Perc
31
0
31
0 %
Factory Default:
0 %
0
This code displays the value using on PID controller in
percentage.
APP-29: Inter-Lock Selection
APP►Inter-lock
29 --- No ---
29
0
APP-32: Draw Mode Selection
Factory Default:
No
0
APP►Draw Mode
32
0
32
None
By setting this code to ‘Yes’, the multi-function input
terminals (P1 ~ P4) are used as auxiliary motor operating
condition of RLY1, RLY2, RLY3, and AUX. The multi-
function input terminal should be turned on to run the
corresponding auxiliary motor. If running with any multi-
function input terminal open with this function, the inverter
starts motors except the corresponding motor. If multi-
function input happens to be turned off during motor
running, the inverter stops all running motors and restarts
running with only normal motors except the subject motor.
By setting this parameter to ‘Yes’, the multi-function input
terminals (P1~P4) are set to ‘Interlock1’ through
‘Interlock4’ automatically.
Factory Default:
None
0
This code sets the signal input to use for Draw operation.
The main reference frequency is set in DRV-04. This
parameter should be set to a signal that is not selected in
DRV-04.
APP-33: Draw Size Setting
APP►Draw Perc
33
33
100
100 %
Factory Default:
100%
100
☞ Note: P1 through P4 cannot be used for other purpose it
this code is set to ‘Yes’.
This code sets the frequency bandwidth during Draw
operation. For example, when Reference Frequency
(DRV-00) is set to ‘30Hz’, Draw Mode (APP-32) to
‘V1_Draw’ and Draw Size (APP-33) to ‘10%’, the
frequency difference during Draw operation is between 27
Hz and 33Hz. The following figure shows the block
diagram for Draw and Override operation.
Related Functions: I/O-12 to I/O-14 [Multi-Function Input]
EXT-02 to EXT-04 [Multi-Function Input]
APP-30: Actual Value Display
APP►Actual Value
30
0.00
30
0.00 Hz
Factory Default:
0.00 Hz
0.00
This code displays the value using on PID controller in
frequency.
6-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 - Parameter Description [APP]
Draw & Override
Control
Terminal
LPF
Gain/Bias
V1
Reference Frequency
DRV-0
I/O-1
LPF
I/O-2~5
Frequency Mode
DRV-4
Miti-Step
Frequency
Control
Gain/Bias
EXT-2 ~ 4
Termianl
keypad-1
I
I/O-12 ~ 14
keypad-2
None
Step1
V1
I
I/O-6
LPF
I/O-7~10
DRV-5
DRV-6
DRV-7
SUB-A
or SUB-C
None
Limit
EXT-5 V2 Mode
Override
Gain/Bias
Step2
Step3
Step4
Step5
Step6
Step7
V1+I
Override_Freq
V2
wTarFreq
Draw_Freq
I/O-21
I/O-22
I/O-23
I/O-24
EXT-6
EXT-7~10
FU1-20
Max.
Frequency
APP-33
DrawPerc (%)
APP-33
Draw Mode
6-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 7 -
OPTIONS
The ACtionMaster series inverter provides many options for various applications. See the following option table and select
the proper options according to your application.
Option
Name
Description
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
Extended I/O Module
Three Multi-Function Inputs (P4, P5, P6)
Three Multi-Function Outputs (Q1, Q2, Q3)
Auxiliary Analog Frequency Reference (V2)
LM (Load Meter) Output (0 ~ 10V)
Sub-A Board
(Extended I/O)
Encoder Pulse Input – Speed Feedback (AOC, BOC / A+, A-, B+, B-)
Encoder Pulse Output (FBA, FBB)
Sub-B Board
(Speed Feedback)
Vector control (PG operation) and reference freq via pulse input
Extended I/O Module
Sub Boards
Three Multi-Function Inputs (P4, P5, P6)
One Multi-Function Outputs (Q1)
Sub-C Board
(Extended I/O)
Isolated Auxiliary Analog Frequency Reference (V2)
Two Isolated Analog Meter Output (AM1, AM2)
Extended I/O Module
Three Multi-Function Inputs (P4, P5, P6)
Two Multi-Function Outputs (Q1, Q2)
Auxiliary Analog Frequency Reference (V2)
Encoder Pulse Input – Speed Feedback (AOC, BOC / A+, A-, B+, B-)
Encoder Pulse Output (FBA, FBB)
Sub-D Board
(Extended I/O, Speed
Feedback)
Embedded DeviceNet protocol
CAN Controller
Inverter Connection: Max. 64
Device Net
Input Voltage: DC 11 ~ 25V
Baud Rate: 125, 250, 500k bps
CSMA/CD-NBA Method
Connection with Fnet Communication Module for GLOFA PLC
PLC Communication ꢁ Inverter Connection: Max. 64
Option
Boards
(F-Net)
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
Baud Rate: 1M bps
Token Method
RS-485 Communic ation
Inverter Connection: Max. 32
Baud Rate: Max. 19200 bps
Connection to ProfiBus Network
Device Type: Profibus DP Slave
Inverter Connection: Max. 64
Baud Rate: Max. 12M bps
32-Character Display
RS-485
Profi-Bus
LCD
Keypad
Download and Upload from the Keypad
Six Digit 7-Sengment Display
7-Segment
7-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
Option
Remote
Cable
Name
Description
Remote Cable ꢁ 2m, 3m, 5m long keypad cables for separate keypad installation
Dynamic
Braking
DB Resistor ꢁ Enables Inverter to decelerate rapidly
DB Unit
ꢁ
DB units are provided as an option for 15 ~ 30 HP inverters
Note) Refer to option manual for more details.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
The following table shows the Sub-Board Selection Guide According To Functions.
Sub-Board Type
Code
Function Description
Multi-Function Input Terminal ‘P4’
SUB-A
Board
√
SUB-B
Board
SUB-C
Board
√
SUB-D
Board
√
EXT-02
EXT-03
EXT-04
EXT-05
EXT-06
EXT-07
EXT-08
EXT-09
EXT-10
EXT-14
EXT-15
EXT-16
EXT-17
EXT-18
√
√
√
Multi-Function Input Terminal ‘P5’
Multi-Function Input Terminal ‘P6’
V2 Mode Selection
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Filtering Time Constant for V2 Input Signal
V2 Input Minimum Voltage
√
√
√
√
√
√
Frequency Corresponding to V2 Input Minimum Voltage
V2 Input Maximum Voltage
√
√
√
√
√
√
Frequency Corresponding to V2 Input Maximum Voltage
Usage for Pulse Input Signal
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Pulse Input Signal Selection
√
Encoder Pulse Selection
√
Filtering Time Constant for Pulse Input Signal
Pulse Input Minimum Frequency
Frequency Output corresponding to Pulse Input Minimum
Frequency
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
EXT-19
EXT-20
EXT-21
Pulse Input Maximum Frequency
Frequency Output corresponding to Pulse Input Maximum
Frequency
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
P-Gain for PG Option
EXT-22
EXT-23
EXT-24
I-Gain for PG Option
Slip Frequency for PG Option
EXT-25 P-Gain for (Sensored) Vector_SPD
EXT-26 I-Gain for (Sensored) Vector_SPD
EXT-27 Forward Torque Limit
EXT-28 Reverse Torque Limit
√
√
√
√
√
√
Multi-function Output Terminal ‘Q1’
Multi-function Output Terminal ‘Q2’
Multi-function Output Terminal ‘Q3’
LM (Load Meter) Output Selection
LM Output Adjustment
EXT-30
EXT-31
EXT-32
EXT-34
EXT-35
EXT-40
EXT-41
EXT-42
EXT-43
√
√
√
√
AM1 (Analog Meter 1) Output Selection
AM1 Output Adjustment
AM2 (Analog Meter 2) Output Selection
AM2 Output Adjustment
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
7.1 Sub-A board
7.1.1 Board configuration
MC
NFB
U
R
S
T
3 P
230/460 V
50/60 Hz
V
W
IM
F
M
+
*2
FM
5G
Output freq
Analog Meter
0-10V, 1mA
24 V
E
Power supply for
V2 (+12V 10mA)
Voltage input
VR
V2
FX
RX
Potentiometer
Forward Run / Stop
1 kohm, 1/2W
0-10V(1kohm)
Maximum
current thru
PC: 5mA
Reverse Run / Stop
Emergency stop
Fault reset
5G
Sub - A
Board
BX
RST
JOG
P1
+
L
M
*2
Output freq
Analog Meter
Common
terminal for
Multi-function
input & LM
LM
CM
Jog
Multi-function input 1
Multi-function input 2
Multi-function input 3
0-10V, 1mA
Factory setting
XCEL-L
P4
P5
I/O-12~14:
Multi-function
input
Factory setting:
Multi-speed input
(Speed-L,M,H)
P2
XCEL-M
XCEL-H
P3
P6
Q1
CM
Common Terminal
FDT -1
Multi-function
output
FDT -2
FDT -3
Q2
Q3
Power supply for
speed signal
(+12V 10mA)
VR
Common terminal for multi-
function output Q1, Q2, Q3
Potentiometer
1 k ohm,1/2W
EXTG
Speed signal input
(0-10V, 1 kohm)
V1
I
30A
Fault output relay
Less than AC 250V,1A
Less than DC 30V, 1A
30C
30B
Speed signal input
4-20mA (250 ohm)
Multi-function output relay
5G Common for VR,V1,I
AXA
AXC
Less than AC 250V,1A
Less than DC 30V, 1A
Factory setting: 'Run'
*3
Speed signal input
1.
Note)
: Main circuit
: Control circuit
2. Output voltage is adjustable up to 12V.
3. Three types of External speed signal input available.
.
(V, I, V+I, Refer to Parameter list and description for more details)
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
7.1.2 Terminal Configuration
+24V DC
24V
Ground
VR
V2
5G NC Q1 Q2 Q3 EXTG NC P4
P5
P6 LM CM
7.1.3 Terminal Description
Section
Terminal
Name
Description
Used as the extended function of P1, P2, P3
(I/O-12 ~ I/O-14)
P4, P5, P6
Multi-Function Input
Contact Input
CM
VR
V2
Common Terminal
Power Supply for V2
Analog Voltage Input
Common Terminal
Common terminal for P4, P5, P6
DC voltage output terminal for V2 (+12V, 10mA)
Analog voltage input terminal for frequency reference or override.
Common terminal for VR and V2
Analog
Frequency
Reference
5G
Used to monitor one of Output Frequency, Output Current, Output
Voltage, DC link Voltage.
+15V Pulse
Output
LM
Load Meter
(+15V Pulse output, Average voltage: 0 ~ 10V DC)
Common terminal for LM
CM
Common Terminal
Multi-Function Output
(Open-Collector Output)
Open Collector Q1, Q2, Q3
Used as the extended function of AXA, AXC (I/O-44)
Output
EXTG
External Common Terminal Common terminal for Q1, Q2, Q3
Not Used
NC
7.1.4 Parameters of Sub-A Board
Code
Parameter Description
Code
Parameter Description
EXT-01 Sub Board Type Display
EXT-02
EXT-09
EXT-10
EXT-30
EXT-31
EXT-32
EXT-34
EXT-35
Analog Voltage Input Signal (V2) Adjustment
Multi-Function Input Terminal (P4, P4, P6) Define
EXT-03
Multi-Function Output Terminal (Q1, Q2, Q3) Define
LM Output Adjustment
EXT-04
EXT-05 V2 Mode Selection
EXT-06 Filtering Time Constant for V2 Input Signal
EXT-07
Analog Voltage Input Signal (V2) Adjustment
EXT-08
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
7.2 Sub-B Board
7.2.1 Board configuration
MC
NFB
U
R
S
T
3 P
230/460 V
50/60 Hz
V
W
IM
Encoder
E
FM
5G
24 V
E
Encoder
Signal
input (OC)
AOC
BOC
FX
RX
Forward Run / Stop
Stop
Select the encoder
type using Jumper
(J1) provided on
board
Maximum
current thru
PC: 5mA
Reverse Run /
Emergency stop
Sub - B
Board
BX
RST
JOG
P1
(Not latch)
Fault reset
Jog
OC: Open collector
LD: Line drive
A+
A-
Encoder
Signal
input (LD)
Multi-function
B+
B-
Factory
input 1
Multi-function
input 2
setting: Multi-
speed input
(Speed-L,M,H)
P2
Encoder
Signal
Output
Multi-function
input 3
Common Terminal
P3
FBA
CM
FBB
12~15V DC
Input
Encoder
signal ground
+5V DC input
VCC
GND
Potentiometer
1 kohm,1/2W
Power supply for
speed signal
VR
+5V
(+12V 10mA)
Speed signal input
0 - 10V( 1kohm)
Apply the
V1
I
30A
voltage
according to
Encoder
30C
30B
Speed signal input
4 - 20mA (250 ohm)
+5V 0V VCC
specification
External
Power Supply
Common
terminal for
VR,V1, I
5G
AXA
AXC
*2
Speed signal input
Input power
AC110~220V
50/60Hz
1.
Note)
: Main circuit
: Control circuit
2. Three types of External speed signal input available
(V, I, V+I, Refer to Parameter list and description for more details)
.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
7.2.2 Terminal Configuration (total 14 pins)
AOC BOC A+
A-
B+
B- FBA FBB GND GND +5V +5V VCC VCC
7.2.3 Terminal Description
Section
Open
Terminal
Name
Description
AOC
BOC
A Pulse Input Terminal
B Pulse Input Terminal
Connects A signal of Open Collector type encoder
Connects B signal of Open Collector type encoder
Collector
Type
Encoder
Signal
Input
A+
A-
A+ Pulse Input Terminal Connects A+ signal of Line Drive type encoder
A- Pulse Input Terminal Connects A- signal of Line Drive type encoder
B+ Pulse Input Terminal Connects B+ signal of Line Drive type encoder
B- Pulse Input Terminal Connects B- signal of Line Drive type encoder
Line Drive
Type
B+
B-
Encoder
Signal
FBA
FBB
Encoder A Pulse Output Outputs A signal received from the encoder
Encoder B Pulse Output Outputs B signal received from the encoder
Signal
Output
Output
+5V DC Input Terminal
(For Line Drive type)
Provides +5V DC power output to encoder
(5V DC, Minimum 0.5A)
+5V
+12 to 15V DC Input/output
Terminal from External Power
Supply to Encoder
This is the encoder supply voltage. Supply proper voltage
according to the encoder specification.
Power Supply Input
VCC
GND
(+12 to 15V DC, Minimum 0.5A)
(For Open collector type)
Ground Terminal
Ground for Power supply and encoder signal
7.2.4 Parameters of Sub-B Board
Code
Parameter Description
Code
Parameter Description
EXT-01 Sub Board Type Display
EXT-14 Usage for Pulse Input Signal
EXT-15 Pulse Input Signal Selection
EXT-16 Encoder Pulse Number
EXT-17 Filtering Time Constant
EXT-18
EXT-21 Pulse Input Signal Adjustment
EXT-22 P-Gain
EXT-23 I-Gain
EXT-24 Slip Frequency
EXT-25 P-Gain for (Sensored) Vector_SPD
EXT-26 I-Gain for (Sensored) Vector_SPD
EXT-27 Forward Torque Limit
EXT-28 Reverse Torque Limit
Pulse Input Signal Adjustment
EXT-19
EXT-20
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
1. Sub-B board with
Line Drive type encoder
NFC
MC
Motor
IM
R
S
T
U
V
3
phase
AC
input
W
G
FM
5G
E
Encoder
24 V
AOC
BOC
A+
FX
FWD Run/Stop
REV Run/Stop
Emergency stop
Fault reset
Maximum
current thru
PC: 5mA
RX
BX
RST
JOG
P1
Encoder
signal
(LD) input
A-
B+
JOG
Multi-function
input 1
Multi-function
input 2
Multi-function
input 3
Sub-B
B-
I/O-12~14 :
FBA
Encoder
signal
output
Factory setting:
Multi-speed input
(Speed-L, M, H)
P2
FBB
GND
GND
+5V
P3
Encoder
signal
ground
CM
Common Terminal
+5 V power
output to
Encoder
Shield
+5V
VCC
VCC
Potentiometer
1 kohm, 1/2W
Power supply for
speed signal
+12V 10mA
Speed signal input
VR
V1
I
30A
30C
30B
AXA
AXC
0~10V(1 kohm)
Speed signal input
4~20mA (250ohm)
5G
(Common for
VR, V1, I )
Note) 1. : Main circuit,
: Control circuit.
2. External speed signal: V1, I, V1+I (Refer to Parameter list)
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
2. Sub-B board with
Open collector type encoder
NFC
MC
R
S
T
U
V
3
phase
AC
input
IM
W
G
FM
5G
E
Encoder
24 V
Encoder signal
input
(Open collector)
AOC
FX
FWD Run/Stop
REV Run/Stop
Emergency stop
Fault reset
BOC
A+
Maximum
current thru
PC: 5mA
RX
BX
RST
JOG
P1
A-
B+
JOG
Sub-B
B-
Multi-function
input 1
Multi-function
input 2
Multi-function
input 3
I/O-12~14 :
Encoder
signal
output
FBA
Factory setting:
Multi-speed input
(Speed-L, M, H)
P2
FBB
GND
GND
+5V
P3
Encoder
signal ground
Common Terminal
CM
Shield
+5V
12~15 V DC
input/output
terminal
VCC
VCC
External
Power
*2
Potentiometer
1 kohm, 1/2W
Supply
Power supply for
VR speed signal
+12V 10mA
30A
30C
30B
AXA
AXC
Speed signal input
V1
I
0~10V(1 kohm)
Speed signal input
4~20mA (250ohm)
(Common for
VR, V1, I )
5G
Note) 1.
: Main circuit,
: Control circuit
2. External speed command: V1, I, and V1+I (Refer to Function list)
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
7.3 Sub-C Board (Isolated)
7.3.1 Board Configuration
MC
NFB
U
R
S
T
3P
230/460 V
50/60 Hz
V
W
IM
F
M
+
FM
*2
Output freq
24 V
E
analog meter
(0-10V, 1mA)
5G
VR
V2
FX
Potentiometer
1kohm, 1/2W
FWD Run/Stop
REV Run/Stop
Maximum
current thru
PC: 5mA
RX
BX
RST
JOG
P1
GND
AM1
Sub- C
Board
Analog meter output 1
(0-10V, 1mA)
Analog meter output 2
(0-10V, 1mA)
Emergency brake
Fault reset
AM2
JOG
Multi-function input 1
Multi-function input 2
Multi-function input 3
Factory setting:
Multi-speed
input
P4
P5
XCEL-L
XCEL-M
XCEL-H
Multi-function
input
P2
(Speed-L,M,H)
P3
P6
Open collector
Multi-function
input (Less than
25V, 50mA)
ÇÏ
Common terminal
for P4-6
CM
Common Terminal
CM
VR
Q1
FDT-1
Power supply for
speed signal
(+12V 10mA)
Common terminal
for Q1
Potentiometer
1kohm, 1/2W
EXTG
Speed signal input
0 10V(1 kohm)
-
V1
I
30A
Fault output relay
Less than AC 250V, 1A
Less than DC 30V, 1A
30C
30B
Speed signal input
4 - 20mA (250 ohm)
Common
terminal for
VR,V1, I
Multi-function output relay
Less than AC 250V, 1A
Less than DC 30V, 1A
Factory setting:'Run'
5G
AXA
AXC
*3
Speed signal input
1.
Note)
: Main circuit
2. Output voltage is adjustable up to 12V
3. Three types of External speed signal input available
: Control circuit
.
(V, I, V+I, Refer to Parameter list and description for more details)
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
7.3.2 Terminal Configuration
+24V DC
24V
Ground
Q1 EXTG NC P4 P5 P6 CM NC GND V2 AM1 AM2 VR GND
7.3.3 Terminal Description
Section
Terminal
Name
Description
Used as the extended function of P1, P2, P3
(I/O-12 ~ I/O-14).
P4, P5, P6
Multi-Function Input
Contact Input
CM
VR
Common Terminal
Power supply for V2
Common terminal for P4, P5, P6
DC voltage output terminal for V2 (+12V, 10mA)
Analog voltage or current input terminal for frequency reference or
override. (0 ~ 10V DC, 4 ~ 20mA)
Analog
Frequency
Reference
V2
Analog Voltage Input
Connecting jumper pin (J1) select current input.
Common terminal for VR and V2
5G
Common Terminal
Analog Meter 1
Used to monitor one of Output Frequency, Output Current, Output
Voltage, DC link Voltage
AM1
Analog Voltage
AM2
Analog Meter 2
(0 ~ 10V DC analog output, 1mA)
GND
Q1
Common Terminal
Common terminal for LM
Open Collector
Output
Multi-function Output
Used as the extended function of AXA, AXC (I/O-44)
EXTG
NC
External Common Terminal Common terminal for Q1
Not Used
7.3.4 Parameters of Sub-C Board
Code
Parameter Description
Code
Parameter Description
EXT-01 Sub Board Type Display
EXT-02
EXT-09 Analog Voltage Input Signal (V2) Adjustment
EXT-10
Multi-Function Input Terminal (P4, P4, P6) define
EXT-03
EXT-30 Multi-function Output Terminal (Q1) define
EXT-40
EXT-04
EXT-05 V2 Mode Selection
EXT-06 Filtering Time Constant for V2 Input Signal
EXT-41
AM1, AM2 Adjustment
EXT-43
EXT-07
EXT-43
Analog Voltage Input Signal (V2) Adjustment
EXT-08
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
7.4 Sub-D Board
7.4.1 Board Configuration
NFB
MC
U
V
W
FM
5G
IM
R
S
T
3 Phase
230/460V
50/60Hz
*2
+
Encoder
E
24 V
E
AOC
BOC
Encoder
(OC)
A +
A -
Sub- D
Board
FX
FWD Run/Stop
Encoder
B+
B -
Maximum
current thru
PC: 5mA
REV Run/Stop
RX
BX
(LD)
Ground T
for +15V, +5V
(15V input)
Emergency brake
Fault reset
GND
RST
+15V
+5V
(5V input)
JOG
P1
JOG
Multi-function input 1
Multi-function input 2
Power supply for
speed signal
Voltage input
VR
V2
5G
Factory setting:
Multi-speed
input
Potentiometer
1 kohm,1/2W
P2
P3
(+12V 10mA)
(Speed-L,M,H)
Multi-function input 3
Common Terminal
CM
P4
Multi-
function
input
CM
Multi-function input 4
Multi-function input 5
Multi-function input 6
P5
P6
Power supply for
speed signal
(+12V 10mA)
VR
FDT-1
Q1
Q2
FDT-2
Speed signal input
10V (1kohm)
Multi-function output
V1
I
EXTG
30A
30C
30B
Fault output
relay
Less than
AC 250V,1A
Speed signal input
4 - 20mA (250 ohm)
Common
terminal for
VR,V1, I
5G
Multi-function
output
Less than
AC 250V,1A
AXA
AXC
*3
Speed signal input
1.
Note)
: Main circuit
2. Output voltage is adjustable up to 12V
3. Three types of External speed signal input available
: Control circuit
.
(V, I, V+I, Refer to Parameter list and description for more details)
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
7.4.2 Parameters of Sub-D board
Sub-D board comprises of Multi-function input P4, P5, P6, Multi-function output Q1, Q2, input/output terminal for Auxiliary
analog frequency V2, and Encoder interface to receive pulse encoder input.
Encoder Pulse function
Code
EXT-01
EXT-14
Description
Sub Board Type Display
LCD display
Sub D
Usage for Pulse Input Signal
Pulse Input Signal Selection
Encoder Pulse Selection
F mode
F pulse set
F pulse num
F filter
EXT-15
EXT-16
EXT-17
EXT-18
Filtering Time Constant for Pulse Input Signal
Pulse Input Minimum Frequency
Frequency Output corresponding to Pulse Input
Minimum Frequency
F pulse x1
F freq y1
EXT-19
EXT-20
EXT-21
Pulse Input Maximum Frequency
Frequency Output corresponding to Pulse Input
Maximum Frequency
F pulse x2
F freq y2
PG P gain
PG I gain
EXT-22
EXT-23
EXT-24
EXT-25
EXT-26
EXT-27
EXT-28
P-Gain for PG Option
I-Gain for PG Option
PG slip freq
ASR P-Gain
ASR I-Gain
Trq + Limit
Trq - Limit
Slip Frequency for PG Option
P-Gain for (Sensored) Vector_SPD
I-Gain for (Sensored) Vector_SPD
Forward Torque Limit
Reverse Torque Limit
Input/Output function
Code
Description
LCD display
Sub D
P4 define
EXT-01
EXT-02
Sub Board Type Display
Multi-Function Input Terminal ‘P4’
Multi-Function Input Terminal ‘P5’
Multi-Function Input Terminal ‘P6’
V2 Mode Selection
EXT-03
EXT-04
EXT-05
EXT-06
EXT-07
EXT-08
P5 define
P6 define
V2 mode
V2 filter
Filtering Time Constant for V2 Input Signal
V2 Input Minimum Voltage
V2 volt x1
V2 freq y1
Frequency Corresponding to V2 Input Minimum
Voltage
EXT-09
EXT-10
V2 volt x2
V2 freq y2
V2 Input Maximum Voltage
Frequency Corresponding to V2 Input Maximum
Voltage
EXT-30
EXT-31
Q1 define
Q2 define
Multi-function Output Terminal ‘Q1’
Multi-function Output Terminal ‘Q2’
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
7.4.3
Q1
7.4.4 Terminal Descriptions
Terminals Configuration (10 pins + 14 pins)
Q2 EXTG P4 P5 P6
NC
V2
VR
5G
NC
NC
NC
CM
Section
Terminal
Termianl name
Terminal description
Used as the extended function of P1, P2, P3.
(I/O-12 ~ I/O-14).
P4,P5,P6
Multi-Function Input
Contact Input
CM
VR
Common Terminal
Power supply for V2
Common terminal for P4, P5, P6
DC voltage output terminal for V2 (+12V, 10mA)
Sets the frequency by applying DC 0~10V.
Input resistor: 20 kΩ
Analog
Frequency
Reference
V2
5G
Analog Voltage Input
Common Terminal
Common terminal for VR and V2
Used to monitor one of Output Frequency, Output Current,
Output Voltage, DC link Voltage. Factory setting: Output
frequency. Output voltage: 0~10V, Output current: 1mA
Preset freq: 500Hz
LM
Load Meter
+15V Pulse
Output
CM
Common Terminal
Common terminal for LM
Multi-Function Output
(Open-Collect Output)
Used as the extended function of AXA, AXC (I/O-44)
Below DC 25V, 50mA
Q1,Q2
Open Collector
Output
EXTG
NC
External Common Terminal Common terminal for Q1, Q2.
-
Not used.
FG GND +5V
Section
AOC BOC A+
B+ B-
+15V
A-
Terminal
Termianl name
Terminal description
AOC
Open
A Pulse Input Terminal
Connects A signal of Open Collector type encoder
Collector
BOC
A+
A-
B Pulse Input Terminal
A+ Pulse Input Terminal
A- Pulse Input Terminal
B+ Pulse Input Terminal
B- Pulse Input Terminal
Connects B signal of Open Collector type encoder
Connects A+ signal of Line Drive type encoder
Connects A- signal of Line Drive type encoder
Connects B+ signal of Line Drive type encoder
Connects B- signal of Line Drive type encoder
Provides +5V DC power output to encoder
Encoder
input
signal
Line Drive
B+
B-
+5V
+5V DC Input Terminal
(5V DC, Minimum 0.5A)
+15V DC Input/Output
Terminal
Provides 15V DC Input/output Terminal from External Power
Supply to Encoder (For Open collector type)
Power supply
+15V
Common for Encoder
Input/output
GND
FG
Common terminal connecting encoder input/output signal
Used to connect shield of encoder signal
Grouding
Ground Termnal
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
7.5 Communication option boards
7.5.1 F-Net (Needed for Communcation with CMC GLOFA PLC)
Open network system protocol based on IEC/ISA FIeldBus
ꢆSpecification
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
Topology : Linear Bus Topology
Band Method : Baseband
Protocol : Fnet Protocol
Media Access Method : Token
Drive link : Fiber optics
Number of nodes : up to 64 nodes/Bus
Max. Data transmission size : 256byte
Baud rate : 1Mbps
Transmission distance : 750m Max.
Error check : CRC-16
Encoding method : Menchester Biphase-L
Station : 0 – 63 (Setting via Keypad. Dip-swich not provided)
7.5.2 Device-Net (Field bus)
ꢆFeatures
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
Topology: Linear Bus Topology
Band Method : Baseband
Protocol : DeviceNet Protocol
Media Access Method : CSMA/CD-NBA
(Carrier Sense Multiple Access / Collision Detection – Nondestructive Bitwise Arbitration)
Drive link : 5-wire Cable (Twisted Pair)
Number of nodes: 64 nodes/Bus Max
Max. Data transmission size : max 8 bytes(64bits)
Data rates and Max. Cable length (thick) : 125kbps (500m/1640ft), 250kbps (250m/820ft), 500kbps (100m/328ft)
ꢆSpecification
ꢂ
Device type : AC Drive
Communication control method :
ꢂ
①
②
③
Explicit Peer to Peer Messaging
Master/Scanner (Predefined M/S Connection)
I/O Slave Messaging : Polling Connection
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
ꢂ
Baud rate: 125kbps, 250kbps, 500kbps
Supply voltage : 11 - 25V
Faulted Node Recovery
Station: 0 – 63 (Setting via Keypad, Dip-swich not provided)
Output Assembly Instance : 20, 21(100, 101 vendor specific)
Input Assembly Instance : 70, 71(110, 111 vendor specific)
Open Style Connector
Interface : DPRAM
Supports EDS files
* Refer to communication option manuals for details.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
7.5.3 RS485 Communication
The serial interface supports operation, configuration and monitoring of inverter functions through RS485 connection.
1) Terminal block configuration
P
N
G
S
T1
T2
2) Terminal Description
Terminal Name
T1,T2
Description
Short the terminal to connect the termination resistor on
board
S
SHEILD
G
Power grounding terminal for RS485
Connect the RS485 signal - High
Signal input/output terminal for RS 485
Connect the RS485 signal - Low
Reference terminal for RS 485
P
N
7.5.4
Remote cable
Ordering Number
Description
Remote cable - 2m
Remote cable - 3m
Remote cable - 5m
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
7.5.5 Mounting the option boards
Connect the option board to Control board using Connector CN2. .
Control board
Option board
Connector
Mounting
poles
CN2
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
7.6 External options
7.6.1 Optional Keypads
SV-ACtionMaster inverter has two different types of keypads for your convenience.
1) 7-Segment keypad (Weight: 110g, Unit: mm)
2) LCD Keypad (Weight: 140g, Unit: mm)
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
7.6.2 DB Resistors
1) Internal DB Resistor
SV-ACtionMaster inverters up to 3.7kW have built-in DB resistor on Power stack as factory installation. Installing the
external DB resistor (Optional) kit is strongly recommended when the unit is used for continuous operation or motor
rating is above 3.7kW.
Applied motor
capacity (kW/HP)
0.75 / 1
Operating rate
(%ED/Continuous Braking Time)
3%/ 5Sec
Built in DB resistor
(Braking Torque: 100%)
200 ohm, 100W
100 ohm, 100W
60 ohm, 100W
Voltage
1.5 / 2
3% / 5 Sec
200V Class
2.2 / 3
2% / 5 Sec
3.7 / 5
2% / 5 Sec
40 ohm, 100W
0.75 / 1
3% / 5 Sec
900 ohm, 100W
450 ohm, 100W
300 ohm, 100W
200 ohm, 100W
1.5 / 2
3% / 5 Sec
400V Class
2.2 / 3
2% / 5 Sec
3.7 / 5
2% / 5 Sec
2) DB Resistor (For External Installation, Optional)
DB transistor is integrated for ratings below 7.5kW. Install the external DB resistor if necessary. However, DB
transistor is not provided for the ratings above 11kW, installing both external DB unit and DB resistor are required. See
the following table for more details (ED: 5%, Continuous Braking Time:15 sec). If Enable duty (%ED) is increased to
10%, use the external DB resistor having twice Wattage rating.
Applied motor
capacity
(kW / HP)
0.75 / 1
1.5 / 2
Operating rate
(ED/Continuous
Braking Time)
5% / 15 Sec
5% / 15 Sec
5% / 15 Sec
5% / 15 Sec
5% / 15 Sec
5% / 15 Sec
5% / 15 Sec
5% / 15 Sec
5% / 15 Sec
5% / 15 Sec
5% / 15 Sec
5% / 15 Sec
5% / 15 Sec
100 % Braking Torque
150% Braking Torque
[W] Type
[ohm]
[W]
Type
[ohm]
200
100
60
100
200
TYPE 1
TYPE 1
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 3
TYPE 3
TYPE 3
TYPE 3
TYPE 3
TYPE 1
TYPE 1
TYPE 1
150
60
50
33
20
15
10
8
150
300
TYPE 1
TYPE 1
TYPE 1
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 3
TYPE 3
TYPE 3
TYPE 3
TYPE 3
TYPE 1
TYPE 1
TYPE 1
2.2 / 3
300
400
2
0
0
V
3.7 / 5
40
500
600
5.5 / 7.5
7.5 / 10
11 / 15
30
700
800
20
1000
1400
2000
2400
2800
100
1200
2400
2400
3600
3600
150
15
15 / 20
11
18.5 / 25
22 / 30
9
5
8
5
0.75 / 1
1.5 / 2
900
450
300
600
300
200
200
300
2.2 / 3
300
400
7-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
Applied motor
Operating rate
(ED/Continuous
Braking Time)
5% / 15 Sec
5% / 15 Sec
5% / 15 Sec
5% / 15 Sec
5% / 15 Sec
5% / 15 Sec
5% / 15 Sec
100 % Braking Torque
150% Braking Torque
[W] Type
capacity
(kW / HP)
3.7 / 5
[ohm]
[W]
Type
[ohm]
4
0
0
V
200
120
90
500
700
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 3
TYPE 3
TYPE 3
TYPE 3
TYPE 3
130
85
60
40
30
20
20
600
TYPE 2
TYPE 3
TYPE 3
TYPE 3
TYPE 3
TYPE 3
TYPE 3
5.5 / 7.5
7.5 / 10
11 / 15
15 / 20
18.5 / 25
22 / 30
30/ 40
1000
1200
2000
2400
3600
3600
1000
1400
2000
2400
2800
60
45
35
30
37/ 50
45/ 60
55/ 75
75/ 100
3) DB Resistor Wiring
When wiring, connect the DB Resistor as SHORT as possible.
7-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
• DB resistor wiring for 1 – 5 HP Inverter
DB Resistor
TH2
TH1
B1 B2
Max distance : 5m
B1
B2
U
V
W
R
S
T
IM
G
Analog freq
output 2)
24 V
(0-10V)
+
FM
FX
FM
5G
FWD Run / Stop
REV Run / Stop
Max Current thru
PC : 5mA
RX
BX
RST
Fault reset
Jog
JO
P1
P2
P3
Multi-function input terminal
(I/O-12 Setting : Ext Trip-B)
CM
DB resistor terminal
B1, B2
Terminal description
Connect the DB Resistor to Inverter terminal B1,B2.
Thermal sensors provided with the DB resistor.
P1 is ON (TH1-TH2 Shorted) at normal (ambient temp) and P1 is OFF (TH1-TH2
Open) at overheated status. Connect the thermal sensor to one of the multi-function
input (P1, P2 or P3, I/O 12-14 setting: Ext Trip-B).
TH1, TH2
7-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
• DB resistor wiring for 7.5 - 10HP Inverter
DB Resistor
TH2
TH1
B1 B2
Max distance : 5m
B2
B1
N P
R
U
V
W
S
T
IM
G
24 V
Analog freq
output 2)
(0-10V)
+
FM
FX
RX
FM
5G
FWD Run / Stop
REV Run / Stop
Max Current thru
PC : 5mA
BX
RST
Fault reset
Jog
JOG
Multi-function input terminal
(I/O-12 Setting : Ext Trip-B)
P1
P2
P3
CM
DB resistor terminal
Terminal description
B1, B2
Connect the DB Resistor to Inverter terminal B1,B2.
Thermal sensors provided with the DB resistor.
P1 is ON (TH1-TH2 Shorted) at normal (ambient temp) and P1 is OFF (TH1-TH2
Open) at overheated status. Connect the thermal sensor to one of the multi-function
input (P1, P2 or P3, I/O 12-14 setting: Ext Trip-B).
TH1, TH2
7-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
• DB Resistor/Unit wiring for 15-30 HP Inverter
DB Unit
DB Resistor
B2
B2
B1
P
G
N
TH2
B1
TH1
Max distance : 5m
The wire should be TWISTED
Max distance : 5m
Short
N
P1
R
S
P2
U
IM
V
W
T
G
Analog freq
output 2)
24 V
(0-10V)
+
FM
FX
RX
FM
5G
FWD Run / Stop
REV Run / Stop
Max Current thru
PC : 5mA
BX
RST
Fault reset
Jog
JO
P1
P2
P3
Multi-function input terminal
(I/O-12 Setting : Ext Trip-B)
CM
DB resistor terminal
Terminal description
B1, B2
Connect the DB Resistor to Inverter terminal B1,B2.
Thermal sensors provided with the DB resistor.
P1 is ON (TH1-TH2 Shorted) at normal (ambient temp) and P1 is OFF (TH1-TH2
Open) at overheated status. Connect the thermal sensor to one of the multi-function
input (P1, P2 or P3, I/O 12-14 setting: Ext Trip-B).
TH1, TH2
* For DBU, refer to 7.6.3 DB Unit.
7-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
4) DB Reisistor Dimensions
Dimensions [mm]
DB Reisitor
Inverter Model
Type
1
W
64
H
412
D
A
-
B
C
BR0400W150J
SV
40
400
6.3
008ACTIONMAST
ER-2
BR0400W060J
BR0400W050J
BR0600W033J
BR0800W020J
BR1200W015J
BR2400W010J
BR2400W008J
BR3600W005J
BR3600W005J
BR0400W600J
BR0400W300J
BR0400W200J
BR0600W130J
SV
1
1
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
2
64
64
412
412
390
345
345
445
445
445
445
412
412
412
390
40
40
43
93
93
93
93
165
165
40
40
40
43
-
400
400
370
330
330
430
430
430
430
400
400
400
370
6.3
6.3
5
015ACTIONMAST
ER-2
SV
022ACTIONMAST
ER-2
SV
037ACTIONMAST
ER-2
SV
055ACTIONMAST
ER-2
SV
075ACTIONMAST
ER-2
SV
110ACTIONMAST
ER-2
SV
150ACTIONMAST
ER-2
SV
185ACTIONMAST
ER-2
SV
220ACTIONMAST
-
128
220
220
220
220
220
220
64
64
140
140
140
140
140
140
-
7.8
7.8
7.8
7.8
7.8
7.8
6.3
6.3
6.3
5
ER-2
SV
008ACTIONMAST
ER-4
SV
015ACTIONMAST
64
-
ER-4
SV
022ACTIONMAST
ER-4
64
-
SV
128
64
037ACTIONMAST
ER-4
7-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
BR1000W085J
BR1200W060J
BR2000W040J
BR2400W030J
BR3600W020J
BR3600W020J
SV
3
3
3
3
3
3
220
220
220
220
220
220
345
345
445
445
445
445
93
93
140
140
140
140
140
140
330
330
430
430
430
430
7.8
7.8
7.8
7.8
7.8
7.8
055ACTIONMAST
ER-4
SV
075ACTIONMAST
ER-4
SV
110ACTIONMAST
ER-4
SV
150ACTIONMAST
ER-4
SV
185ACTIONMAST
93
93
165
165
ER-4
SV
220ACTIONMAST
ER-4
SV
300ACTIONMAST
ER-4
SV
370ACTIONMAST
ER-4
SV
450ACTIONMAST
ER-4
SV
550ACTIONMAST
ER-4
SV
750ACTIONMAST
ER-4
7-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
* Type 1 (Max. 400 Watt)
* Type 2 (Max. 600 Watt)
A
7-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
* Type 3
7-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
7.6.3 DB (Dynamic Brake) Unit
1) DBU models
Inverter Applicable motor rating
DB Unit
Dimension
200V
200V
400V
400V
400V
400V
400V
11 ~ 15 kW
18.5 ~ 22 kW
11 ~ 15 kW
18.5 ~ 22 kW
30 ~ 37 kW
45 ~ 55 kW
75 kW
SV150DBU-2
SV220DBU-2
SV150DBU-4
SV220DBU-4
SV370DBU-4U
SV550DBU-4U
SV750DBU-4U
See 4) Dimension
2) Terminal configuration
G
B2
B1
N
P
Terminal
Description
G
B2
B1
N
Grounding terminal
Connect it to DB Resistor terminal B2
Connect it to DB Resistor terminal B1
Connect it to Inverter terminal N
Connect it to Inverter terminal P
P
CM
OH*
Common for Terminal OH
Overheat Trip Output Terminal
(Open Collector output : 20mA, 27V DC)
7-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
4) Dimension
ynamic
D
nit
Braking U
WIRING
R
S
T
U
V
B1
B2
IM
(P2)
P
W
N
G
B2
B1
N
P
7-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
5) LED Indicator lamp description
DBU has three LED indicator lamps.
Display
Description
POWER
RUN
Power LED turns Red when input power is applied to DBU.
RUN LED is blinking while the DBU is activated by motor regenerating energy.
The unit shuts down the output and turns OHT LED ON when the heatsink is overheated
in operation by its protection function.
OHT
▶ POWER LED (Red) : indicates input power is applied.
▶
RUN LED (Green) : indicates Dynamic braking is active.
OHT POWER RUN
▶ OHT LED (Green) : indicates Over Heat Trip occurs
7-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7 - Options
7.6.4 Micro surge filter (Designed for Inverter-driven 400V Class motor)
In the PWM type inverter, a surge voltage attributable to wiring constants is generated at the motor terminals.
Especially for a 400V class motor, the surge voltage may deteriorate the insulation. When the 400V class motor is
driven by the inverter, consider the following measures:
Measures
It is recommended to taking either of the following measures:
1) Rectifying the motor insulation
For the 400V class motor, use an insulation-rectified motor. Specifically,
1) Specify the “400V class inverter-driven, insulation-rectified motor”.
2) For the dedicated motor such as the constant-torque motor and low-vibration motor, use the “inverter-driven,
dedicated motor”.
2) Suppressing the surge voltage on the inverter output side
On the secondary side of the inverter, connect the optional surge voltage suppression filter.
ꢇ Wiring
U,V,W
Surge
filter
Motor
Inverter
Within 5m
Within 300m
ꢇ Caution
Check the Input/Output when wiring the filter.
_
_
_
Wiring distance from inverter output to filter input should not exceed 5 meter.
Wiring distance from filter to motor should not exceed 300 meter .
7-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHAPTER 8 -
TROUBLESHOOTING & MAINTENANCE
8.1 Fault Display
When a fault occurs, the inverter turns off its output and displays the fault status in DRV-07. The last 5 faults are saved in
FU2-01 through FU2-05 with the operation status at the instance of fault.
Keypad Display
Protective
Function
Description
LCD
7-Segment
Over Current The inverter turns off its output when the output current of the inverter flows
Over Current 1
OC1
Protection
more than 200% of the inverter rated current.
The inverter turns off its output when a ground fault occurs and the ground fault
Ground Fault current is more than the internal setting value of the inverter. Over current trip
Ground Fault
Over Voltage
Over Load
GF
Protection
function may protect the inverter when a ground fault occurs due to a low
ground fault resistance.
The inverter turns off its output if the DC voltage of the main circuit increases
Over voltage higher than the rated value when the motor decelerates or when regenerative
OV
protection
energy flows back to the inverter due to a regenerative load. This fault can also
occur due to a surge voltage generated at the power supply system.
Current Limit
Protection
(Overload
The inverter turns off its output if the output current of the inverter flows at
180% of the inverter rated current for more than the current limit time (S/W).
OLT
Protection)
The inverter turns off its output by opening the fuse when something is wrong
with the main circuit IGBT to protect the wiring from being damaged from short
currents.
The inverter turns off its output if the heat sink over heats due to a damaged
cooling fan or an alien substance in the cooling fan by detecting the
temperature of the heat sink.
Fuse Open
Over Heat
FUSE
OH
Fuse Open
Heat Sink
Over Heat
The internal electronic thermal of the inverter determines the over heating of the
motor. If the motor is overloaded the inverter turns off the output. The inverter
cannot protect the motor when driving a multi-pole motor or when driving
multiple motors, so consider thermal relays or other thermal protective devices
for each motor.
E-Thermal
ETH
Electronic Thermal
Overload capacity: 150% for 1 min
Use this function if the user needs to turn off the output by an external fault
signal. (Normal Open Contact)
Use this function if the user needs to turn off the output by an external fault
signal. (Normal Close Contact)
Ext Trip-A
Ext Trip-B
EXTA
EXTB
External fault A
External fault B
The inverter turns off its output if the DC voltage is below the detection level
because insufficient torque or over heating of the motor can occurs when the
input voltage of the inverter drops.
The inverter turns off the output if an IGBT short through or an output short
occurs.
The inverter turns off its output when the one or more of the output (U, V, W)
phase is open. The inverter detects the output current to check the phase open
of the output.
Low Voltage
Protection
Low Voltage
Over Current 2
Out Phase Open
LV
OC2
OPO
IGBT Short
Output Phase
open
Used for the emergency stop of the inverter. The inverter instantly turns off the
output when the BX terminal is turned ON, and returns to regular operation
when the BX terminal is turned OFF. Take caution when using this function.
Inverter turns off its output when the motor runs in excess of Max. speed +
20Hz.
BX Protection
(Instant Cut Off)
BX
BX
Overspeed
Protection
Over Speed
OSPD
8-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Troubleshooting & Maintenance
Keypad Display
Protective
Function
Description
Fault at the internal option of the inverter.
LCD
7-Segment
Option (**)
OPT
HW
Err
Option Fault
A fault signal is output when an error occurs to the control circuitry of the
inverter. There are the Wdog error, the EEP error, and the ADC Offset for this
fault
Inverter H/W
Fault
HW-Diag
COM Error
CPU Error
Communication
Error
This fault is displayed when the inverter cannot communicate with the keypad.
According to the I/O-48 [Operating Method when the Frequency Reference is
Lost] setting, there are three modes: continue operation, decelerate and stop,
and free run,
LOP: Displayed when option frequency reference is lost (DPRAM time out)
LOR: Displayed when option frequency reference is lost (Communication
network fault)
LOV: Displayed when ‘V1’ analog frequency reference is lost.
LOI: Displayed when ‘I‘ analog frequency reference is lost.
LOX: Displayed when sun-board (V2, ENC) analog frequency reference is lost.
The inverter turns off its output when the output current of the inverter flows
more than the rated level (150% for 1 minute, 200% for 0.5 seconds).
Inverter uses NC thermal sensor for detecting heat sink temperature. If this
message is displayed, the thermal sensor wire may be cut. (Inverter keeps
operating)
LOP
LOR
LOV
LOI
LP
LR
LV
LI
Operating Method
when the
Frequency
Reference is Lost
LOX
LX
Inv. OLT
NTC open
MC Fail
IOLT
NTC
MCF
Inverter Overload
Thermal Sensor
Opened
Magnetic
This fault is displayed when input power is not applied or M/C inside the inverter
contactor fault becomes faulty.
To reset fault perform one of the following:
} Press RESET key on the keypad.
} Close RST-CM terminals.
} Cycle power to the inverter.
If a problem persists, please contact the factory or your local distributor.
8-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Troubleshooting & Maintenance
8.2 Fault Remedy
Protective
Function
Cause
Remedy
1) Acceleration/Deceleration time is too short compared to 1) Increase Accel/Decel time
2) Increase inverter capacity.
3) Operate after motor has stopped
4) Check output wiring
5) Check mechanical brake operation
6) Check cooling fan
the GD²of the load
2) Load is larger than the inverter rating
3) Inverter turns output on when the motor is free running.
4) Output short or ground fault has occurred
5) Mechanical brake of the motor is operating too fast
6) Components of the main circuit have overheated due
to a faulty cooling fan
Over Current
Protection
(Caution) Operating inverter prior to correcting fault
may damage the IGBT
Ground Current 1) Ground fault has occurred at the output wiring of inverter. 1) Investigate the output wiring of inverter
Protection
2) The insulation of the motor is damaged due to heat.
1) Acceleration time is too short compared to the GD²of
load
2) Regenerative load at the output
3) Line voltage high
2) Exchange motor
1) Increase deceleration time
2) Use regenerative resistor option
3) Check line voltage
Over Voltage
Protection
Current Limit 1) Load is larger than the inverter rating
1) Increase capacity of motor and inverter
2) Select correct inverter capacity
3) Select correct V/F pattern
Protection
(Overload
Protection)
2) Selected incorrect inverter capacity
3) Set incorrect V/F pattern
1) Damage due to repeated over current protection
Exchange the fuse
Fuse Damage 2) Damage due to instant deceleration when motor is at an (Caution) The IGBT receives damages on many
excessive excitation status.
1) Cooling fan damaged or an alien substance inserted
2) Cooling system has faults
occasions when Fuse Open Trip occurs
1) Exchange cooling fans and/or eliminate alien
substance
Heat Sink
Overheat
3) Ambient temperature high
2) Check for alien substances in the heat sink
3) Keep ambient temperature under 40 ℃
1) Reduce load and/or running duty
2) Increase inverter capacity
3) Adjust ETH level to an appropriate level
4) Select correct inverter capacity
5) Select correct V/F pattern
1) Motor has overheated
2) Load is larger than inverter rating
3) ETH level too low
4) Selected incorrect inverter capacity
5) Set incorrect V/F pattern
Electronic
Thermal
6) Operated too long at low speeds
6) Install a cooling fan with a separate power supply
Eliminate fault at circuit connected to external fault
terminal or cause of external fault input
Eliminate fault at circuit connected to external fault
terminal or cause of external fault input
1) Check line voltage
Ext Trip-A
Ext Trip-B
External fault has occurred
External fault has occurred
1) Line voltage low
2) Load larger than line capacity is connected to line
(welding machine, motor with high starting current
connected to the commercial line)
2) Increase line capacity
3) Exchange magnetic switch
Low Voltage
Protection
3) Faulty magnetic switch at the input side of the inverter
1) Short has occurred between the upper and lower IGBT. 1) Check IGBT
2) Short has occurred at the output of the inverter
3) Acceleration/Deceleration time is too short compared to 3) Increase acceleration time
the GD²of load
2) Check output wiring of inverter
Over Current 2
Output Phase 1) Faulty contact of magnetic switch at output
Open 2) Faulty output wiring
Over Speed 1) Faulty wiring of Encoder (A, B)
1) Check magnetic switch at output of inverter
2) Check output wiring
1) Check Encoder A, B signal wiring and wire them
8-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Troubleshooting & Maintenance
Protective
Cause
Remedy
Function
correctly.
2) Incorrect encoder parameter setting
3) Sub-B board or Encoder fault
2) Check parameters of EXT-14,15,16 are set correctly.
3) Replace the faulty Sub-B board or Encoder to a new
one.
Option Fault Faulty option connector connection
1) Wdog error (CPU fault)
Check option connection.
Replace inverter
H/W Fault
2) EEP error (memory fault)
3) ADC Offset (current feedback circuit fault)
Communication 1) Faulty connection between inverter and keypad
1) Check connector
2) Replace inverter
Eliminate cause of fault
Fault
2) Inverter CPU malfunction
Operating
LOP (Loss of reference from the Option),
Method when the LOR (Remote)
Speed LOV (V1),
Reference is LOI (I),
Lost
LOX (Sub-V2, ENC)
Inverter
Overload
1) Load is larger than inverter rating
2) Selected incorrect inverter capacity
1) Increase motor and/or inverter capacity
2) Select correct inverter capacity
1) Damaged M/C operation detection contact
1) Check M/C operation detection contact is working
properly.
2) Check M/C is working properly. Replace it, if needed.
Magnetic
contactor fault
2) M/C malfunction
8-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Troubleshooting & Maintenance
8.3 Troubleshooting
Condition
Check Point
1) Main circuit inspection:
☞ Is the input (line) voltage normal? (Is the LED in the inverter is lit?)
☞ Is the motor connected correctly?
2) Input signal inspection:
☞ Check the operating signal input to the inverter.
☞ Check the forward and the reverse signal input simultaneously to the inverter?
☞ Check the command frequency signal input to the inverter.
3) Parameter setting inspection:
The Motor Does Not
Rotate
☞ Is the reverse prevention (FU1-03) function set?
☞ Is the operation mode (FU1-01) set correctly?
☞ Is the command frequency set to 0?
4) Load inspection:
☞ Is the load too large or is the motor jammed? (Mechanical brake)
5) Other:
☞ Is the alarm displayed on the keypad or is the alarm LED lit? (STOP LED blinks)
The Motor Rotates
in Opposite
Directions
☞ Is the phase sequence of the output terminal U, V, W correct?
☞ Is the starting signal (forward/reverse) connected correctly?
The Difference
Between the
☞ Is the frequency reference signal correct? (Check the level of the input signal)
☞ Is the following parameter setting is correct?
Rotating Speed and
the Reference is
Too Large
Lower Limit Frequency (FU1-24), Upper Limit Frequency (FU1-25), Analog Frequency Gain (I/O-1~10)
☞ Is the input signal line influenced by external noise? (Use a shielded wire)
☞ Is the acceleration/deceleration time is set too short a period of time?
☞ Is the load too large?
☞ Is the Torque Boost (FU1-27, 28) value is too high that the current limit function and the stall prevention
function do not operate?
The Inverter Does
Not Accelerate or
Decelerate
Smoothly
The Motor Current
is Too High
☞ Is the load too large?
☞ Is the Torque Boost Value (manual) too high?
☞ Is the Upper Limit Frequency (FU1-25) value correct?
The Rotating Speed
Does Not Increase
☞ Is the load too large?
☞ Is the Torque Boost (FU1-27, 28) value too high that the stall prevention function (FU1-59, 60) does not
operate?
1) Load inspection:
☞ Is the load oscillating?
2) Input signal inspection:
☞ Is the frequency reference signal oscillating?
3) Other:
The Rotating Speed
Oscillates When the
Inverter is
Operating.
☞ Is the wiring too long when the inverter is using V/F control? (over 500m)
8-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Troubleshooting & Maintenance
8.4 How to Check Power Components
Before checking the power components, be sure to disconnect AC Input supply and wait until the Main Electrolytic
Capacitors (DCP-DCN) is discharged.
Contactor
P1
P2
Tr5
Tr3
Tr1
DCP+
Charge resistor
B1
D1 D2
D3
G
E
G
E
G
E
B2
R
S
T
+
U
V
Electrolytic
capacitors
G
E
W
G
E
G
E
G
E
D4
D5
D6
Tr2
Tr6
Tr4
N
N
Dynamic Braking Unit (Option) for 15~30HP models
1) Disconnect the power input line (R, S, T) and the inverter output to the motor (U, V, W).
2) Verify whether the inverter terminal R, S, T, U, V, W, B1 (or P/L1), N is shorted or open by changing the polarity of the
tester.
3) Verify capacitor has discharged before testing.
4) The tester should display several mega-ohms when open. The tester can display terminal is shorted for a short time and
then display several mega-ohms because of the electrolytic capacitor. The tester should display x Ω ~ xx Ω when
terminal is shorted. If all measured values are about the same, individual modules are OK.
4) Diode module and IGBT module checking points:
Test Polarity
Measured
Value
Short
Open
Short
Open
Short
Open
Short
Open
Short
Open
Short
Open
Test Polarity
Measured
Value
Open
Short
Open
Short
Open
Short
Open
Short
Open
Short
Open
Short
Elements
D1
Element
D4
+
-
DCP+
R
DCP+
S
DCP+
T
B1
+
-
R
DCP+
S
DCP+
T
R
N
S
N
T
N
U
N
V
N
W
N
N
R
N
S
N
T
N
U
N
V
N
W
Diode
Module
D2
D3
D5
D6
DCP+
U
Tr1
Tr3
Tr5
Tr4
B1
U
IGBT
Module
V
B1
Tr6
B1
V
W
B1
Tr2
B1
W
8-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Troubleshooting & Maintenance
8.5 Maintenance
The ACtionMaster series is an industrial electronic product with advanced semiconductor elements. However, temperature,
humidity, vibration and aging parts may still affect it. To avoid this, it is recommended to perform routine inspections.
8.5.1 Precautions
ꢀ
ꢀ
Be sure to remove the drive power input while performing maintenance.
Be sure to perform maintenance only after checking that the bus has discharged. The bus capacitors in the electronic
circuit can still be charged even after the power is turned off.
ꢀ
The correct output voltage can only be measured by using a rectifier voltage meter. Other voltage meters, including
digital voltage meters, are likely to display incorrect values caused by the high frequency PWM output voltage of the
drive.
8.5.2 Routine Inspection
Be sure to check the following before operation:
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
ꢀ
The conditions of the installation location
The conditions of the drive cooling
Abnormal vibration
Abnormal heating
8.5.3 Periodical Inspection
ꢀ Are there any loose bolt, nut or rust caused by surrounding conditions? If so, tighten them up or replace them.
ꢀ Are there any deposits inside the drive-cooling fan? If so, remove using air.
ꢀ Are there any deposits on the drive’s PCB (Printed Circuit Boards)? If so, remove using air.
ꢀ Are there any abnormalities in the various connectors of the drive’s PCB? If so, check the condition of the connector in
question.
ꢀ Check the rotating condition of the cooling fan, the size and condition of the capacitors and the connections with the
magnetic contactor. Replace them if there are any abnormalities.
8.5.4 Meggar Test
For Exterior main circuit, remove all cables from inverter terminals to ensure that test voltage is not applied to the inverter.
Use DC 500V meggar and isolate the main power before starting measurement. If the test voltage is connected to the
control circuit, remove all connection cables to the control circuit. Perform the Meggar test only between the common
cables connected to the main circuit and ground.
Do not perform Dielectric Voltage Withstand test to Inverter. Otherwise, IGBT inside Inverter will be damaged.
8-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Troubleshooting & Maintenance
R
S
T
U
V
W
DC 500V Meggar
Ground
Figure 5 - Megger test
8.5.5 Parts Replacements
The life expectancy of a part depends on the type of part, the environment, and operating conditions. Parts should be
replaced as shown below. When the internal fuse is opened the IGBT should be checked thoroughly before replacing the
fuse. Contact the factory for fuse replacement information.
Part name
Cooling fan
Smoothing
capacitor
Standard period for replacement
2~3 years
Comments
Exchange for a new part
5 years
-
Exchange for a new part
Determine after checking
Other parts
8-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8 - Troubleshooting & Maintenance
8.6 Daily and Periodic Inspection Items
Period
Measuring
Instrument
Inspection
Inspection Method
Criterion
Is there any dust?
Is the ambient temperature and humidity
adequate?
Refer to the precautions
Temperature:
-10~+40 no
freezing.
Humidity: Under
50% no dew
No abnormality
Thermometer,
Hygrometer,
Recorder
Ambient
Environ-
ment
Ο
All
Is there any abnormal oscillation or noise
Is the input voltage of the main circuit normal
Use sight and hearing
Measure the voltage between the
terminals R, S, T
Undo the inverter connections short
the terminals R, S, T, U, V, W and
measure between these parts and the
ground.
Tighten the screws.
Visual check.
Visual check
Equipment
Input
Voltage
Ο
Ο
Digital Multi-
Meter/Tester
DC 500V class
Megger
Megger check (between the main circuit and
the ground)
Are any fixed parts removed?
Are there any traces of overheating at each
component’s cleaning?
Ο
Over 5MΩ
No fault
Ο
Ο
Ο
Ο
All
Is the conductor rusty?
Is the wire coating damaged?
Is there any damage?
Check the resistance between each of the
terminals.
No fault
Conductor/
Wire
Terminal
IGBT
Module
/Diode
Module
Ο
Ο
Ο
Visual check
Undo the inverter connection and
measure the resistance between R, S, Check Power
T ⇔ P, N and U, V, W ⇔ P, N with a
tester.
No fault
(Refer ‘How to
Digital Multi-
Meter/Analog
Tester
Components”)
Is there any liquid coming out?
Is the safety pin out, and is there any
swelling?
Measure the capacitance.
Is there any chattering noise during
operation?
Is there any damage to the contact
Is there any damage to the resistor
insulation?
Visual check.
Measure with a capacitance-
measuring device.
No fault
Over 85% of the
rated capacity
Capacitance
Measuring Device
Ο
Ο
Smoothing
Capacitor
Ο
Ο
Auditory check.
No fault
Relay
Visual check.
Visual check.
Ο
Ο
No fault
Digital Multi-
Meter/Analog
Tester
Error must be
within ±10% the
displayed
resistance
The voltage
balance between
the phases for
200V (800V) class
is under 4V (8V).
The fault circuit
operates according
to the sequence.
Must rotate
Is the wiring in the resistor damaged (open)?
Disconnect one of the connections
and measure with a tester.
Resistor
Ο
Ο
Ο
Is there any unbalance between each
phases of the output voltage?
Measure the voltage between the
output terminals U, V and W.
Digital Multi-
Meter/Rectifying
Voltmeter
Operation Nothing must be wrong with display circuit
Short and open the inverter protective
circuit output.
Check
after executing the sequence protective
operation
Is there any abnormal oscillation or noise?
Is the connection area loose?
Turn OFF the power and turn the fan
by hand.
Tighten the connections.
Ο
Ο
smoothly.
No fault
Ο
Ο
Cooling
Fan
Is the displayed value correct?
Check the meter reading at the
exterior of the panel
Check the
specified and
management
values.
Voltmeter/
Ammeter etc.
Meter
All
Are there any abnormal vibrations or noise?
Is there any unusual odor?
Auditory, sensory, visual check.
Check for overheat and damage.
No fault
Ο
Ο
Insulation
Resistor
Megger check (between the output terminals
and the ground terminal)
Undo the U, V and W connections and
tie the motor wiring.
500V class
Megger
Ο
Over 5MΩ
Note: Values in ( ) is for the 400V class inverters.
8-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX A - FUNCTIONS BASED ON USE
Set the function properly according to the load and operating conditions. Application and related functions are listed in the
following table.
Use
Related Parameter Code
DRV-01 [Acceleration Time], DRV-02 [Deceleration Time],
FU1-05 [Acceleration Pattern], FU1-06 [Deceleration Pattern]
FU1-03 [Forward, Reverse Prevention]
FU1-05 [Acceleration Pattern], FU1-06 [Deceleration Pattern]
FU1-05 [Acceleration Pattern], FU1-06 [Deceleration Pattern]
FU1-07 [Stop Method], FU1-08~11 [DC Braking],
FU1-12~13 [DC braking at start]
Accel/Decel Time, Pattern Adjustment
Reverse Rotation Prevention
Minimum Accel/Decel Time
Accel/Decel at Continuous Rating Range
Braking Operation Adjustment
FU1-20 [Maximum Frequency],
FU1-25 [Frequency Upper Limit],
Operations for Frequencies Over 60 Hz
I/O-05 [Frequency Corresponding to Max. Voltage of V1],
I/O-10 [Frequency Corresponding to Max. Current of I]
FU1-20 [Maximum Frequency],
Selecting an Appropriate Output
Characteristics for the Load
FU1-21 [Base Frequency]
FU1-22 [Starting Frequency],
FU1-26~28 [Torque Boost],
FU1-59~60 [Stall Prevention],
Motor Output Torque Adjustment
FU2-30 [Rated Motor]
FU1-23~25 [Frequency Upper/Lower Limit],
I/O-01~10 [Analog Frequency Setting]
FU1-50~53 [Electronic Thermal], FU2-30 [Rated Motor]
I/O-12~14 [Define the Multi Function Input Terminals],
I/O-20~27 [Jog, Multi Step Frequency],
FU1-23~25 [Frequency Upper/Lower Limit]
I/O-20 [Jog Frequency]
Output Frequency Limit
Motor Overheat Protection
Multi Step Operation
Jog Operation
Frequency Jump Operation
FU2-10~16 [Frequency Jump]
I/O-42~43 [Frequency Detection Level],
I/O-44 [Multi Function Output]
DRV-04 [Motor Speed],
Timing the Electronic Brake Operation
Displaying the Rotating Speed
FU2-74 [Motor RPM Display Gain]
Function Alteration Prevention
Energy Saving
FU2-94 [Parameter Lock]
FU1-39 [Energy Saving]
Auto Restart Operation After Alarm Stop
2nd Motor Operation
FU2-27~28 [Auto Retry]
FU2-81~90 [2nd Function]
PID Feedback Operation
FU2-50~54 [PID Operation]
Frequency Reference Signal and Output
Adjusting
I/O-01~10 [Analog Frequency Setting]
Define the Multi-Function Input Terminals
Define the Multi-Function Input Terminals
Commercial Line ⇔ inverter Switchover
Operation
I/O-12~14 [Define the Multi-Function Input Terminals]
I/O-44 [Multi Function Auxiliary Contact Output Setting]
I/O-12~14 [Define the Multi-Function Input Terminals],
I/O-44 [Multi-Function Auxiliary Contact Output Setting]
I/O-40~41 [FM Output]
Frequency Meter Calibration
I/O-46 [Inverter No.],
Operate by Communicating with a Computer I/O-47 [communication Speed],
I/O-48~49 [Loss of Reference]
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX B - PARAMETERS BASED ON APPLICATION
Application
Parameter Code
DRV Group
When you want to change the frequency setting
DRV-00
When you want to change the acceleration and deceleration time of the motor
When you want to change the run/stop method
DRV-01, DRV-02
DRV-03
When you want to change the frequency reference source
When you want to set the multi-function
DRV-04
DRV-005 ~ 07
DRV-08 ~ 10
DRV-11
When you want to see the output current, motor speed and the DC link voltage of inverter
When you want to see the output voltage, output power, output torque from the user display
When you want to check the fault of the inverter
DRV-12
FU1 Group
When you want to use the Jump Code
FU1-00
When you want to prevent the motor from rotating at opposite directions
When you want to select the acceleration and deceleration pattern suitable for your application
When you want to change the stopping method
FU1-03
FU1-05 ~ 06
FU1-07
When you want to change the stopping accuracy for steady stop
When DC injection braking is required before starting
FU1-08 ~ 11
FU1-12 ~ 13
FU1-20 ~ 21
When you want to set the maximum frequency and the base frequency according to the rated torque of the
motor
When you want to adjust the starting frequency
FU1-22
When you want to limit the mechanical rotating speed to a fixed value
When a large starting torque is needed for loads such as elevators (Manual/Auto Torque Boost)
When you want to select an appropriate output characteristic (V/F characteristic) according to loads
When you want to se up your own V/F pattern
FU1-23 ~ 25
FU1-26 ~ 28
FU1-29
FU1-30 ~ 37
FU1-38
When you want to adjust the output voltage of the inverter
When you want to use the energy saving function
FU1-39
When you want to protect the motor from overheating
FU1-50 ~ 53
FU1-54 ~ 55
FU1-56 ~ 58
FU1-59 ~ 60
When you want to output a signal when the overload condition lasts more than a fixed amount of time
When you want to cut off the output when the overload condition lasts more than a fixed amount of time
When you want to set the stall prevention function
FU2 Group
When you want to check the fault history of the inverter
FU2-01 ~ 06
FU2-07 ~ 08
FU2-10 ~ 16
FU2-19
When you want to use dwell function
When you want to prevent the resonance from the oscillating characteristics of a machine
When you want to protect inverter from input/output phase loss
When you want to start the inverter as soon as the power is turned ON
FU2-20
When you want to restart the inverter by resetting the fault when a fault occur
When you want to use the instant power failure restart function (Speed Search)
FU2-21
FU2-22 ~ 25
FU2-26 ~ 27
FU2-30 ~ 37
FU2-39
When you want to use the retry function
When you want to enter the motor constants
When you want to reduce noise or leakage current by changing the PWM carrier frequency
When you want to change the control method (V/F, slip compensation, PID, or sensorless operation)
FU2-40
iiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Application
Parameter Code
FU2-41 ~ 44
FU2-50 ~ 54
FU2-70
When you want to use the auto tuning function
When you want to operate using PID feedback
When you want to change the reference frequency for acceleration and deceleration
When you want to change the acceleration and deceleration time scale
FU2-71
When you want to set the initial keypad display that is displayed when the power is turned ON
When you want to set the user defined display
FU2-72
FU2-73
When you want to adjust the gain for the motor RPM display
When you want to set the dynamic braking (DB) resistor mode
FU2-74
FU2-75 ~ 76
FU2-79
When you want to verify the inverter software version
When you want to change the connection from one motor to the other motor which use difference parameters
When you want to copy the inverter parameter to another inverter
FU2-81 ~ 90
FU2-91 ~ 92
FU2-93
When you want to initialize the parameters
When you want to prevent the parameters from being changed
FU2-94
I/O Group
When you want to set the analog voltage or current for the frequency reference
I/O-01 ~ 10
I/O-11
When you want to set the operating method when the frequency reference is lost
When you want to change the functions for the input terminals P1, P2, and P3
When you want to check the status of the input/output terminals
I/O-12 ~ 14
I/O-15 ~ 16
I/O-17
When you want to change the response time of the input terminals
When you want to use the JOG and multi step speed operation
When you want to change the 1st ~ 7th acceleration/deceleration time
I/O-20 ~ 24
I/O-25 ~ 38
I/O-40 ~ 41
I/O-42 ~ 43
I/O-44
When you want to use the FM meter terminal output
When you want to set the frequency detection level
When you want to change the functions of the multi function auxiliary contact output (AXA-AXC)
When you want to exchange the motor to commercial power line from inverter or the opposite
When you want to use the fault relay (30A, 30B, 30C) functions
I/O-44
I/O-45
When you want to use RS232/485 communication
When you want to set the operating method when the frequency reference is lost
I/O-46 ~ 47
I/O-48 ~ 49
I/O-50 ~ 84
When you want to use the auto (sequence) operation
EXT Group (When a Sub-board and/or an option board is installed)
When you want to define the functions for the input terminals P4, P5, P6 (SUB-A, SUB-C)
EXT-02 ~ 04
EXT-05 ~ 10
When you want to use the analog voltage (V2) input (SUB-A, SUB-C)
When you want to use the encoder pulse for feedback to control the motor speed, or use the pulse input for
frequency reference (SUB-B)
EXT-14 ~ 24
When you want to change the functions of the output terminals Q1, Q2, Q3 (SUB-A, SUB-C)
When you want to use the LM meter terminal output (SUB-A, SUB-C)
When you want to use the analog outputs (AM1, AM2 terminals)
EXT-30 ~ 32
EXT-34 ~ 35
EXT-40 ~ 43
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
APPENDIX C - PERIPHERAL DEVICES
Magnetic
Contactor
(CMC)
Wire, mm2 (AWG)
Inverter
Models
Motor
[HP]
MCCB, ELB
(CMC)
AC Input
Fuse
AC Reactor
2.13 mH, 5.7 A
1.20 mH, 10 A
0.88 mH, 14 A
0.56 mH, 20 A
0.39 mH, 30 A
0.28 mH, 40 A
0.20 mH, 59 A
0.15 mH, 75 A
0.12 mH, 96 A
0.10 mH, 112 A
8.63 mH, 2.8 A
4.81 mH, 4.8 A
3.23 mH, 7.5 A
2.34 mH, 10 A
1.22 mH, 15 A
1.14 mH, 20 A
0.81 mH, 30 A
0.61 mH, 38 A
0.45 mH, 50 A
DC Reactor
7.00 mH, 5.4 A
4.05 mH, 9.2 A
2.92 mH, 13 A
1.98 mH, 19 A
1.37 mH, 29 A
1.05 mH, 38 A
0.74 mH, 56 A
0.57 mH, 71 A
0.49 mH, 91 A
0.42 mH, 107 A
28.62 mH, 2.7 A
16.14 mH, 4.6 A
11.66 mH, 7.1 A
7.83 mH, 10 A
5.34 mH, 14 A
4.04 mH, 19 A
2.76 mH, 29 A
2.18 mH, 36 A
1.79 mH, 48 A
R, S, T
U, V, W Ground
SV008ACti
onMaster-2
SV015ACti
onMaster-2
SV022ACti
onMaster-2
SV037ACti
onMaster-2
SV055ACti
onMaster-2
SV075ACti
onMaster-2
SV110ACti
onMaster-2
SV150ACti
onMaster-2
SV185ACti
onMaster-2
SV220ACti
onMaster-2
SV008ACti
onMaster-4
SV015ACti
onMaster-4
SV022ACti
onMaster-4
SV037ACti
onMaster-4
SV055ACti
onMaster-4
SV075ACti
onMaster-4
SV110ACti
onMaster-4
SV150ACti
onMaster-4
SV185ACti
onMaster-4
1
2
ABS33a, EBS33
ABS33a, EBS33
ABS33a, EBS33
ABS33a, EBS33
ABS53a, EBS53
ABS63a, EBS63
ABS103a, EBS103
ABS103a, EBS103
ABS203a, EBS203
SMC-10P
2 (14)
2 (14)
2 (14)
2 (14)
3.5 (12)
3.5 (12)
3.5 (12)
10 A
15 A
25 A
40 A
40 A
50 A
70 A
100 A
100 A
125 A
6 A
SMC-10P
SMC-15P
SMC-20P
SMC-25P
SMC-35P
SMC-50P
SMC-65P
SMC-80P
2 (14)
2 (14)
3
5
3.5 (12) 3.5 (12) 3.5 (12)
5.5 (10) 5.5 (10) 5.5 (10)
7.5
10
15
20
25
30
1
8 (8)
14 (6)
22 (4)
30 (3)
38(2)
8 (8)
5.5 (10)
14 (6)
14 (6)
22 (4)
22 (4)
2 (14)
2 (14)
2 (14)
2 (14)
3.5 (12)
14 (6)
22 (4)
30 (3)
30 (3)
2 (14)
2 (14)
2 (14)
2 (14)
2 (14)
ABS203a, EBS203 SMC-100P
ABS33a, EBS33
ABS33a, EBS33
ABS33a, EBS33
ABS33a, EBS33
ABS33a, EBS33
ABS33a, EBS33
ABS53a, EBS53
ABS63a, EBS63
ABS103a, EBS103
SMC-10P
SMC-10P
SMC-20P
SMC-20P
SMC-20P
SMC-20P
SMC-20P
SMC-25P
SMC-35P
2 (14)
2 (14)
2 (14)
2 (14)
3.5 (12)
2
10 A
10 A
20 A
20 A
30 A
35 A
45 A
60 A
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
25
3.5 (12) 3.5 (12) 3.5 (12)
5.5 (10) 5.5 (10)
8 (8)
8 (8)
14 (6)
14 (6)
8 (8)
8 (8)
14 (6)
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SV220ACti
onMaster-4
SV300ACti
onMaster-4
SV370ACti
onMaster-4
SV450ACti
onMaster-4
SV550ACti
onMaster-4
SV750ACti
onMaster-4
30
40
ABS103a, EBS103
ABS103a, EBS103
ABS103a, EBS103
ABS103a, EBS103
ABS103a, EBS103
ABS103a, EBS103
SMC-50P
GMC-65
22 (4)
22 (4)
22 (4)
38(2)
14 (6)
22 (4)
22 (4)
38(2)
14 (6)
14 (6)
14 (6)
22 (4)
22 (4)
22 (4)
70 A
0.39 mH, 58 A
0.287mH, 80A
0.232mH, 98A
0.195mH, 118A
0.157mH, 142A
0.122mH, 196A
1.54 mH, 55 A
1.191mH, 76A
0.975mH, 93A
0.886mH, 112A
0.753mH, 135A
0.436mH, 187A
50
GMC-85
60
GMC-100
GMC-125
GMC-150
75
38(2)
38(2)
100
60(2/0)
60(2/0)
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Council Directive(s) to which conformity is declared:
CD 73/23/EEC and CD 89/336/EEC
Units are certified for compliance with:
EN50178 (1997)
EN 50081-2 (1993)
EN 55011 (1994)
EN 50082-2 (1995)
EN 61000-4-2 (1995)
ENV 50140 (1993) & ENV 50204 (1995)
EN 61000-4-4 (1995)
ENV 50141 (1993)
EN 61000-4-8 (1993)
Type of Equipment:
Model Name:
Trade Mark:
Inverter (Power Conversion Equipment)
SV - ACtionMaster Series
Cleveland Motion Controls
IMC, International Motion Controls
369 Franklin Street
Representative:
Address:
Buffalo, New York , 14202
USA
Manufacturer:
Address:
Cleveland Motion Controls.
7550 Hub Parkway
Cleveland, Ohio, 44125
USA
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TECHNICAL STANDARDS APPLIED
The standards applied in order to comply with the essential requirements of the Directives 73/23/CEE "Electrical material
intended to be used with certain limits of voltage" and 89/336/CEE "Electromagnetic Compatibility" are the following ones:
• EN 50178 (1997)
• EN 50081-2 (1993)
• EN 55011 (1994)
“Safety of information technology equipment”.
“Electromagnetic compatibility. Generic emission standard. Part 2: Industrial environment.”
“Limits and methods of measurements of radio disturbance characteristics of industrial,
scientific and medical (ISM) radio frequency equipment.”
• EN 50082-2 (1995)
• EN 61000-4-2 (1995)
“Electromagnetic compatibility. Generic immunity standard. Part 2: Industrial environment.”
“Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques. Section 2:
Electrostatic discharge immunity test. Basic EMC Publication (IEC 1000-4-2: 1995).”
• ENV 50140 (1993)
“Electromagnetic compatibility - Basic immunity standard - Radiated radio- frequency electro
magnetic field - Immunity test.”
• ENV 50204 (1995)
“Radio electromagnetic field from digital radio telephones.”
• EN 61000-4-4 (1995)
“Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques. Section 4:
Electrical fast transients / burst immunity test. Basic EMC Publication (IEC 1000-4-4: 1995).”
• ENV 50141 (1993)
“Electromagnetic compatibility. Basic immunity standard. Conducted disturbances induced by
radio-frequency fields.”
• EN 61000-4-8 (1993)
“Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Part 4: Testing and measurement techniques. Section 8:
Power frequency magnetic field immunity test - Basic EMC Publication (IEC 1000-4-8: 1993).”
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EMC INSTALLATION GUIDE
CMC inverters are tested to meet Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Directive 89/336/EEC and Low Voltage (LV)
Directive 73/23/EEC using a technical construction file. However, Conformity of the inverter with CE EMC requirements
does not guarantee an entire machine installation complies with CE EMC requirements. Many factors can influence total
machine installation compliance.
Essential Requirements for CE Compliance
Following conditions must be satisfied for CMC inverters to meet the CE EMC requirements.
1. CE compatible CMC inverter
2. Installing inverter in an EMC enclosure
3. Grounding enclosure and shielded parts of wire
4. RFI filter on inverter input side
5. Using shielded cable
1. Ferrite core on inverter output side
RFI FILTERS
THE L.G. RANGE OF POWER LINE FILTERS FF (Footprint) – FE (Standard) SERIES, HAVE BEEN SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED WITH HIGH
FREQUENCY CMC INVERTERS, THE USE L.G. FILTERS, WITH THE INSTALLATION ADVICE OVERLEAF HELP TO ENSURE TROUBLE FREE
USE ALONG SIDE SENSITIVE DEVICES AND COMPLIANCE TO CONDUCTED EMISSION AND IMMUNITY STANDARDS TO EN50081
CAUTION
IN CASE OF A LEAKAGE CURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES IS USED ON POWER SUPPLY, IT MAY BE FAULT AT POWER-ON OR OFF.
IN AVOID THIS CASE, THE SENSE CURRENT OF PROTECTIVE DEVICE SHOULD BE LARGER THAN VALUE OF LAKAGE CURRENT AT
WORST CASE IN THE BELOW TABLE.
RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
To conform to the EMC directive, it is necessary that these instructions be followed as closely as possible. Follow the usual
safety procedures when working with electrical equipment. All electrical connections to the filter, inverter and motor must be
made by a qualified electrical technician.
1-) Check the filter rating label to ensure that the current, voltage rating and part number are correct.
2-) For best results the filter should be fitted as closely as possible to the incoming mains supply of the wiring enclosure,
usually directly after the enclosures circuit breaker or supply switch.
3-) The back panel of the wiring cabinet of board should be prepared for the mounting dimensions of the filter. Care should
be taken to remove any paint etc. from the mounting holes and face area of the panel to ensure the best possible earthing
of the filter.
4-) Mount the filter securely.
5-) Connect the mains supply to the filter terminals marked LINE, connect any earth cables to the earth stud provided.
Connect the filter terminals marked LOAD to the mains input of the inverter using short lengths of appropriate gauge cable.
6-) Connect the motor and fit the ferrite core (output chokes) as close to the inverter as possible. Armoured or screened
cable should be used with the 3 phase conductors only threaded twice through the center of the ferrite core. The earth
conductor should be securely earthed at both inverter and motor ends. The screen should be connected to the enclosure
body via and earthed cable gland.
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-) Connect any control cables as instructed in the inverter instructions manual.
IT IS IMPORTANT THAT ALL LEAD LENGHTS ARE KEPT AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE AND THAT INCOMING MAINS
AND OUTGOING MOTOR CABLES ARE KEPT WELL SEPARATED.
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RFI Filters (Footprint - Standard) for ACtionMaster SERIES
iS5 series
VARIADOR
/
Filtros Footprint
/
Footprint Filters
CORRIENTE
CHOQUES
DE SALIDA
OUTPUT
DIMENSIONES
DIMENSIONS
MONTAJE
MOUNTING
TORNILLOS
DE FIJACION
MOUNT
CODIGO
INTENS.
CURRENT
TENSION
PESO
WEIGHT
POT.
POWER
DE FUGAS
LEAKAGE
CURRENT
INVERTER
CODE
VOLTAGE
L
W
H
Y
X
CHOKES
TRIFASICOS THREE PHASE
NOM. MAX.
SV008iS5-2
SV015iS5-2
SV022iS5-2
SV037iS5-2
SV055iS5-2
0.8kW
1.5kW
2.2kW
3.7kW
5.5kW
329 x 149.5 x 50
329 x 149.5 x 50
315 x 120
315 x 120
FS – 2
FS – 2
FFS5-T012-(x)
FFS5-T020-(x)
12A
20A
250VAC
250VAC
0.3A 18A
M5
M5
0.3A 18A
415 x 199.5 x 60
415 x 199.5 x 60
401 x 160
401 x 160
FS – 2
FS – 2
FFS5-T030-(x)
FFS5-T050-(x)
30A
50A
250VAC
250VAC
0.3A 18A
0.3A 18A
M5
M5
SV075iS5-2
SV110iS5-2
SV150iS5-2
SV185iS5-2
SV220iS5-2
SV008iS5-4
SV015iS5-4
SV022iS5-4
SV037iS5-4
SV055iS5-4
SV075iS5-4
SV110iS5-4
SV150iS5-4
SV185iS5-4
7.5kW
11kW
15kW
18kW
22kW
0.8kW
1.5kW
2.2kW
3.7kW
5.5kW
7.5kW
11kW
15kW
18kW
FS – 3
FS – 3
FS – 1
FS – 2
FS – 2
FS – 2
100A
120A
6A
250VAC
250VAC
380VAC
380VAC
380VAC
380VAC
0.3A 18A
0.3A 18A
0.5A 27A
329 x 149.5 x 50
315 x 120
315 x 120
401 x 160
440.5 x 181
FFS5-T006-(x)
FFS5-T012-(x)
FFS5-T030-(x)
FFS5-T051-(x)
M5
M5
M5
M8
12A
30A
51A
0.5A 27A 329 x 149.5 x 50
415 x 199.5 x 60
466 x 258 x 65
0.5A 27A
0.5A 27A
541 x 332 x 65
541 x 332 x 65
515.5 x 255
515.5 x 255
FS – 2
FS – 2
FFS5-T060-(x)
FFS5-T070-(x)
60A
70A
380VAC
380VAC
0.5A 27A
0.5A 27A
M8
M8
SV220iS5-4
22kW
iS5 series
VARIADOR
/
Filtros Estándar
/
Standard Filters
CORRIENTE
CHOQUES
DE SALIDA
OUTPUT
DIMENSIONES
DIMENSIONS
MONTAJE
MOUNTING
TORNILLOS
DE FIJACION
MOUNT
CODIGO
INTENS.
CURRENT
TENSION
PESO
WEIGHT
POT.
POWER
DE FUGAS
LEAKAGE
CURRENT
INVERTER
CODE
VOLTAGE
L
W
H
Y
X
CHOKES
TRIFASICOS THREE PHASE
NOM. MAX.
SV008iS5-2
SV015iS5-2
SV022iS5-2
SV037iS5-2
SV055iS5-2
0.8kW
1.5kW
2.2kW
3.7kW
5.5kW
250 x 110 x 60
270 x 140 x 60
238 x 76
FS – 2
FS – 2
FE-T012-( x )
FE-T020-( x )
12A
20A
250VAC
250VAC
0.3A 18A
---
---
258 x 106
0.3A 18A
270 x 140 x 60
270 x 140 x 90
258 x 106
258 x 106
FS – 2
FS – 2
FE-T030-( x )
FE-T050-( x )
30A
50A
250VAC
250VAC
0.3A 18A
0.3A 18A
---
---
SV075iS5-2
SV110iS5-2
SV150iS5-2
SV185iS5-2
SV220iS5-2
SV008iS5-4
SV015iS5-4
SV022iS5-4
SV037iS5-4
SV055iS5-4
SV075iS5-4
SV110iS5-4
SV150iS5-4
SV185iS5-4
SV220iS5-4
7.5kW
11kW
15kW
18kW
22kW
0.8kW
1.5kW
2.2kW
3.7kW
5.5kW
7.5kW
11kW
15kW
18kW
22kW
420 x 200 x 130
408 x 166
408 x 166
238 x 76
238 x 76
258 x 106
258 x 106
FS – 3
FS – 3
FS – 2
FS – 2
FS – 2
FS – 2
FE-T100-( x )
FE-T120-( x )
FE-T006-( x )
FE-T012-( x )
FE-T030-( x )
FE-T050-( x )
100A
120A
6A
250VAC
250VAC
380 VAC
380 VAC
380 VAC
380VAC
0.3A 18A
---
---
---
---
---
---
1.3A 180A 420 x 200 x 130
250 x 110 x 60
0.5A 27A 250 x 110 x 60
0.5A 27A
12A
30A
50A
270 x 140 x 60
270 x 140 x 90
0.5A 27A
0.5A 27A
270 x 140 x 90
350 x 180 x 90
258 x 106
338 x 146
FS – 2
FS – 2
FE-T060-( x )
FE-T070-( x )
60A
70A
380VAC
380VAC
0.5A 27A
0.5A 27A
---
---
(x) (1) Industrial environment EN 50081-0 (A class)
(2) Domestic and industrial environment EN 50081-1 (B class)
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIMENSIONS
TIPO
FS – 1
FS – 2
FS – 3
FS – 4
D
21
28.5
48
W
85
105
150
200
H
46
62
110
170
X
70
90
125 x 30
180 x 45
O
5
5
5
5
58
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Revisions
Changeds to be
made
Software
Version No.
1.00
Publication date
Ordering Number
Note
1
2
3
4
5
6
Feb, 1999
April, 2000
March, 2001
July, 2001
May, 2002
June, 2002
1.03
1.05
1.06
1.07
2.00
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleveland Motion Controls
CMC constantly endeavors to improve its product so that
information in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Visit Our Website: http://www.cmccontrols.com/
10/11/2002
Publication #: 10310000291
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|